JP2024061866A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing management of a game machine.SOLUTION: A main-side CPU 63 stores information on a detection result of each ball entry detection sensor in each kind of counter area of a main-side RAM 65 as history information. In reception of an instruction signal for starting checking from a hall computer of a game hall, each kind of parameter is calculated by utilizing history information of each kind of counter area, and the calculation result is reported by utilizing a special pattern display part 37a and a normal pattern display part 38a. In calculation of each kind parameter by utilizing the history information, shooting of game balls is prohibited and execution of a game round or the like is suspended. More specifically, progress of a game is restricted. Execution of a performance in a pattern display device 41 is continued even in a state in which progress of the game is restricted. After that, at a lapse of a display period of a check result, a state in which progress of a game is restricted is canceled.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 50

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko gaming machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section (for example, see Patent Document 1).

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be properly managed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows for optimal management of the gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a performance control means for controlling a performance execution means so that a performance is executed;
A limiting means for limiting the progress of a game based on the occurrence of a limiting trigger;
Equipped with
The presentation control means is characterized in that it allows the execution of the presentation to continue even if the limiting means imposes a limit on the progress of the game.

The present invention makes it possible to optimally manage gaming machines.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. An explanatory diagram to explain the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main CPU. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensor are input to the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball scoring detection process executed by the main CPU. A block diagram to explain the electrical configuration of a dispensing control device and various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the dispensing CPU. 4 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F; FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a correspondence relationship memory; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a history memory; 13 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a management side CPU. 13A to 15D are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in a correspondence memory. 13 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management CPU. 4A to 4E are time charts showing how history information is stored in a history memory. 13 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of an input port of a management side I/F in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a management side CPU. 13A to 13H are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the signal types is stored in a correspondence memory. FIG. 13 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of a management IC according to a third embodiment. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by a control CPU in the fourth embodiment. 13A is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by a main CPU in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a calculation process executed by a management CPU. 23 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by a main CPU in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a calculation process executed by a control-side CPU in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a control CPU in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management CPU. A block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball scoring detection process executed by the main CPU. A block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F; FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a history memory; 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a parameter management process executed by a main CPU. A block diagram to explain the configuration of the signal path that transmits the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor to the main CPU and the management IC in the 12th embodiment. A block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control device and the audio and light-emitting control device in the thirteenth embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a special chart special power control process executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance control process executed by the sound/light side CPU. This is a flowchart showing the special chart change start processing executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the special call start processing executed by the main CPU. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal counter area, an opening/closing execution mode counter area, and a high frequency support mode counter area provided in a main RAM. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball scoring detection process executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal ball scoring detection processing executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by a main CPU. (a) is a front view of the special map display section, (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special map display section, (b) is a front view of the regular map display section, and (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the regular map display section. 13 is a flowchart showing a check waiting process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process during display of a check result executed by a main CPU. 13A to 13G are time charts showing the progress of a check waiting period and a check result display period. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main CPU. 1A to 1J are diagrams showing individual patterns that are variably displayed on a pattern display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing the display surface of a pattern display device. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the pattern display device during the check waiting period or the check result display period. 23 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by a main CPU in the fourteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process during display of a check result executed by a main CPU. 13A to 13G are time charts showing the progress of a check waiting period and a check result display period. An explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port provided in an MPU of an audio and light emission control device in the fifteenth embodiment. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence relationship area provided in an audio-optical ROM; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance control process executed by the sound/light side CPU. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal counter area, an opening/closing execution mode counter area, and a high frequency support mode counter area provided in the sound/light side RAM. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a CPU on the sound and light side; 10 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by a CPU on the sound and light side; A front view of the main control device in the 16th embodiment. This is a cross-sectional view of line AA in Figure 78. A front view of a slot machine in a seventeenth embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the arrangement of symbols on each reel. FIG. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded when a winning combination is achieved. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the normal mode is selected. FIG. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the first RT mode is selected. FIG. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the second RT mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing executed by the main MPU when a game ends. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition chance management process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the ART state processing executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a game management process executed by a master MPU. 1A and 1B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of an image display device. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a lighting process executed by a main MPU. 6A and 6B are time charts showing the relationship between the opening angle of the front door and the control state of the lighting device. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting device when the front door is in an open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting device when the opening angle of the front door is at the maximum opening angle. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main RAM in the 18th embodiment; (b) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the total accumulation buffer; (c) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the first accumulation buffer; and (d) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the second accumulation buffer. 13(a) to (h) are time charts showing how game history is managed. 13 is a flowchart showing a game management process executed by a master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a target switching process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a main MPU. FIG. 23 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC in a nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining configurations of a first history memory and a second history memory; 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a target switching process executed by a management side CPU.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded form. For convenience, Fig. 2 omits the components within the play area PA of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so that it can rotate forward. The outer frame 11 is made of wooden boards connected to its four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to an island facility. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island facility of the amusement hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, which has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the outer frame 11, and also has the function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by using an unlocking key to perform an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11. A roughly elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area PA formed on the front side of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on Figure 3. Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail section 25 and an outer rail section 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail section 25 and the outer rail section 26 form a guide rail as a guide means. Game balls launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see Figure 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

The game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launching rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 55a (described later) onto the launching rail 27a, and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by rotating a launching operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game balls are launched.

The game board 24 has multiple openings of various sizes that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special chart unit 37, and a general chart unit 38. There are a total of four general winning ports 31, and one of each of the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game balls are paid out. On the other hand, when balls enter the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when one game ball enters the first operating opening 33 or when one game ball enters the second operating opening 34, one prize ball is paid out, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out, and when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, fifteen prize balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may be configured to have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, or the second actuation port 34 may be configured to have a larger number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. In addition, numerous nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, "ball entry" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only the case where the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area PA, but also the case where the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 24a, game balls entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35 are also referred to as winning.

The first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are united as an actuation port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are open upward. In addition, both actuation ports 33, 34 are lined up vertically with the first actuation port 33 facing upward. The second actuation port 34 is provided with a normal power device 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of movable pieces on the left and right. When the normal power device 34a is in a closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second actuation port 34, but when the normal power device 34a is in an open state, the game ball can enter the second actuation port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates vertically, and a game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after entering. This makes it possible for a game ball that enters the through gate 35 to enter the second operating port 34.

When a ball wins the through gate 35, the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from a closed state to an open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held when a ball wins the through gate 35, and a changing image is displayed on the normal map display section 38a of the normal map unit 38 located in the lower right corner of the play area PA, an area where the game ball does not pass. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning electric role release, the stop result corresponding to that result is displayed, and the changing display on the normal map display section 38a ends, the normal power open state is entered. In the normal power open state, the normal power role 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The map display unit 38a is configured with a segment display in which a number of segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. The image displayed on the map display unit 38a may be a number of different types of letters, a number of symbols, a number of characters, or a number of colors that are switched between.

In the normal map unit 38, a normal map reserve display section 38b is provided adjacent to the normal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls that enter the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the normal map reserve display section 38b.

A winning lottery is triggered by the entry into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The lottery result is then displayed clearly through the display effects on the special symbol unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special pattern unit 37 in detail, the special pattern unit 37 is provided with a special pattern display section 37a. The display area of the special pattern display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. In the special pattern display section 37a, a winning lottery is held by triggering the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, and a variable display of the pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special pattern display section 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, the pattern displayed on the special pattern display section 37a may be a configuration in which multiple types of letters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed.

In the special chart unit 37, a special chart reserve display section 37b is provided adjacent to the special chart display section 37a. The number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the special chart reserve display section 37b.

Regarding the pattern display device 41 in detail, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be other display devices having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device.

In the pattern display device 41, when the special pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined pattern based on the winning of the first operation port 33 or the winning of the second operation port 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined pattern accordingly. For example, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 has three pattern rows, an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row, set as a plurality of display areas, and in each pattern row, main patterns numbered "1" to "9" are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display of all pattern rows is started first, and the scroll display is switched to a standby display in the order of the upper pattern row → the lower pattern row → the middle pattern row, and finally, the display ends with a static display of a predetermined pattern in each pattern row. Then, for example, in a game in which the game result is a jackpot result, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a pre-set effective line on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.

In addition, the pattern display device 41 not only performs display effects triggered by winning the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, but also performs display effects during the opening and closing execution mode to which the game is switched after a winning combination is achieved. In addition, based on winning the actuation port 33, 34, display is started on the special pattern display unit 37a and the pattern display device 41, and one game round is played until a predetermined result is displayed and the game ends. In addition, the manner of the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the variable display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the patterns displayed by the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above patterns, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are displayed as patterns may be used.

When a big jackpot is won in a lottery based on winning the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the mode transitions to an open/close execution mode in which winning is possible in the special electric winning device 32. The special electric winning device 32 has a large winning port (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open/close door 32a that opens and closes the large winning port. The open/close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open/close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win if an internal lottery is selected to transition to the open/close execution mode. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to which the mode transitions when a winning result is obtained. Note that while winning is not impossible in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which winning is more difficult than in the open state.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram to explain the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, a game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, a game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flows into the game area PA is discharged from the game area PA by entering any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back of the game board 24, discharge passages 42-48 are formed corresponding to the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the outlet 24a, respectively. Game balls that flow into the discharge passages 42-48 flow down the discharge passages 42-48 and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and are collected in a discharge ball collection section (not shown). The game balls collected in the discharge ball collection section are then discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each discharge passage section 42-48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a-48a for detecting game balls. These discharge passage sections 42-48 and detection sensors 42a-48a will be described below. As already explained, four general winning openings 31 are provided, and therefore discharge passage sections 42-44 exist corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided for each of the first discharge passage section 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage section 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to it on the right. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that its detection range is located midway through the first discharge passage section 42, and the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so that its detection range is located midway through the second discharge passage section 43. A game ball that enters the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and a game ball that enters the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the left is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage section 43. In addition, a third discharge passage section 44 is provided for the two general winning openings 31 on the right side, which are formed to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and the entrance side areas merge midway to form one exit side area. A third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the exit side area in the third discharge passage section 44. A game ball that enters either of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage section 44.

The fourth discharge passage section 45 exists in correspondence with the special electric winning device 32. The special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that there is a detection range at the midpoint of the fourth discharge passage section 45, and the game ball that entered the special electric winning device 32 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a while passing through the fourth discharge passage section 45. The fifth discharge passage section 46 exists in correspondence with the first operating port 33. The first operating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that there is a detection range at the midpoint of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and the game ball that entered the first operating port 33 is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a while passing through the fifth discharge passage section 46. The sixth discharge passage section 47 exists in correspondence with the second operating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that there is a detection range at the midpoint of the sixth discharge passage section 47, and the game ball that entered the second operating port 34 is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a while passing through the sixth discharge passage section 47. A seventh discharge passage section 48 exists corresponding to the outlet 24a. An outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the seventh discharge passage section 48, and a game ball that enters the outlet 24a is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a as it passes through the seventh discharge passage section 48.

A gaming ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a-48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a-48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 on its way down the play area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

The various detection sensors 42a-49a are all electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but any sensor can be used as long as it can detect game balls individually. The various detection sensors 42a-49a are electrically connected to the main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a-49a output a LOW level signal when they are not detecting a game ball, and output a HI level signal when they are detecting a game ball. However, this is not limited to the above, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 of the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted into it. The window panel 52 is formed of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this and may be formed of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, or may be formed of color and transparency as long as the game area PA can be viewed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

A display light-emitting unit 53 is provided above the window 51. A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are also provided to output sound effects according to the game status. An upper bulge 55 and a lower bulge 56, which bulge toward the front, are arranged vertically below the window 51. An upper tray 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 55, and a lower tray 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 56. The upper tray 55a has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a row. The lower tray 56a also has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, we will explain the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) is equipped with a main control device 60 that mainly controls the game. The main control device 60 is composed of a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The board box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Possible trace means include a joint structure that inseparably connects the multiple case bodies that make up the board box 60a and requires destruction of a specified portion when separating them, or a structure in which a seal sticker that leaves a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the object to be attached when peeled off is attached across the boundaries between the multiple case bodies. Also, a trace structure may be a structure in which adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the multiple case bodies that make up the board box 60a.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13, including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 72 formed from a transparent synthetic resin, to which a dispensing mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached.

The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls are successively replenished from the island equipment of the gaming hall, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged into the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power source on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 is equipped with a payout control device 77 that has the function of controlling the payout device 76, and a power supply and launch control device 78 that generates and outputs the predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., and controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the launch operation device 28. The payout control device 77 and the power supply and launch control device 78 are stacked one behind the other, with the payout control device 77 at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 which is responsible for the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 which monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62. In addition to a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit, the MPU 62 also contains a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 also contains an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile memory means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 63.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 allows random access, and when compared for the same data capacity, requires less time to read data than the main ROM 64. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control programs stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the ball entry patterns in the play area PA based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Details will be described later, but the management IC 66 keeps track of the ball entry history of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a, and keeps track of the ball entry frequency into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 based on the ball entry history that has been kept track of.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60. The power outage monitoring board 67 is connected to a power supply and launch control device 78 that has the function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with operating power via the power outage monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As already explained, the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, the first operating hole detection sensor 46a, the second operating hole detection sensor 47a, the out hole detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 judges whether a ball has entered each entry section. In addition, the main CPU 63 executes various lotteries based on the entry into the first operating hole 33, and executes various lotteries based on the entry into the second operating hole 34.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and an audio/light emitting control device 81. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77, for example, when a game ball enters a prize ball entry section among the above-mentioned entry sections, where the occurrence of the ball entry corresponds to the payout of the game ball. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio/light emitting control device 81.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to the special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the opening and closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, the normal electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34, the special chart unit 37, and the normal chart unit 38. Incidentally, the special chart unit 37 is provided with a special chart display unit 37a and a special chart reserved display unit 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal chart unit 38 is provided with a normal chart display unit 38a and a normal chart reserved display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open/close execution mode, the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Also, when the open state of the normal electric role 34a is won, the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the normal electric drive unit 34b so that the normal electric role 34a is opened and closed. Also, during each game round, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special chart display unit 37a. Also, when the lottery result of whether or not the normal electric role 34a is opened is clearly indicated, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the normal chart display unit 38a. Also, when a win occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when a variable display starts in the special chart display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special chart reserve display unit 37b, and when a win occurs in the through gate 35, or when a variable display starts in the normal chart display unit 38a, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the normal chart reserve display unit 38b.

The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply and launch control device 78, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement hall. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the power supply and launch control device 78 generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc., and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage, such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state, power for memory retention is supplied from the power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage to the main RAM 65 of the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77. The power supply and launch control device 78 is also responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when certain launch conditions are met.

The audio and light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on commands received from the audio and light emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The master CPU 63 uses various counter information during play to perform a lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, settings for the display of the special chart display section 37a, settings for the display of the pattern display device 41, settings for the display of the normal chart display section 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the master CPU 63 uses a winning random number counter C1 used to draw a lottery for a winning occurrence, a winning type counter C2 used to determine the type of winning, a reach random number counter C3 used to draw a reach occurrence lottery when the pattern display device 41 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the display duration time in the special chart display section 37a and the pattern display device 41. In addition, the master CPU 63 uses a normal power role release counter C4 used to draw a lottery for whether or not the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is in a normal power open state. The above counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 65b of the master RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 65a provided as acquired information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a winning occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

The reserved storage area 65a comprises a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The reserved area RE comprises a first reserved area RE1, a second reserved area RE2, a third reserved area RE3 and a fourth reserved area RE4, and a combination of the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 according to the winning history of the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, the numerical information is stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 in chronological order from the first holding area RE1 to the second holding area RE2 to the third holding area RE3 to the fourth holding area RE4. By providing four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls entering the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other multiple, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the various numerical information stored in the first reserve area RE1 of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 37a begins, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail below.

First, the normal power feature opening counter C4 will be described. The normal power feature opening counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 250, and return to "0" after it reaches its maximum value. The normal power feature opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the normal power reserve area 65c of the main RAM 65 when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a specified timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the normal power feature 34a to an open state based on the stored value of the normal power feature opening counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, multiple types of support modes are set so that the manner of support provided by the normal power device 34a differs from one another. In detail, the support modes are set to a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode so that the frequency with which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively high and low when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously released in the same manner into the game area PA.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power opening state in the normal power opening lottery using the normal power role opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the normal power role 34a will be in the open state when the normal power opening state is won is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for each time is set to be longer. In this case, when the normal power opening state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the normal power role 34a occurs multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time to be secured between one normal power opening lottery and the next normal power opening lottery (i.e., the duration of one display on the normal power display unit 38a) is set to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 33 is higher than in the second actuation port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the first actuation port 33. When a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode becoming in the normal power release state per unit time compared to the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, a configuration for increasing the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery. In addition, in a configuration in which multiple types of reserved time (for example, the time of variable display executed in the normal power display unit 38a based on winning the through gate 35) are prepared for the time reserved between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery, the high-frequency support mode may be set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one or any combination of conditions from increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening time, shortening the reserved time reserved between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery, shortening the average time of the reserved time, and increasing the winning probability.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 when a game ball enters the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot win is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/lose table. As a win/lose table, a win/lose table for a low probability mode and a win/lose table for a high probability mode are set. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the win/lose lottery means.

In a game state where the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot win is two. On the other hand, in a game state where the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot win is twenty. Note that the number of random numbers that will result in a win can be any number, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to "0" after it reaches its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a when a game ball enters the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, multiple jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are set by providing differences in three conditions: (1) the manner of opening and closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and (3) the support mode in the regular electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As the manner of opening and closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set so that the frequency of winning in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. Specifically, in either the high frequency winning mode or the low frequency winning mode, a predetermined number of rounds are played up to the upper limit.

Here, a round of play refers to a game that continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit of duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit of the number of game balls has entered the special electric winning device 32. In addition, the number of rounds of play in the open/close execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is the same fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, regardless of the jackpot result, the upper limit of the number of rounds of play is set to 15 rounds.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the special electric winning device 32 is set to have multiple opening modes with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed. In detail, a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to a long time of 29 seconds and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to a short time of 0.06 seconds, which is shorter than the long time, are set.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In addition, the upper limit number of balls for the end condition of the round game is set to nine. In this case, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration is set to a time longer than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to a time shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when one opening is performed in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of balls in one round game, and when one opening is performed in the short-time mode, it is expected that no prize will be won in the special electric winning device 32, or that if a prize is won, it will be about one ball.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round of play in a long time mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round of play in a short time mode.

The number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, the number of rounds of play, the duration of opening for one opening, and the upper limit number of times per round of play in the high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode are not limited to the above values and are arbitrary, so long as the frequency of winning in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode.

The allocation destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the main ROM 64. The allocation destinations are set to a low probability jackpot result, a low probability jackpot result with a high probability of winning, and a most favorable jackpot result.

A low probability jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose selection mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, this high frequency support mode will transition to the low frequency support mode if the number of plays reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 plays) after the transition.

A low-winning, high-probability jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes a low-frequency winning mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high-probability and high-frequency support modes continue until the lottery result in a win/lose lottery win and the jackpot state is entered.

The most favorable jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high probability and high frequency support modes continue until the lottery result in a win in the jackpot state, which transitions to the jackpot state.

In relation to the above game states, the normal game state refers to a state in which the win/lose selection mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, rather than the open/close execution mode. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a low prize-winning high probability jackpot result is not set as a game result. Also, in the open/close execution mode in a low prize-winning high probability jackpot result, the number of rounds of play may be fewer than in the case of a low probability jackpot result and a most favorable jackpot result.

In the distribution table, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0 to 29," "0 to 9" correspond to a low probability jackpot result, "10 to 14" correspond to a low probability jackpot result with a high probability of winning, and "15 to 29" correspond to the most favorable jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expectation effect is set as a type of display effect in the pattern display device 41. The expectation effect refers to a display state that makes the player think that the change display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result from the start of the change display of the patterns in the pattern display device 41 and before the stop result is derived and displayed in a gaming machine equipped with a pattern display device 41 capable of performing a change display of the patterns, and in which the final stop result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result is a grant corresponding result. Note that, specifically, the grant corresponding result is displayed as a combination of patterns with the same number on one of the pay lines.

There are two types of expectation effects: reach displays and advance notices that are set to anticipate the occurrence of reach displays or corresponding results before the reach display occurs.

The reach display includes a display state in which the reach pattern combination is displayed by stopping the display of the patterns for some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and in this state, the remaining pattern rows display a changing pattern. In addition, it includes a state in which the reach pattern combination is displayed as described above, the remaining pattern rows display a changing pattern, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on the background screen, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a reduced or hidden display of the reach pattern combination and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on almost the entire display surface 41a.

Pre-notification displays include a mode in which characters are displayed separately from the patterns on the pattern rows in a situation in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner in all pattern rows after the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 starts displaying the variable patterns, or in a situation in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner in some pattern rows. Pre-notification displays also include a mode in which the background screen is displayed in a predetermined manner different from the previous manner, and a mode in which the patterns on the pattern rows are displayed in a predetermined manner different from the previous manner. Such pre-notification displays can occur in both game rounds when a reach display is made and when a reach display is not made, but are set to occur with a higher probability when a reach display is made than when a reach display is not made.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game round in which the same symbol combination is ultimately displayed. Also, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not displayed, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in a game round corresponding to a miss result, the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60, but by the audio and light control device 81. In this case, the audio and light control device 81 executes a lottery process for the preview display so that a game round corresponding to any jackpot result satisfies at least one of the conditions that a preview display is more likely to occur and that a preview display with a low occurrence rate is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a miss result. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the performance for the game round is executed by the pattern display device 41.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. The change type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration in the special chart display unit 37a and the display duration of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the change type counter CS is obtained when determining the change pattern at the start of the change display in the special chart display unit 37a and at the start of the pattern change by the pattern display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, we will explain each process executed to progress the game by the master CPU 63. The processes of the master CPU 63 are roughly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In this power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started and then a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses before proceeding to the next process. During the execution period of this power-on wait process, the operation start and initial settings of the pattern display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function registers of the main CPU 63 are set (step S103).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided on the power supply/launch control device 78 has been manually operated (step S104), and further whether the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 has been set to "1" (step S105). In addition, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum (step S106), and it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, i.e., the validity of the stored data (step S107).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example when the gaming hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process moves to step S108. Similarly, if the power interruption occurrence information has not been set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by a checksum, the process moves to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 is set to an initial value, such as initializing the power outage flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. After executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) is executed to cause the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output process is executed to output various data to a reading device connected to the MPU 62 (step S111). The details of the recognition process and the data output process will be explained later.

The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but timer interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring when main processing is started. This state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited is released when step S111 is completed and before step S112 is executed, and timer interrupt processing is permitted to be executed. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output processing of step S111 ends, and timer interrupt processing is not executed until the stage before step S112 is started. Therefore, processing to progress the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

Then, proceed to the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically.

In the remaining process, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S113, random number initial value update processing is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S114, fluctuation counter update processing is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. In these update processing, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 65, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S115, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the processing of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processing of steps S112 to S115 is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 8. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, the power outage information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cut is received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if a power outage is identified, the power outage process is executed and then an infinite loop is entered. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is saved.

Then, a random number update process for lottery is executed (step S202). In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal power feature opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is read out sequentially from the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal power feature opening counter C4, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, each is cleared to "0". After that, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S113, and in step S204, a variable counter update process is executed as in step S114.

Then, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not a specific event set as a target for fraudulent activity has occurred (step S205). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of multiple types of events is monitored, and if a specific event has occurred, a game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the game progress has been stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag has been set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the process from step S207 onwards is executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b, 34b. For example, when information is set to switch the special power winning device 32 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the special power drive unit 32b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, when information is set to switch the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Then, a read process is executed (step S208). In the read process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

Then, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the presence or absence of a ball entering the out gate 24a, the general winning gate 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating gate 33, the second operating gate 34, and the through gate 35 is identified. Details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

Then, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of the multiple types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S210). In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is updated by subtraction are handled in a consolidated manner, but it is also possible to configure the system to collectively update both subtractive timer counters and additive timer counters.

Then, a launch control process is executed to control the launch of the game balls (step S211). When the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch cycle of 0.6 seconds. In the following step S212, as an input status monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, a disconnection check is performed for each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 is confirmed.

Then, a special chart special electric control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the opening and closing execution mode (step S213). In the special chart special electric control process, when a winning occurs in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at that time is stored as reserved information in the reserved storage area 65a in chronological order. In addition, in the special chart special electric control process, under the condition that the game round and the opening and closing execution mode are not in progress and reserved information is stored, a win/loss determination process is executed to determine whether the reserved information corresponds to a jackpot win or not, and if it corresponds to a jackpot win, an allocation determination process is executed to determine which jackpot result the reserved information corresponds to. In addition, in the special chart special power control process, in addition to the hit/miss judgment process and the allocation judgment process, if the reserved information does not correspond to a big win, a reach judgment process is executed to judge whether the reserved information corresponds to a reach occurrence or not, and a process to select the duration of the game round using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is executed. Then, a variation command including information on the duration according to the results of each process and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the voice emission control device 81, and the variation display of the pattern on the special chart display unit 37a is started. By receiving the variation command and the type command, the voice emission control device 81 starts the performance for the game round corresponding to the contents of these commands in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 82. By receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 starts the variation display of the pattern corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern command on the pattern display device 41. This results in one game round being started.

In the special chart special electricity control process, during the execution of one game round, it is determined whether the duration of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed, thereby determining whether it is time to end the game round. If it is time to end the game round, a process is executed to end the game round with a display corresponding to the game result. In this case, if the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of any jackpot result, the image corresponding to the type of jackpot result is displayed in a stopped state on the special chart display unit 37a, and if the current game round corresponds to a loss result, the image corresponding to the loss result is displayed in a stopped state on the special chart display unit 37a. In addition, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the sound and light emission control device 81. By receiving the final stop command, the sound and light emission control device 81 ends the performance for the current game round in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, the sound and light emission control device 81 transmits the final stop command to the display control device 82. By receiving the final stop command, the display control device 82 ends the performance for the current game round in the pattern display device 41.

In the special chart special electric control process, if the result of the game round corresponds to the transition to the open/close execution mode, a process for starting the open/close execution mode is executed. At the start, an opening command indicating that the open/close execution mode is to be started is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. In addition, in the special chart special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When a round game is started, the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state, and when a round game is ended, the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. In each of these processes, an opening command indicating that a round game is to be started is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81, and a closing command indicating that the round game is to be ended is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. In addition, in the special chart special electric control process, when the open/close execution mode is to be ended, an ending command indicating that is to be ended is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. The sound and light emission control device 81 executes the performance for the open/close execution mode in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the open/close execution mode. In addition, the sound and light emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the opening and closing execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the pattern display device 41 to execute the performance for the opening and closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the various commands received during the opening and closing execution mode. In addition, in the special pattern special electric control process, when the opening and closing execution mode is to be ended, a process is performed so that the winning/losing lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode become modes corresponding to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening and closing execution mode.

After executing the special power control process of step S213 in the timer interrupt process, execute the normal power control process (step S214). In the normal power control process, if a winning entry has occurred in the through gate 35, execute a process to obtain the reserved information on the normal side, and if the reserved information on the normal side is stored, execute an opening judgment for the reserved information, and execute a process to perform a performance for the normal side using the opening judgment as a trigger. In addition, execute a process to open and close the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 based on the result of the opening judgment. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. In addition, if the opening and closing execution mode is selected, the support mode immediately before will be the low frequency support mode even if it was the high frequency support mode.

In the next step S215, based on the processing results of the previous steps S213 and S214, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information related to the special drawing display unit 37a in the special drawing reserved display unit 37b, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information related to the ordinary drawing display unit 38a in the ordinary drawing reserved display unit 38b. Also, in step S215, based on the processing results of the previous steps S213 and S214, output information is set to update the display contents of the special drawing display unit 37a, and output information is set to update the display contents of the ordinary drawing display unit 38a.

Then, a payout status receiving process is executed to confirm the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 and perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S216). A payout output process is also executed to set the prize ball command as the output target (step S217). An external information setting process is also executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt processing (step S218). Then, a management output process is executed to output information corresponding to the ball entry result in the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S219). Details of the management output process will be explained later.

Next, we will explain the configuration in the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, and through gate 35 based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a. Figure 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle eight types of signals simultaneously. An area in which information "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, this area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. Although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, in order to limit the types of signals that can be input simultaneously to eight types, the group of signals to be input to the input port 63a is switched through switching control by the driver IC.

In the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a. In a situation where such a setting has been made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the 1st bit D1 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the 2nd bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the 3rd bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a, the 4th bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, the 5th bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second operation opening detection sensor 47a, the 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the out opening detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not detecting as a detection signal when it does not detect the passage of a game ball, and outputs a HI level signal indicating that it is detecting as a detection signal when it detects the passage of a game ball. When the input port 63a receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, it stores "1" information in the corresponding bit. In other words, when the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a do not detect the passage of a game ball, the corresponding bit stores "0" information corresponding to the information indicating that it is not detecting, and when the ball passage is detected, the corresponding bit stores "1" information corresponding to the information indicating that it is detecting.

Figure 10 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8).

When it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has switched from a state in which "0" information is stored to a state in which "1" information is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S301: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S302), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). The first output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. The 10-ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 8), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 10 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S304: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S305), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S306). The second output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S307: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S308), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S309). The third output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S310: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312), and the value of the 15-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special electric winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 during round play in the open/close execution mode. In the special chart special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), by confirming that the special electric winning flag is set to "1", it is determined that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32, and the number of remaining balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32 in a round game is reduced by one. When the process of reducing the number of balls that can enter by one is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. The 15-ball counter is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63 the number of times that 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 8), and the value of the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 15 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

If it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a (step S314: YES). In this case, the first actuation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316), and the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S317). The first actuation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the first actuation port 33. In the special chart special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", a process of storing new reserved information is executed on the condition that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number of 4. In the special power special power control process (step S213), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when a process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". The fifth output flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a should be executed to the management IC 66. The one prize ball counter is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63 the number of times that one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the 1 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 1 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 8), and the value of the 1 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 1 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the 1 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

If it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a (step S318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320), and the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special chart special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", a process is executed to store new reserved information, provided that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit of four. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". The sixth output flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S322: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has switched from a state in which "0" information is stored to a state in which "1" information is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the normal map normal power control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8), by confirming that the gate winning flag is set to "1", the process is executed to store the current numerical information of the normal power role release counter C4 as the normal map side reserved information in the normal power reserve area 65c, provided that the number of reserved information on the normal map side stored in the normal power reserve area 65c is less than the upper limit number of four. In the normal map and normal power control process (step S214), it is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

As already explained, the timer interrupt process (Figure 8) is started at a 4 msec cycle, so when one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a starts to detect one game ball, the main CPU 63 determines that one game ball has been detected by the ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a while the ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a continues to detect that one game ball. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first through seventh output flags.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the dispensing control device 77. First, we will explain the electrical configuration of the dispensing control device 77 and the various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device 77, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 11.

The payout control device 77 is equipped with an MPU 91. In addition to a payout side CPU 92, which is a calculation processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit, the MPU 91 also includes a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile memory means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 is randomly accessible, and when compared with the payout side ROM 93 for the same data capacity, the payout side RAM 94 requires less time to read. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 is capable of two-way communication with the main CPU 63. By receiving a prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. The payout side CPU 92 also monitors whether or not the game balls can be paid out normally, and when it is determined that the game balls cannot be paid out normally, it stops the payout device 76 even if the payout side RAM 94 stores information on the number of prize balls that have not been paid out. The payout side CPU 92 also transmits a payout limit command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the game balls cannot be paid out normally. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout limit command, it transmits a notification command to the sound and light emission control device 81 so that a notification indicating that the game balls cannot be paid out normally is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light emission unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. The states in which game balls cannot be dispensed normally include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 has not been refilled with game balls, an abnormal dispense state in which the dispenser 76 does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is open from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is open from the inner frame 13.

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided midway along the game ball passageway leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the tank is full when game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and determines that the full tank state has been released when the state in which game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released.

A no-ball detection sensor (not shown) is provided at a midway point in the game ball passageway leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that a no-ball state exists when the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect game balls, and determines that the no-ball state has been released when the state in which the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect game balls is released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. The payout side CPU 92 also determines that an abnormal payout state exists when a game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor despite the payout device 76 being driven and controlled so that a game ball is paid out, and determines that the abnormal payout state has been released when the state in which a game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front part of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the dispensing side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closed detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92, and when the front door frame 14 is in an open state relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92. When the dispensing side CPU 92 receives a closed detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, it determines that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state, and when it receives an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, it determines that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. In addition, the dispensing side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a front door close command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The main CPU 63 determines that the front door frame 14 is in an open state when it receives a front door open command, and determines that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state when it receives a front door close command.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closed detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. When the payout side CPU 92 receives a closed detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state, and when it receives an open detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a main body close command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The main CPU 63 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when it receives a main body open command, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when it receives a main body close command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart in Figure 12. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 msec).

First, the full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank process, as already explained, it is determined whether the tank is full or not based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls and a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, if the full tank state is released, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls and a command is sent to the main CPU 63 indicating that the full tank state has been released.

After that, the no-ball process is executed (step S402). In the no-ball process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the no-ball state is present based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor, and if the no-ball state is present, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls, and a command indicating the no-ball state is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, if the no-ball state is released, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a command indicating that the no-ball state has been released is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not a payout abnormality state exists based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if a payout abnormality state exists, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls and a command is sent to the main CPU 63 indicating that a payout abnormality state exists. In addition, if the payout abnormality state is released, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls and a command is sent to the main CPU 63 indicating that the payout abnormality state has been released.

Then, a front door open monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door open monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open or not based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is open, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls and a front door open command is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, if the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls and a front door close command is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, the main body open monitoring process is executed (step S405). As already explained, in the main body open monitoring process, it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, a process is executed to stop the payout of gaming balls and a main body open command is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, if the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of gaming balls and a main body close command is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, a command read process is executed (step S406). In the command read process, a process is executed to read the prize ball command sent by the main CPU 63. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing a prize ball setting process to add the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), a payout control process is executed to control the execution of the payout of game balls by the payout device 76 (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and when the payout detection sensor detects one game ball, the value of the prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process (step S409).

Next, we will explain the configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC installed in the gaming hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and some of which are electrically connected to the payout CPU 92. In this way, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are each electrically connected to the external terminal board 97, so that the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 can externally output information to the hall computer HC, as shown in FIG. 11.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. Regarding the configuration of this electrical connection in detail, a signal relay board 98 is provided at a midpoint of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 that branches from the signal path SL1 from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is not only input to the dispensing side CPU 92, but also input to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without going through the control of the dispensing side CPU 92.

Regarding the main body open sensor 96 in detail, the signal relay board 98 has a branch path SL4 that branches off from the signal path SL3 that runs from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92, but also input to the external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without going through the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Next, we will explain the contents of the information that is externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC. First, we will explain the contents of the information that is externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC.

In the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, information indicating that one game round has ended, information indicating that a predetermined number (e.g., 100 balls) of game balls have been discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34, information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operating port 34.

In the external information setting process (step S409) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the payout CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

The hall computer HC can grasp the manner in which the game balls are paid out in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 via the external terminal board 97. For example,
・The ball payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. ・The ball payout rate in a normal game state other than the open/close execution mode and the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, this ball payout rate will be referred to as "B")
・The ball output rate in the open/close execution mode ・The ball output rate in the high frequency support mode ・The number of times the game is executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S")
B-S x "number of winning balls for winning the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34"
The number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
B-(S1 x "number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33" + S2 x "number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34")
The hall computer HC can thereby manage the ball entry patterns of the game balls in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The number of prize balls refers to the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning status of gaming balls>
Next, a description will be given of a configuration for managing winning states of game balls using the management IC 66. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I/F 101 and a read terminal 102.

The I/F 101 is an interface for sending and receiving signals between the MPU 62 and devices external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and commands from the payout CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 based on the input detection results and command contents as already explained. In addition, when a signal is output to a device such as the special power drive unit 32b as a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, the signal output is executed through the output port of the I/F 101, and when a command is output to the payout CPU 92 and the sound and light emission control device 81 as a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, the command output is executed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting the MPU 62 to a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, and is provided so that the terminal portion for connection is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a to expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent the reading device from being electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 in an unauthorized manner. Note that this is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which an opening is formed in the board box 60a to expose the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60, and the reading device can be electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 without having to destroy the board box 60a.

The management IC 66 includes a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These devices are connected to each other via an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to enable two-way communication.

The management side I/F 111 is an interface for receiving various signals from the main CPU 63 via a group of signal paths 118 for one-way communication built into the MPU 62, and for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via a group of signal paths 119 for one-way communication built into the MPU 62. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to an input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from an output port of the management side I/F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a group of signal paths 120 for two-way communication built into the MPU 62.

The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management ROM 113 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management CPU 112. The management RAM 114 is a memory (i.e., a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management RAM 114 is randomly accessible, and when compared with the same data capacity, it takes less time to read than the management ROM 113. The management RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control programs stored in the management ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date and time information and is capable of outputting the measured date and time information in response to instructions from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is equipped with a backup power supply, making it possible to measure date and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (i.e., a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 is used to store information on the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to those buffers 122a to 122p. The contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described in detail later.

The history memory 117 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding balls entering the game, which is received from the main CPU 63 via the management I/F 111. The contents of the history memory 117 will be described in detail later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be described. Figure 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a number of buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a-122p are provided. Each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a-122p can receive one type of signal via signal paths 118a-118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a-122p stores "0" as the first data when the input signal is at a LOW level, and stores "1" as the second data when the input signal is at a HI level. Note that the relationship between LOW and HI and the first and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when no new game balls are detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and outputs a HI level first signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level first signal has been input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when no new game balls are detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and outputs a HI level second signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level second signal has been input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when no new game balls are detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and outputs a HI level third signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level third signal has been input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the master CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when no new game balls are detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and outputs a HI level fourth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level fourth signal has been input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when no new game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, and outputs a HI level fifth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level fifth signal has been input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when no new game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, and outputs a HI level sixth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level sixth signal has been input to the sixth buffer 122f.

The seventh buffer 122g receives a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal when no new game balls are detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and outputs a HI level seventh signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level seventh signal has been input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW level eighth signal when the open/close execution mode is not in progress, and continuously outputs a HI level eighth signal when the open/close execution mode is in progress.

The ninth buffer 122i receives a ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW-level ninth signal when the high-frequency support mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs a HI-level ninth signal when the high-frequency support mode is in effect.

The tenth buffer 122j receives a tenth signal corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open or not. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continuously outputs a HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open.

An output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output the history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period of time when there is a need to output the history information. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level output instruction signal has been input to the 16th buffer 122p.

The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n and the fifteenth buffer 122o are capable of receiving signals from the main CPU 63, but are blank in this pachinko machine 10 and do not receive normal signals. In this way, by providing a greater number of buffers 122a-122p as input ports 121 of the management I/F 111 in this pachinko machine 10 than the number of types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, it becomes possible to use the management IC 66 in models other than this pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a-118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p, respectively, but this is not limited thereto, and the signal paths 118k-118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k-122o to be blanked.

It was determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management I/F 111, and the management CPU 112 can determine that an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o was not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are identified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The type of these signals is identified by the management CPU 112 when control is started in the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 in response to the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, and will be described in detail later. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management CPU 112 identifies the types of various signals when operating power is being supplied, the information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referenced.

Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The first correspondence area 123a stores information indicating that the general winning port 31 is the general winning port 31, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. The first correspondence area 123a also stores information indicating that the general winning port 31 is the general winning port 31, as well as information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning port 31. The second correspondence area 123b stores information indicating that the general winning port 31 is the general winning port 31, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. The second correspondence area 123b also stores information indicating that the general winning port 31 is the general winning port 31, as well as information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning port 31. The third correspondence area 123c stores information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is the information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition to the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is the third correspondence area 123c, information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also stored.

The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that the signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is the special electric winning device 32, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal. The fourth correspondence area 123d also stores information indicating that the signal is the special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls (15) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32. The fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. The fifth correspondence area 123e also stores information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33, as well as information on the number of game balls (1) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33. The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is the one that is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth correspondence area 123f also stores information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is the one, as well as information indicating the number of game balls (one) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the second actuation port 34. The seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that the outlet 24a is the one that is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the mode is the open/close execution mode, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. The ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the mode is the high frequency support mode, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. The tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating that the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is blank and does not correspond to any of the areas, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is blank and does not correspond to any of the areas, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is blank and does not correspond to any of the areas, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores information indicating that the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is blank and does not correspond to any of the areas, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

As described above, the type of signal to be input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o is determined by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63, making it possible for the management IC 66 to be used in models other than this pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

In addition, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, information for recognizing the type of signal is output in advance, and information for identifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 each time a signal is output, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

In addition, the information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o is output when the supply of operating power begins. This allows the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o when play begins on this pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the information that an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p is set during the design stage of the management IC 66. This makes it possible to omit the process for identifying the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 122p for output instruction signals that are reliably used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other models of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the process for identifying the type of such signal.

Next, we will explain the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. Figure 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, multiple pieces of pointer information are set in consecutive numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and 1 byte of data capacity is assigned as an area for storing RTC information, and 1 byte of data capacity is assigned as an area for storing correspondence information. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j in this pachinko machine 10), the date information and time information measured in the current RTC 115 are first stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer 122a-122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the buffer 122a-122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 that corresponds to the pointer information currently being written.

Specifically, the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125 is stored in the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, as already explained, because signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of ball entry section corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect game balls that have entered the general winning hole 31, so the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to these first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a all store information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31. In addition, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating port 33, the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the outlet 24a. If the buffer 122a-122o that triggered the current information storage is any of the first to seventh buffers 122a-122g, information on the type of ball entry part corresponding to that buffer 122a-122g is read from any of the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a-123g, and the read information on the type of ball entry part is stored as is in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

Meanwhile, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high frequency support mode, and the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating the front door frame 14.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level 8 signal when the open/close execution mode is not in effect, and continues to output the HI level 8 signal when the open/close execution mode is in effect. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that the open/close execution mode has started when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HI, and that the open/close execution mode has ended when the 8th signal changes from HI to LOW. In addition, when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HI, or when the HI to LOW signal changes, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HI, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the start information are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. In addition, when the eighth signal changes from a high level to a low level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information are stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continues to output the ninth signal at a LOW level when the high-frequency support mode is not in effect, and continues to output the ninth signal at a HI level when the high-frequency support mode is in effect. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from a LOW level to a HI level, and that the high-frequency support mode has ended when the ninth signal changes from a HI level to a LOW level. In either case of the ninth signal changing from a LOW level to a HI level, or the HI level to a LOW level, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the ninth signal changes from a LOW level to a HI level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. In addition, when the ninth signal changes from a high level to a low level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information are stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continuously outputs the HI level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that the front door frame 14 is open when the 10th signal changes from LOW to HI, and that the front door frame 14 is closed when the 10th signal changes from HI to LOW. In either case, when the 10th signal changes from LOW to HI, or from HI to LOW, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the 10th signal changes from LOW to HI, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. In addition, when the 10th signal changes from HI to LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening completion information are stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

The history information storage area 125 is provided for a sufficient number of times to enable storage of all history information generated during ten consecutive business days during which game balls are continuously fired in this pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. This makes it possible to store and hold all history information in the history memory 117 for at least ten days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to identify the pointer information currently being written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10, information is set in the pointer area 126 specifying pointer information of "0" as the writing target. Then, every time a piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the last pointer information is the writing target and history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last pointer information, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the pointer information of "0" is the writing target. As a result, when a storage trigger occurs that exceeds the number of history information that can be stored, the history information is overwritten with new history information in order starting from the history information storage area 125 in which the oldest history information is stored.

In addition, when the reading device reads history information from the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to all "0"s, and the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been read from becoming the read target again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning status of the gaming balls using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition processing is executed in step S110 in the main processing (Figure 7).

First, the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "15" (step S501). The recognition output counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine the remaining number of times information output is required to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal each of the buffers 122a-122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111 corresponds to. As already explained, the 15 buffers 1 to 15 122a-122o are the targets for signal type recognition, so the recognition output counter is set to "15".

Then, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. In other words, the first to eighth signals (i.e., the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store history information are used to output a command to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. This makes it possible to reduce the number of signal paths and simplify the configuration compared to a configuration in which the signal path for outputting the command is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. In addition, the output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal. By receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 specifies that a process should be started to store information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116.

Then, a type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a is the first to be set as the signal type, and then the n+1th buffer is set as the signal type after the nth buffer, and so the signal type recognition setting corresponding to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "15" to "13", a type identification command indicating that it is the general winning port 31 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "12", a type identification command indicating that it is the special winning device 32 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "11", a type identification command indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "10", a type identification command indicating that it is the second operating port 34 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "9", a type identification command indicating that it is the outlet 24a is read out; if the recognition output counter is "8", a type identification command indicating that it is in the open/close execution mode is read out; if the recognition output counter is "7", a type identification command indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode is read out; if the recognition output counter is "6", a type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is read out; and if the recognition output counter is "5" to "1", a type identification command indicating that it is blank is read out.

Then, the output process of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has a data capacity of 8 bits, like the identification start command, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. In addition, the output period of the identification type command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these identification type command and the ninth signal. By receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the identification type command in the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer that is the current setting target among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Then, the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is "0" (step S506). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or greater (step S506: NO), processing is executed to output a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement (steps S503 and S504).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S506: YES), output processing of the recognition end command is executed (step S507). The recognition end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the recognition end command output processing, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing when the recognition end command output is started in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been sent. In addition, the output period of the recognition end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the recognition end command and the output state of the ninth signal. By receiving the recognition end command, the management side CPU 112 determines that the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed.

Next, the management process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 18. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management CPU 112 is configured to be faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the combination of processes from step S606 onwards in the management process is executed 16 or more times between the start of one timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) in the main CPU 63 and the start of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When an identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter that allows the management CPU 112 to identify the type of buffer 122a to 122o for which the signal type is to be set. The first buffer 122a is the first to be set as the signal type, and thereafter the nth buffer and then the n+1th buffer are set as the signal type.

After that, on the condition that a type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), a correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, information on the signal type set in the currently received type identification command is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Then, the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S605).

If a negative judgment is made in step S603, or if the processing of step S605 is executed, it is judged whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If an identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and the processing of steps S604 and S605 is executed again on the condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES).

If an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of steps S607 and S608 are repeatedly executed. In step S607, details of which will be described later, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117. In step S608, details of which will be described later, an external output process is executed to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102.

Figure 19 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. Figure 19(a) shows the period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (i.e., the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), Figure 19(b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, Figure 19(c) shows the execution period of the identification state during which processing is executed to identify the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o, and Figure 19(d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S604) is executed by the management CPU 112.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 19(a). Also, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). Then, at the timing of t2, when the output of the identification start command is continuing, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). The management CPU 112 identifies that a command has been sent from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from HI level to LOW level, and grasps the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 by confirming the information of the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making a positive determination in step S601 of the management process (FIG. 18). After that, at timing t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

After that, at the timing of t4, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 19(a). Also, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). After that, at the timing of t5, when the output of the type identification command is continuing, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). The control side CPU 112 identifies that a command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from HI level to LOW level, and grasps the contents of the command received from the main side CPU 63 by confirming the information of the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the control side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 19(d) at the timing of t5. In this correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is a general winning port 31 and information on the number of winning balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. After that, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

After that, from t7 to t9, from t10 to t12, from t13 to t15, and from t16 to t18, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the master CPU 63, similar to the process from t4 to t6. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 15th type identification command is completed from t16 to t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 19(a). Also, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). After that, at the timing of t20, when the output of the identification end command is continuing, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that a command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from HI level to LOW level, and grasps the contents of the command received from the main side CPU 63 by confirming the information of the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 19(c). After that, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG. 19(a).

As described above, the configuration allows the management CPU 112 to recognize whether or not a command is being output using the 9th signal, so that the management CPU 112 can clearly recognize that a command is being output even in a configuration in which the command is output using the 1st to 8th signals (i.e., the 1st to 8th signal paths) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 on the timing to store history information.

Next, the process configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. Figure 20 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 8).

First, the managed object counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "10" (step S701). The managed object counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether there are any managed objects that have not been specified as whether the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process, and to determine whether the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed for which managed object. In one management output process, the managed objects for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, whether the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, whether the high frequency support mode is being executed, and whether the front door frame 14 is being opened or closed, a total of 10 objects. Therefore, the managed object counter is initially set to "10".

Then, it is determined whether the signal output state to the management CPU 112 for the managed object corresponding to the current value of the managed object counter is at HI level (step S702). If it is not at HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether the value of the managed object counter is 4 or more, thereby identifying which of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is the managed object corresponding to the value of the managed object counter (step S703).

If the positive judgment is made in step S703, it is judged whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning port detection sensor 42a, it is judged whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning port detection sensor 43a, it is judged whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "8" and corresponds to the third winning port detection sensor 44a, it is judged whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is judged whether or not the third ... special power detection sensor 45a, it is judged whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "8" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is judged whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is judged whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is judged whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is judged whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", if the If the value of the managed counter is "6" and corresponds to the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, the fifth output flag is determined to be set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "5" and corresponds to the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, the sixth output flag is determined to be set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the out port 24a, the seventh output flag is determined to be set to "1". As already explained, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (Figure 10).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level (step S705). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

If a negative judgment is made in step S703, it is determined whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a HI level (step S707). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether a transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred; if the value of the managed counter is "2", it is determined whether a transition to the high frequency support mode has occurred; and if the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has been opened. If a positive judgment is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to a HI level (step S708).

If a positive judgment is made in step S702, it is judged whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a LOW level (step S709). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is 4 or more and the current managed object is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, it is judged whether a HI output duration (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals was switched from a LOW level to a HI level. This HI output duration is set in the management side CPU 112 to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (Figure 18), and is a period during which the management side CPU 112 can reliably identify the output state of the signal that has switched from a LOW level to a HI level. In addition, if the value of the managed counter is "3" and the current managed object is in the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended; if the value of the managed counter is "2" and the current managed object is in the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode has ended; and if the value of the managed counter is "1" and the current managed object is the front door frame 14, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. If an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed object counter to a LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed object counter is set to a LOW level (step S710).

If a negative judgment is made in step S704, if the processing of step S706 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S707, if the processing of step S708 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S709, or if the processing of step S710 is executed, the value of the managed object counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed object counter after the decrement is "0" (step S712). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or greater (step S712: NO), the processing from step S702 onwards is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new managed object counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 21. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in which information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information of the identified number is set in the check target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S801 the check target counter is set to "10".

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has changed from "0" to "1", it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has been switched from LOW level to HIGH level (step S802). Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the targets for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information.

If the determination in step S802 is affirmative, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 that is the current write target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S803 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 that corresponds to the pointer information that is the write target. In addition, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence area 123a to 123o that corresponds to the current value of the counter to be confirmed, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 that corresponds to the pointer information that is the write target. In addition, if the correspondence information is any one of information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and information indicating the front door frame 14, not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written to the history information storage area 125 that corresponds to the pointer information that is the write target. If the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading out the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading out the correspondence information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target for reading out the correspondence information.

By executing the writing process as described above, when the value of the counter to be checked is any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the combination of the RTC information and the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, when the value of the counter to be checked is any of the opening and closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the combination of the RTC information, the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is any of the opening and closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the start information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S805). In this update, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the increment of one has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value has not been exceeded, the pointer information after the increment of one is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as the new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value has been exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the initial pointer information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S802, or if the processing of step S805 is executed, it is judged whether or not the correspondence information for checking whether the signal output has been switched to a LOW level is stored in the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked (step S806). Specifically, if the current value of the counter to be checked is "8" to "10", the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j stores any of information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and information indicating the front door frame 14, so a positive judgment is made in step S806.

If the determination in step S806 is affirmative, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is checked to see if it has changed from "1" to "0", thereby determining whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from HI level to LOW level (step S807). If the determination in step S807 is affirmative, the RTC information is read as in step S803 (step S808), and a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the current counter value to be checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, not only the correspondence relationship information but also the end information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this manner, when the value of the counter to be checked is either the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, or the front door frame 14, a combination of the RTC information, the correspondence relationship information indicating either the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, or the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S805 (step S810).

If a negative judgment is made in step S806, if a negative judgment is made in step S807, or if the processing of step S810 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S812). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S812: NO), the processing from step S802 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value.

Next, the manner in which history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 22. FIG. 22(a) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, FIG. 22(b) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h, FIG. 22(c) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, FIG. 22(d) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and FIG. 22(e) shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117.

At time t1, the output state of the signal input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW to HIGH as shown in FIG. 22(a). Therefore, at time t1, history information is written to the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. 22(e). After that, at time t2, the signal that was switched to HIGH at time t1 is switched to LOW as shown in FIG. 22(a). However, since the signal is input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the switching to LOW is not a target for storing history information, writing of history information is not executed at time t2 as shown in FIG. 22(e).

After that, at times t3, t5, t6, t9, t10, t13, and t14, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW to HIGH as shown in FIG. 22(a). Therefore, at each of these times, history information is written as shown in FIG. 22(e).

As shown in FIG. 22(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is at HI level from t4 to t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the occurrence or non-occurrence of the open/close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), history information is written at t4, when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to HI level, and at t7, when the output state of the signal switches to LOW level. In this case, the history information written at t4 includes start information, and the history information written at t7 includes end information. This makes it possible to ascertain the execution period of the open/close execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, the history information is written in chronological order to the history memory 117. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening and closing execution mode. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening and closing execution mode by comparing the RTC information.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is at HI level from t8 to t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the occurrence or nonoccurrence of the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), history information is written at t8, when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to HI level, and at t11, when the output state of the signal switches to LOW level. In this case, the history information written at t8 includes start information, and the history information written at t11 includes end information. This makes it possible to ascertain the execution period of the high-frequency support mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, the history information is written in chronological order to the history memory 117. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is from the high-frequency support mode. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is from the high-frequency support mode by comparing the RTC information.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is at HI level from t12 to t15. This tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether the front door frame 14 is open or not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), history information is written at t12, when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to HI level, and at t15, when the output state of the signal switches to LOW level. In this case, the history information written at t12 includes start information, and the history information written at t15 includes end information. This makes it possible to know the period during which the front door frame 14 is open by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, the history information is written in chronological order to the history memory 117. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 was recorded while the front door frame 14 was open. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 was recorded while the front door frame 14 was open by comparing the RTC information.

Next, a process configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 7).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 has been received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and if the connection signal has been received through the reading terminal 102, a positive determination is made in step S901.

If a negative judgment is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. In order to output the history information externally, it is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Since the power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back of the back pack unit 15, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 relative to the outer frame 11 to expose the back of the back pack unit 15 in order to perform these stopping and starting operations. Under these circumstances, by configuring it so that the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 in order to output the history information externally, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the manager of the gaming hall to read the history information.

If the determination in step S901 is positive, it is determined whether a signal for confirming control information has been received from the reading terminal 102, and whether the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 corresponds to confirmation of the control information (programs and data) of the main ROM 64 (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to confirm both the control information and the history information, and when confirmation of the control information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the reading device, and when confirmation of the history information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, a signal for confirming history is transmitted from the reading device. Note that this is not limited to this, and a reading device for confirming control information and a reading device for confirming history may be configured separately. In this case, when a reading device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the reading device, and when a reading device for confirming history is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming history is transmitted from the reading device.

If a positive determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming the control information is executed (step S903). In this output process, the program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the read terminal 102. This makes it possible to read the control information in a reading device electrically connected to the read terminal 102, and to confirm whether the control information is authentic or normal.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is sent to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level. This HIGH level output state continues for a specific period of time. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HIGH level output instruction signal has been input to the 16th buffer 122p. As a result of the output state of the output instruction signal being switched to a HIGH level, a process is executed in the management CPU 112 to output history information. This process will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S903 or step S904 is executed, it is determined whether the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continuing (step S905). If it is continuing (step S905: YES), the process waits in step S905. This makes it possible to prevent a process set in the execution order after the data output process from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), the data output process is terminated.

Next, the external output process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 24. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from LOW level to HIGH level (step S1001: YES), the process for outputting the history information from step S1002 onwards is executed. Specifically, the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the outgoing port 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is counted to calculate the number of balls that enter the outgoing port 24a (step S1002). In addition, the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the general winning port 31 is counted in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 to calculate the number of balls that enter the general winning port 31 (step S1003). In addition, the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the special winning device 32 is counted in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 to calculate the number of balls that enter the special winning device 32 (step S1004). In addition, the number of balls that have entered the first actuation port 33 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the first actuation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 (step S1005). In addition, the number of balls that have entered the second actuation port 34 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 (step S1006).

Then, by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 that occurred when the front door frame 14 was in an open state is calculated (step S1007). The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information with consecutive numbers, if there are multiple sections between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. In addition, if there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, but the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored does not store the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the front door frame 14, the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, the number of balls that entered the gate while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1007, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the gate calculated in steps S1002 to S1006. The following parameters are then calculated using the number of balls that entered the gate after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1002 is designated as the number of balls entering the port 24a, the difference between the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1002 is designated as the number of balls entering the port 24a, the difference between the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1002 and the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1007 is designated as the number of balls entering the port 24a, the difference between the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1002 and the number of balls entering the port 24a, the difference between the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1002 and the number of balls entering the port 24a calculated in step S1002 is designated as ....
First parameter: total number of game balls dispensed (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the skill area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D1")
Second parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K2 to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5); Third parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 K3 to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5); Fourth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K4 to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D2")
Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K5) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3")
Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of winning balls for winning through the first actuation port 33" + D3 x "number of winning balls for winning through the second actuation port 34")
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") ratio. Then, the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are used to calculate the total time required for all the history information that was the subject of the current calculation to be extracted (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is output to the reading terminal 102 in sequence. Moreover, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the first output process is read.

Then, by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored, the number of balls entering each of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 that occurred in the open/close execution mode is calculated (step S1011). The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information with consecutive numbers, if there are multiple sections between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. In addition, if there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored, but the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored does not store the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, all the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored is treated as being in the opening and closing execution mode.

Then, during the period in which the opening and closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is in effect, the number of balls that enter each of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 while the front door frame 14 is in the open state is calculated (step S1012). The method for calculating the number of balls that enter is the same as in step S1007, except that the method is based on the period in which the opening and closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is in effect.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of balls that entered the front door frame 14 while it was open, calculated in step S1012, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered the out-door 24a calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered the out-door 24a calculated in step S1012 is set as the number of balls entered K11, the difference between the number of balls entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1012 is set as the number of balls entered K12, and the difference between the number of balls entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered K13 is set as the number of balls entered K14. The difference between the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1012 is designated as the number of entering balls K13, the difference between the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 is designated as the number of entering balls K14, and the difference between the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1012 is designated as the number of entering balls K15.
11th parameter: total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D11")
・12th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K12/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・13th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 K13/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・14th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K14/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12")
15th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K15) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D13")
16th parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of winning balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + D13 x "number of winning balls for winning into the second actuation port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special line winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special line winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") ratio. Then, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information that is to be output in the second output process.

Then, by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored, the number of balls entering each of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 that occurred in the high-frequency support mode situation is calculated (step S1015). The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information with consecutive numbers, if there are multiple sections between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. In addition, if there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored, but the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored does not store the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode, the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored is treated as being in the high-frequency support mode.

Then, during the period of the high-frequency support mode identified in step S1015, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 while the front door frame 14 was in the open state is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating these numbers of balls is the same as in step S1007, except that it is based on the period of the high-frequency support mode identified in step S1015.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of balls that entered the front door frame 14 while it was open, calculated in step S1016, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered the out-door 24a calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered the out-door 24a calculated in step S1016 is set as the number of balls entered K21, the difference between the number of balls entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1016 is set as the number of balls entered K22, and the difference between the number of balls entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered K23 is set as the number of balls entered K24. The difference in the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1016 is designated as the number of entering balls K23, the difference in the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1016 relative to the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 is designated as the number of entering balls K24, and the difference in the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015 relative to the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1016 is designated as the number of entering balls K25.
21st parameter: total number of game balls dispensed (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning the special winning device 32" + K24 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K25 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D11")
22nd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K22/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) 23rd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 K23/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) 24th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K24/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22")
25th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K25) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D23")
26th parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of winning balls for winning the first actuation port 33" + D23 x "number of winning balls for winning the second actuation port 34")
Then, a third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1017 are output in sequence to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information that is the output target in the third output process. Then, a clear process is executed (step S1019). In the clear process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to all "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When a game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, the game ball is paid out, so the player plays the game while hoping that the game ball will enter any of these ball entry sections. In this configuration, when a game ball enters any of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entry section), the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the ball entry frequency in the pachinko machine 10, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball entry mode of each history target ball entry section. In addition, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

All ball entry sections that eject game balls from the game area PA are subject to the execution of the history information storage process and are also subject to management using the history information. This makes it possible to manage the frequency of ball entry at any history target ball entry section using the history information. It also makes it possible to manage the ratio of the number of balls that enter each history target ball entry section to the number of balls that are ejected from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target entry part that triggered the storage of the history information. This makes it possible to use the history information to obtain a detailed understanding of the game ball entry history at the history target entry part.

The history memory 117 stores not only history information corresponding to game balls entering the history target ball entry section, but also history information indicating whether the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, history information indicating whether the high frequency support mode is in effect, and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not. This makes it possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the manner in which game balls enter the history target ball entry section.

The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device, which is a device external to the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the reading device and use the read history information to analyze the manner in which game balls enter the history target ball entry portion.

The MPU 62 is provided with a read terminal 102, and a reading device electrically connected to the read terminal 102 can read the program from the main ROM 64. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal or not. In this configuration, the read terminal 102 for externally outputting the program is used to externally output the history information stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming too complicated.

It is determined whether the information to be output from the read terminal 102 is a program or history information, and the information corresponding to the determination result is output to the outside through the read terminal 102. As a result, in a configuration in which history information is output to the outside using the read terminal 102 for externally outputting a program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be output to the outside is a program or history information, and outputs the determined information to the outside. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the read terminal 102 is used for both purposes, it is possible to read out only the necessary information.

Based on information received from a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is determined whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for selecting the information to be output externally from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62, which has a main ROM 64 that stores programs in advance, has a management IC 66 and a read terminal 102. This makes it possible to consolidate the signal path to the read terminal 102 within the MPU 62. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal path to the read terminal 102.

A management CPU 112 is provided in addition to the main CPU 63, which executes the process to have game balls paid out based on the game balls entering either the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34, and the management CPU 112 executes the process to have history information stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to manage the game ball entry patterns into each history target ball entry section while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing excessively.

The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to each of the buffers 122a to 122g of the input port 121 of the management IC 66, using the signal paths corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This allows the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to correspond to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (i.e., each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to whether the system is in the open/close execution mode, information corresponding to whether the system is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open to each of the buffers 122h-122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. This allows the type of information corresponding to each of these situations to correspond to each of the buffers 122h-122j (i.e., each signal path), making it possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing between each type of information in the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112 correspondence information indicating which type of information each of the buffers 122a to 122j (i.e., each of the signal paths 118a to 118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information to the management IC 66. This makes it possible for the management IC 66 to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry area in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry area.

The correspondence information is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target entry portion. This makes it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the correspondence information.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the management IC 66 to identify the historical target goal location that corresponds to the information to be transmitted each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of each goal detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 regarding the detection results of each goal detection sensor 42a to 48a.

When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 switches from LOW level to HIGH level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the read terminal 102. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for transmitting the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a-122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information that need to be sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This makes it possible to accommodate an increase or decrease in the number of types of information depending on the model of pachinko machine 10 without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a-122p. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the read terminal 102, the history information contains correspondence information indicating the type of history target ball entry section that corresponds to the history information. This makes it possible to use the read history information to identify the manner in which the game ball entered each history target ball entry section.

In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (parameters 1 to 8, 11 to 18, and 21 to 26) corresponding to the ball's entry into the play area PA during a specified period are calculated. This makes it possible to output the various parameters calculated using the history information to the outside.

Various parameters are calculated with the historical information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in the normal situation where the front door frame 14 is closed. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is in effect and the situation where the high frequency support mode is in effect are calculated. This makes it possible for the manager of the amusement hall to grasp the manner in which game balls enter the game depending on each situation.

When various parameters have been calculated, a process for clearing the history memory 117 is executed, thereby initializing the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which history information that would normally be stored and held is erased by overwriting, as a result of the history information being stored in the history memory 117 to the extent that it exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117.

When various parameters are output to the read terminal 102, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the read terminal 102. This makes it possible to refer to not only the various parameters but also the history information that is the basis for the calculation of the various parameters when reading out various parameters to analyze the ball entry behavior in the play area PA.

The management CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which various parameters are calculated.

When the main CPU 63 determines that a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the main CPU 63 transmits output instruction information, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66, and the various parameters resulting from the calculation are output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to output various parameters to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

Whether or not a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is determined in the process executed by the main CPU 63 when the supply of operating power is started, and when it is determined that the reading device is electrically connected, output instruction information is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where the process when the supply of operating power is started is being executed by the main CPU 63, etc., that is, in a situation before the normal process for progressing the game is started by the main CPU 63, the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results from being performed in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the management IC 66.

In a configuration in which an external output corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 is sent via the external terminal board 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to easily determine the number and frequency of game balls that have entered the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 by using the information outputted externally via the external terminal board 97, while accurately determining the number and frequency of game balls that have entered the history target entry portion by using the history information stored in the history memory 117.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the type of buffers for which the type of input signal is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111 differs from that of the first embodiment. Also, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to cause the management CPU 112 to identify the type of input signal differs from that of the first embodiment. The configurations that differ from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment above. In detail, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third buffer 122c receives a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the fourth buffer 122d receives a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a, the fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a, the sixth buffer 122f receives a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a, the seventh buffer 122g receives a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the sixteenth buffer 122p receives an output instruction signal.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j, but in this embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as an opening/closing execution mode signal to the thirteenth buffer 122m, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input as a high-frequency support mode signal to the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as a door open signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

The input of an open/close execution mode signal to the 13th buffer 122m, the input of a high frequency support mode signal to the 14th buffer 122n, the input of a door open signal to the 15th buffer 122o, and the input of an output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p are determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 can specify that the above-mentioned signals corresponding to the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p are input without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the type of signal to be input to the 1st to 12th buffers 122a to 122l is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals is specified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 of the main process (Figure 7) as in the first embodiment.

First, the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l that are to be recognized for the signal type (step S1101). Then, output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S1102). In this output processing, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the identification start signal. The period for which these signals are maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Then, the information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output count counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1103). The output count counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to identify the number of times the type identification signal has been output.

In this embodiment, when the management CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, a type identification signal is output the same number of times as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry section corresponding to that type of signal. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. In other words, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is understood as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry section corresponding to that type of signal.

In step S1103, if the value of the recognition output counter is any of "12", "11" and "10", the output count counter is set to "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning port 31. If the value of the recognition output counter is "9", the output count counter is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the special winning device 32. If the value of the recognition output counter is "8", the output count counter is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33. If the value of the recognition output counter is "7", the output count counter is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34. If the value of the recognition output counter is "6", the output count counter is set to "0" since the output counter corresponds to the outlet 24a but the payout of the game balls is not executed even if the game ball enters the outlet 24a. Also, if the value of the recognition output counter is between "5" and "1," there is no corresponding ball entry section and it is blank, so the output count counter is set to "0."

After that, the output process of the start trigger signal is executed (step S1104). In this output process, the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is set to a HI level, thereby starting the output of the start trigger signal. The period during which the first signal is maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Then, on condition that the value of the output count counter in the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1105: YES), i.e., on condition that a value of 1 or more has been set in the output count counter in step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, output processing of a type identification signal is executed. In this output processing, the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the type identification signal. The period during which the second signal is maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Then, the value of the output count counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1107), and it is determined whether the value of the output count counter after decrement is "0" (step S1108). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1105, or if a positive judgment is made in step S1108, output processing of the end trigger signal is executed (step S1109). In this output processing, the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the end trigger signal. The period during which the third signal is maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Then, the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1110), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after decrement is "0" (step S1111). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or greater (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103, and processing is performed to recognize the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after decrement.

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1111: YES), output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S1112). In this output processing, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the identification end signal. The period during which these signals are maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Next, the management process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 27. The management process starts when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 starts, as in the first embodiment.

When reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). Thereafter, on the condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. When a type identification signal has been received (step S1204: YES), the value of the reception count counter provided in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1205). The reception count counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to identify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception count counter is cleared to "0" when a positive determination is made in step S1203.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1204, or if the processing of step S1205 is executed, it is judged whether or not a termination trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If a termination trigger signal has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204. If a termination trigger signal has been received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence setting process, the value set in the reception count counter is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114, among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c are set to "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning port 31, the fourth correspondence area 123d is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the special winning device 32, the fifth correspondence area 123e is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33, and the sixth correspondence area 123f is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34. In addition, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1208).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1203, or if the processing of step S1208 is executed, it is judged whether or not reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1209). If reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S1209: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and, on the condition that a start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the processing of steps S1204 and onward is executed. If reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1209: YES), the history setting processing of step S1210 and the external output processing of step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

Figure 28 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 28(a) shows the period when the output state of the first signal is at HI level, FIG. 28(b) shows the period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level, FIG. 28(c) shows the period when the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 28(d) shows the period when the output state of the open/close execution mode signal is at HI level, FIG. 28(e) shows the period when the output state of the high frequency support mode signal is at HI level, FIG. 28(f) shows the execution period of the identification state in which a process is executed to identify the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l, FIG. 28(g) shows the timing when the value of the reception counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 28(h) shows the timing when the correspondence setting process (step S1207) is executed by the management CPU 112.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level at the timing of t1 as shown in Figures 28(a), 28(d), and 28(e). This starts the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. Then, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. This stops the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. At the timing of t2, the management CPU 112 makes a positive determination in step S1201 of the management process (Figure 27), and enters the identification state as shown in Figure 28(f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at a HI level from time t3 to time t4 as shown in FIG. 28(a). This results in a state in which a start trigger signal has been output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at a HI level from time t5 to time t7 as shown in FIG. 28(b). This results in a state in which a type identification signal has been output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at time t6, the value of the reception count counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 28(g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level from timing t8 to timing t10 as shown in FIG. 28(c). This results in a state in which a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t9, the management CPU 112 executes a correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 28(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence information of "1" is stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the current setting target in the correspondence memory 116.

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at HI level from timing t11 to timing t12 as shown in FIG. 28(a). This results in a state in which a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at HI level from timing t13 to timing t15, from timing t16 to timing t18, from timing t19 to timing t21, and from timing t22 to timing t24 as shown in FIG. 28(b). This results in a state in which a type identification signal has been output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23 as shown in FIG. 28(g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level from timing t25 to timing t27 as shown in FIG. 28(c). This results in a state in which a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t26, the management CPU 112 executes a correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 28(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" when the correspondence setting process is executed, the information "10" is stored as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the current setting target in the correspondence memory 116.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in Figures 28(c), 28(d), and 28(e), the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. This starts the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. This stops the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. At the timing of t29, the management CPU 112 makes a positive determination in step S1209 of the management process (Figure 27), and the identification state is released as shown in Figure 28(f).

In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entry part that triggered the storage of the history information as the correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are multiple ball entry parts with the same number of prize balls, the ball entry parts cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 both have one prize ball, the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 cannot be distinguished in the history information. In such circumstances, the number of prize balls in the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 may be made different. As a result, even in a configuration in which history information is stored as in the second embodiment, it is possible to distinguish the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 in the history information.

In addition, in this embodiment, in step S801 of the history setting process, the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is set to "15." This causes all of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o to become confirmation targets.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, not only the output instruction signal, but also the information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the information corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress, and the information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open can be identified by the management CPU 112 as the signal path corresponding to these information without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is the information that the main CPU 63 needs to make the management CPU 112 recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g. Then, when the correspondence information is made to the management CPU 112, the number of pulse signals equal to the number of winning balls corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the second signal. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for transmitting the correspondence information.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the trigger for executing the calculation of various parameters using the history information is different from that in the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 29 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is also provided with a calculation result memory 131. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. The calculated various parameters are then stored sequentially in the calculation result memory 131. The various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The timing for calculating various parameters occurs before the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to differentiate between the timing for calculating various parameters and the timing for externally outputting the parameters to the reading device, thereby distributing the processing load.

In addition, by providing a calculation result memory 131 for storing the calculation results of various parameters, it is possible to store not only the various parameters for one calculation trigger, but also the various parameters for multiple calculation triggers together. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to calculate the various parameters at each calculation trigger.

Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p are input with the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. In detail, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a, the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning port detection sensor 43a, the third buffer 122c receives a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning port detection sensor 44a, the fourth buffer 122d receives a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a. A signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f, a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 to provide the management CPU 112 with an opportunity to calculate various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, just like the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 can specify that the above-mentioned signals corresponding to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p are input without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the type of signal to be input to the 1st to 14th buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals is specified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a process configuration for allowing the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. Figure 31 is a flowchart showing the power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the power outage information storage process is executed in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8).

In the power failure information storage process, if a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1301: YES), output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1302). In this output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level. After that, after executing the power failure processing in step S1303, an infinite loop is entered and the system waits until the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure processing, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is saved.

Figure 32 is a flowchart showing the power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the power failure response process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (Figure 18), and after receiving an identification end command from the main CPU 63 in the management process (step S606: YES), the history setting process in step S607, the external output process in step S608, and the power failure response process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure response process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1401: YES), in steps S1402 to S1406, the number of balls that have entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning outlet 31, special winning device 32, first operating outlet 33 and second operating outlet 34 is calculated, similar to steps S1002 to S1006 of the external output process (Figure 24) in the first embodiment described above. In addition, in step S1407, the number of balls that have entered each type when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated, similar to step S1007 of the external output process (Figure 24) in the first embodiment described above. In step S1408, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1409, the total time is calculated in the same manner as in step S1009 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the calculation result information in step S1408 and the calculation result information in step S1409 are written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S1410). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to identify the timing to which the calculation result information written this time corresponds.

Then, in step S1411, the number of balls entering during the opening and closing execution mode is calculated in the same manner as step S1011 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment described above, and in step S1412, the number of balls entering during the opening and closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated in the same manner as step S1012 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment described above. Also, in step S1413, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as step S1013 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment described above. Then, the information on the calculation result in step S1414 is written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S1414). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine what point in time the calculation result information written this time corresponds to.

After that, in step S1415, the number of balls entering during the high-frequency support mode is calculated in the same manner as step S1015 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1416, the number of balls entering during the high-frequency support mode when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated in the same manner as step S1016 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Also, in step S1417, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result in step S1417 is written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S1418). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time. After that, an infinite loop is entered, and the system waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the external output process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (Figure 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S1501: YES), the output process of the calculation result is executed (step S1502). In this output process, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. In this case, if only various calculation results corresponding to a single calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 131, only the various calculation results corresponding to the single calculation trigger are read by the reading device, and if various calculation results corresponding to multiple calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 131, the various calculation results corresponding to the multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device.

After that, a process for outputting the history information is executed (step S1503). In this output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is output in sequence to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the various pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it becomes possible for the worker using the reading device to perform a detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

Then, a clear process is executed (step S1504). In the clear process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to all "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. In the clear process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to all "0". As a result, the calculation result memory 131 is initialized.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power is to be stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to HI level, causing the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters. This makes it possible for the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

The various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are written sequentially to the calculation result memory 131. This allows the various parameters to be stored in the management IC 66, and when the various parameters are read by a reading device, it is possible to read out the various parameters for multiple business days all at once.

When various parameters are written to the calculation result memory 131, information that enables the time when the various parameters were calculated to be identified is written to the calculation result memory 131 together with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze the various parameter information while knowing the time when the various parameters were calculated.

Note that the history memory 117 may be configured to be cleared to "0" when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters for that calculation are written to the calculation result memory 131. This makes it less likely that new history information will be written to the history memory 117 when the maximum number of pieces of history information that can be stored is already stored in the history memory 117.

In addition, the information to be output to the reading device may be only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output to the outside. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information to be output to the outside.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure response processing executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration that differs from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the third embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). In the various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 is within a reference range (step S1603).
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") ratio Eighth parameter The two parameters, K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34"), are set as parameters to be determined as to whether they are within the reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, a positive determination is made in step S1603 as the predetermined parameters are within the reference range.

The predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh and eighth parameters, and other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters instead of or in addition to the seventh and eighth parameters. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K2/the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be set as the predetermined parameter. In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be within the reference range. Also, only the predetermined parameter to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated in the various calculation processes in step S1602.

If the specified parameters are not within the reference range (step S1603: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S1604). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to identify the timing to which the calculation result information written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the specified parameter is within the reference range (step S1603: YES), the processing of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only the various parameters when the specified parameter is not within the reference range are written to the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, if an abnormal situation occurs, the history of the abnormal situation is left in the calculation result memory 131, while the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced.

If a positive determination is made in step S1603, or if the processing of step S1604 is executed, a process of clearing the history memory 117 is executed (step S1605). In this clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to all "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This causes the history area 124 to be initialized. After the processing of step S1605 is executed, an infinite loop is entered, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, it is determined whether the contents of the various calculated parameters are within a reference range, and only the various parameters that are determined not to be within the reference range are written to the calculation result memory 131. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131, and therefore the storage capacity required in the calculation result memory 131.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters are different from those of the third embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the third embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the third embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 35 (a) is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (Figure 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1701). If a positive determination is made in step S1701, an increment process is performed on the ball entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1702). In this increment process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined based on the number of times step S705 has been executed in the management output process (Figure 20) for this processing round. The determined number of game balls is then added to the ball entry counter.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S1703). If it is equal to or greater than "500" (step S1703: YES), a subtraction process is executed on the ball entry counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1704). In this subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". Then, an output process of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1705). In this output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period of time. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level.

Figure 35 (b) is a flowchart showing the calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the calculation process is executed in place of the power failure response process in the third embodiment. Therefore, the calculation process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (Figure 18), and after receiving an identification end command from the main CPU 63 in the management process (step S606: YES), the history setting process in step S607, the external output process in step S608, and the calculation process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly when operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, it becomes possible to precisely manage the ball entry patterns in the game area PA within a business day.

In addition, since the various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being played. This makes it possible to prevent the various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not being played continuously.

Sixth embodiment
In this embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters are different from those of the fifth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the fifth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (Figure 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). The continuation counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine the period during which no game ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34.

If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1904). The stop reference value is set so that a positive judgment is made in step S1903 when a state in which no game ball enters any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds. In addition, the time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to measure the time to specify the timing to switch the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. If the value of the time measurement flag is "0", the time is not measured, and if the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If a positive judgment is made in step S1901, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1903, if the processing of step S1904 is executed, or if the processing of step S1905 is executed, the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S1907) on the condition that the time measurement flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S1906: YES). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time to determine the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

It is determined whether the value of the measurement counter after incrementing by 1 is equal to or greater than the indication reference value (step S1908). The indication reference value is set so that a positive determination is made in step S1908 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If a positive determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S1909), and output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1910). In this output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period of time. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period of time elapses, so it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when a game is not being played, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when a game round is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude situations where a game is not being played from the calculation of various parameters, and to appropriately derive various parameters when a game is being played.

In addition, instead of using a measurement counter to measure whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the measurement may be performed using RTC115.

Seventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the control CPU 112 to calculate various parameters are different from those in the first embodiment, and the occurrence of the calculation trigger is not specified by the main CPU 63 but is performed independently by the control CPU 112. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the calculation process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (Figure 21).

In the history setting process of the current processing round, it is determined whether history information corresponding to the occurrence of game balls entering any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 has been stored in the history memory 117 (step S2001). If a positive determination is made in step S2001, an increment process of the ball entry counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2002). In this increment process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined based on the number of times that history information corresponding to the occurrence of game balls entering has been stored in the history setting process of the current processing round. Then, the determined number of game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2003). If it is equal to or greater than "500" (step S2003: YES), a subtraction process is executed on the ball entry counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2004). In this subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". Then, various calculation processes are executed (step S2005). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power outage response process (Figure 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly when operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, it becomes possible to precisely manage the ball entry patterns in the game area PA within a business day.

In addition, since the various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being played. This makes it possible to prevent the various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not being played continuously.

The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 determines whether the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In other words, the management CPU 112 determines the calculation trigger for various parameters independently. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing for determining the calculation trigger for various parameters, making it possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

Eighth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 (see FIG. 29). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and writes the various parameters of the calculation result to the calculation result memory 131. In addition, in this embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening and closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening and closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode has started, a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode has ended, a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has ended are each sent individually from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2101). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in which information other than information indicating that the areas are blank is identified, and the information for the identified number is set in the check target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating which of the ball entry areas they correspond to, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information corresponding to the start of the opening and closing execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information corresponding to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information corresponding to the start of the high-frequency support mode, the eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode, the twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information corresponding to the start of opening the front door frame 14, and the thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores information corresponding to the end of opening the front door frame 14. Therefore, in step S2101, the confirmation target counter is set to "13".

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has changed from "0" to "1", it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has been switched from LOW level to HIGH level (step S2102). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the targets for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information.

If the determination in step S2102 is affirmative, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2103). Then, a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2104). In the write process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S2103 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. In addition, correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is the object to read the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading out the correspondence information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target for reading out the correspondence information.

Then, the value of the target pointer is incremented by 1 (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical information is incremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the pointer information after the increment of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2106).

If it exceeds the maximum value (step S2106: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2107). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters and total time information of the calculation results are written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2108). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to identify the timing to which the calculation result information written this time corresponds.

Then, a state information handover process is executed (step S2109). In this handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current state is in the open/close execution mode, whether the current state is in the high frequency support mode, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. Then, this state information is written to the management side RAM 114.

Then, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S2110). In the clearing process, all of the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This causes the history area 124 to be initialized. After the clearing process is executed, the state information written to the management side RAM 114 in step S2109 is read. If state information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress is stored, history information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. If state information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored, history information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. In addition, if status information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2102, if a negative judgment is made in step S2106, or if the processing of step S2110 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S2112). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S2112: NO), the processing from step S2102 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, various parameters are calculated when the amount of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit of the number of pieces that can be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the history information to be stored exceeds the upper limit of the number of pieces that can be stored in the history memory 117, making it impossible to accurately calculate various parameters.

In addition, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been the subject of calculations of various parameters from becoming the subject of calculations of various parameters again.

In addition, even if the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information handover process is executed. This makes it possible to properly manage state information.

Ninth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. The configurations that differ from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with a first to fifteenth counter 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o. The first counter 141a to 144a of each area 141 to 144 stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The second counter 141b to 144b of each area 141 to 144 stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The third counters 141c to 144c in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has been changed from a low level to a high level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has been changed from a low level to a high level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has been changed from a low level to a high level. The fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has been changed from a low level to a high level. The 15th counters 141o to 144o in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o has changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level.

However, the measurement targets using the 1st to 15th counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are the 1st to 7th buffers 122a to 122g, to which signals corresponding to the result of a ball entering the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34 are input. Therefore, the 8th to 10th buffers 122h to 122j, to which signals corresponding to status information such as whether or not the opening and closing execution mode is in effect, whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is open, are excluded from the above measurement targets. The distinction as to whether or not these are measurement targets is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information of the identified number is set in the check target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S2201 the check target counter is set to "10".

Then, it is determined whether the buffer 122a-122o corresponding to the current counter to be checked is a buffer to which a status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the following correspondence information is stored in the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked: information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, or information indicating the front door frame 14.

If the determination in step S2202 is affirmative, a setting process for state information is executed (step S2203). In this setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is switched from LOW level to HI level, first state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the first state information is erased from the management RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is switched from LOW level to HI level, second state information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the ninth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the second state information is erased from the management RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the 10th signal, which indicates whether the front door frame 14 is open or not, switches from a LOW level to a HIGH level, information on the third state, which indicates that the front door frame 14 is open, is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the 10th signal switches from a HIGH level to a LOW level, information on the third state is erased from the management RAM 114.

If the determination in step S2202 is negative, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, which receives a signal of information different from the status information, is checked to determine whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HIGH level (step S2204). If the determination in step S2204 is positive, an addition process is executed for the corresponding counter for totalization (step S2205). In this addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth counters for totalization 141a to 141o in the totalization area 141 of the history memory 117 is added by 1. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter for totalization 141e is added, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter for totalization 141a is added.

Then, by referring to the state information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the first state, i.e., whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (step S2206). If the state is the first state (step S2206: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the first state (step S2207). In this increment process, one is incremented from the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the increment target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is the increment target.

Then, by referring to the state information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the second state, i.e., whether or not the state is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If the state is the second state (step S2208: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the second state (step S2209). In this increment process, one is incremented to the value of the counter that corresponds to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the increment target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is the increment target.

Then, by referring to the state information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, i.e., whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If the state is the third state (step S2210: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the third state (step S2211). In this increment process, one is incremented from the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the increment target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is the increment target.

When the processing of step S2203 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S2204, when a negative judgment is made in step S2210, or when the processing of step S2211 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S2213). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S2213: NO), the processing of steps S2202 and onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history into the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times the ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

In this manner, the number of times game balls have been detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a is stored as information, so that in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment, it is not necessary to calculate the number of game balls that have entered the outlet 24a in step S1002, the number of game balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32 in step S1004, the number of game balls that have entered the first operating port 33 in step S1005, and the number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34 in step S1006. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 such as step S1003, since the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c all correspond to the general winning opening 31, it is necessary to execute a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. In addition, the number of balls entering the opening/closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entering the opening/closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entering the opening/closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entering the opening/closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, in the external output process in this embodiment (Figure 24), step S1016 is not executed.

Tenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the storage means for storing the history information is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 41 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a read terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is also provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, and a management RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 does not have the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 has a calculation result memory 131, as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 does not have the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the ball entry history into the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. In other words, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores information necessary when executing a program in the main CPU 63, is also used as a memory for storing the ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I/F 111, and when an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs, it accesses the main RAM 65 to read the goal history, and calculates various parameters using the read goal history. The calculated parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 131, but the goal history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device.

Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the ball scoring detection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the ball scoring detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8).

When it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S2301: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2302). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the general winning hole 31 as a ball entry history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the reading device reads various parameters from the calculation result memory 131. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter is stored and retained even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. After that, the value of the 10-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2303).

If it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S2304: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2305). After that, the value of the 10 winning ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2306).

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S2307: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2308). After that, the value of the 10 winning ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2309).

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S3210: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2311). In addition, the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2312). The special electric winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32 as a ball entry history. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the special electric winning counter is stored and retained even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. After that, the value of the 15 winning ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2313).

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a (step S2314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2315). In addition, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2316). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter is stored and retained even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. After that, the value of the single winning ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2317).

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a (step S2318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2319). In addition, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2320). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter is stored and retained even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. After that, the value of the single winning ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2321).

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S2322: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2323). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the outlet 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored and retained even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

If it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S2324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the ball entry history into the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65 as the number of balls that entered each entry section. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to output a signal to the management CPU 112 every time a ball enters any of the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

In this embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 reads the number of balls that enter the general winning port 31 from the general winning counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that enter the special winning device 32 from the special winning counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 from the first operation counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 from the second operation counter in the main RAM 65, and reads the number of balls that enter the out port 24a from the out counter in the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated using each of the read numbers of balls. However, since the number of balls that enter when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of balls that enter when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured separately, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated including the number of balls that enter when the front door frame 14 is open. Furthermore, since the number of balls that enter during the opening and closing execution mode and the number of balls that enter during the high frequency support mode are not measured individually, the first to eighteenth parameters and the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters described in the first embodiment above are not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written to the calculation result memory 131. Then, when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all parameters that are currently written in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

In addition, instead of the management IC 66 accessing the main RAM 65 on its own, the information on the number of balls that have been entered, stored in the main RAM 65 as a ball entry history, may be transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 from accessing the main RAM 65 simultaneously.

Eleventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the type of signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the history of balls entering each ball entry section are different from those in the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from those in the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as those in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 43 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62, as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a read terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is also provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 does not have an RTC 115. Also, in addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is provided with an alarm light-emitting unit 151. The light emission of the alarm light-emitting unit 151 is directly controlled by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using the information on the ball entry history at each entry section read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emission state of the alarm light-emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the calculated various parameters. The alarm light-emitting unit 151 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main control device 60, but the board box 60a is formed transparent, and the alarm light-emitting unit 151 is provided so that the light emission state of the alarm light-emitting unit 151 can be visually confirmed from outside the board box 60a. This allows the gaming machine main body 12 to be opened relative to the outer frame 11, making it possible to visually check the main control device 60, and thus makes it possible to visually check the light-emitting state of the notification light-emitting unit 151 without having to open the base box 60a.

Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment above. In detail, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third buffer 122c receives a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the fourth buffer 122d receives a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a, the fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a, the sixth buffer 122f receives a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a, the seventh buffer 122g receives a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the sixteenth buffer 122p receives an output instruction signal.

Meanwhile, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j, but in this embodiment, the signals corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 are not input to the input port 121. In other words, no signals related to the ball entry history are input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals that are input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are identified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. As in the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 begins. On the other hand, it was determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 can identify that an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving instructions from the main CPU 63.

Figure 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The seventh buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The thirteenth buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fourteenth buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The 15th buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o has changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level.

However, the objects to be measured using the counters for the first to fifteenth buffers 152a to 152o are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, to which signals corresponding to the result of a ball entering either the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34 are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the above measurement objects. The distinction as to whether or not these are objects to be measured is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (Figure 18).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2401). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information of the identified number is set in the check target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S2401 the check target counter is set to "7".

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has changed from "0" to "1", it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has been switched from LOW level to HIGH level (step S2402). Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the targets for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first buffer 122a is the target for checking the numerical information.

If the determination in step S2402 is positive, an addition process is performed on the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o (step S2403). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer counter 152e is the counter to be added, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first buffer counter 152a is the counter to be added.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2402, or if the processing of step S2403 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S2405). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S2405: NO), the processing from step S2402 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history into the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment above, but is stored as information on the number of times the ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the external output process in this embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (Figure 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S2501: YES), the number of counters among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o to which the management CPU 112 outputs the number of times information is set in the output target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S2502). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the information of the identified number is set in the confirmation target counter. In this embodiment, as already explained, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, so in step S2502, the output target counter is set to "7".

Then, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read (step S2503), and the number information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the history memory 117 is read (step S2504). In this case, if the output target counter value is "n", the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the nth buffer counters 152a to 152o is the target for reading the number information. For example, if the output target counter value is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the fifth buffer counter 152e is the target for reading the number information, and if the output target counter value is "1", the first correspondence area 123a is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 152a is the target for reading the number information.

Then, an information output process is executed (step S2505). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read in step S2503 and the number information read in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number information for the correspondence information to be output this time.

Then, the value of the output target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether the value of the output target counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2507). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or greater (step S2507: NO), the processing from step S2503 onwards is executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. Note that if a positive determination is made in step S2507, the values of the 1st to 15th buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (Figure 8).

First, it is determined whether or not a calculation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S2601). The calculation trigger occurs when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has started, and when the total number of game balls entering the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 reaches or exceeds 500, which is the trigger reference number, as in the fifth embodiment. Since the first time the parameter management process is executed after the supply of operating power has started is set as the calculation trigger, it is possible to easily generate a calculation trigger for various parameters by turning the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF once and then ON again. Then, if a positive determination is made in step S2601, a notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters is executed as described below, so that it is possible to grasp the ball entry state of the game balls in the game area PA up to that point simply by performing the above-mentioned power OFF/ON operation. In addition, by configuring the system so that a calculation trigger occurs each time the total number of game balls entering the game area reaches or exceeds 500, which is the trigger reference number, it becomes possible to precisely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S2601: YES), the scoring history is read from the counter that is the target of storing the scoring history among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the history memory 117. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 is able to recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the scoring history is to be read, based on the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2603). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the winning ball history read in step S2602 and the information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning ball history. The main CPU 63 can determine, using the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64, which of the outlet 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 each winning ball history read in step S2602 corresponds to, and can determine the information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning ball history read in step S2602.

Specifically, the various parameters calculated in step S2603 are as follows:
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" the ratio of "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" to the total number of game balls paid out; and the eighth parameter: the ratio of K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34" is calculated.

It is then determined whether the various calculated parameters are within the first range (step S2604). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the various calculated parameters are within the first range and a positive determination is made in step S2604. If a positive determination is made in step S2604, a setting process for the first alarm state is executed (step S2605). In this setting process, the light emission of the alarm light-emitting unit 151 is controlled to enter the first alarm state. In this case, the alarm light-emitting unit 151 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether the various calculated parameters are in the second range (step S2606). If only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, it is determined that the various calculated parameters are in the second range and a positive determination is made in step S2606. If a positive determination is made in step S2606, a setting process for the second alarm state is executed (step S2607). In this setting process, the light emission of the alarm light-emitting unit 151 is controlled to enter the second alarm state. In this case, the alarm light-emitting unit 151 emits yellow light.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2606, this means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, a setting process for the third notification state is executed (step S2608). In this setting process, the light emission of the notification light-emitting unit 151 is controlled so as to enter the third notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting unit 151 emits red light.

The light emission state set in step S2605, step S2607, or step S2608 continues until a new notification state is set for the notification light-emitting unit 151 or until the supply of operating power to the notification light-emitting unit 151 is stopped. In addition, since the notification state of the notification light-emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light-emitting unit 151 is temporarily turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emission control of the notification light-emitting unit 151 is executed so that the light emission state corresponds to the type of information on the notification state stored in the main RAM 65.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The ball entry history into the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times the ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

An indicator light-emitting section 151 is provided to indicate the contents corresponding to the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112. As a result, the contents corresponding to the various parameters are indicated by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the state of balls entering the game area PA without having to read the information stored in the history memory 117.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with an MPU 62 and a notification light-emitting unit 151. This makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light-emitting unit 151.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light-emitting unit 151 are performed by the main CPU 63, not the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the notification content from the notification light-emitting unit 151.

When the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is reached; when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is reached; and when the calculation results of the various parameters do not correspond to either the first or second range, the third notification state is reached. In other words, the various parameters are not reported as they are, but rather content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters are included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent too many notification patterns in the notification light-emitting unit 151, and makes it possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light-emitting unit 151.

Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of power to the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be continued, so that the light-emitting state immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped is maintained. In this case, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the state of entry of the game ball in the game area PA by checking the notification light-emitting unit 151.

Instead of this configuration, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be controlled to emit light when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, but when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may emit light corresponding to the results of the various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light-emitting unit 151 before opening at an amusement hall, it is possible to understand the ball entry status on the previous business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the notification light-emitting unit 151, but may be a display device having a display surface such as the pattern display device 41, or may be the speaker unit 54. In addition, a signal corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may be externally output to the hall computer HC of the gaming hall via the external terminal board 97.

The special chart display unit 37a of the special chart unit 37 or the ordinary chart display unit 38a of the ordinary chart unit 38 may be configured to double as the notification light-emitting unit 151. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or other range as in the above embodiment, a notification corresponding to the calculation result is executed in the special chart display unit 37a or the ordinary chart display unit 38a immediately after the supply of operating power is started. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition of the picture change display in the special chart display unit 37a or the start condition of the picture change display in the ordinary chart display unit 38a is satisfied, or may be configured to be temporarily suspended when the start condition of the picture change display is satisfied and to resume when the picture change display is finished. According to this configuration, it is possible to double as a notification means for notifying the ball entry state of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light-emitting unit 151 may be provided in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be provided in a position that is rearward of the pachinko machine 10 from the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it is possible to check the notification content that corresponds to the calculation results of various parameters without having to open the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

Twelfth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for providing the information of each shot result to the management IC 66 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the signal path for inputting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning port detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

The first branch path SL21 is formed by branching from the middle of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The second branch path SL22 is formed by branching from the middle of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The third branch path SL23 is formed by branching from the middle of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching from the middle of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching from the middle of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching off from a midpoint of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching off from a midpoint of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without the intervention of processing by the main CPU 63. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing to make the management CPU 112 recognize the results of each ball entry at the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, making it possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

In addition, the branching points of each of the branching paths SL21 to SL27 from each of the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are located inside the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branching points and each of the branching paths SL21 to SL27 from outside, and makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inputting abnormal ball entry results only to the management IC 66.

Thirteenth embodiment
In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 is provided with a management IC 66, but in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided. Instead, the main CPU 63 executes a process to manage the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34. The following describes the configurations that differ from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 50 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control device 60 and the audio and light emission control device 81 in this embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the main control board 61 of the main control device 60 is provided with an MPU 62. As in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and an I/F 101, but does not have a management IC 66. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via an internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, and commands from the payout CPU 92, etc. are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands, as already explained. In addition, when various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 and a signal is output to devices such as the special display unit 37a and the regular display unit 38a, the signal is output through the output port of the I/F 101, and when various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 and a command is output to the payout CPU 92 and the sound and light emission control device 81, the command is output through the output port of the I/F 101.

The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 97, as in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 outputs a signal to the hall computer HC, while the hall computer HC does not output a signal to the main CPU 63. In this embodiment, the main CPU 63 outputs a signal to the hall computer HC, and the hall computer HC outputs a signal to the main CPU 63. The type of signal output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, that is, the content of the information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, is the same as in the first embodiment. The hall computer HC outputs a check start instruction signal to the main CPU 63, which will be described in detail later, to instruct the main CPU 63 to calculate various parameters using the ball entry history of each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 and to notify the results of the calculation.

When the calculation using this ball entry history is being performed and when the calculation result is being notified, the display control of the pattern display device 41 is executed in a corresponding manner. The execution instruction for such display control is executed by the sound and light emission control device 81 based on a command sent from the main CPU 63. In detail, the sound and light emission control device 81 is equipped with a sound and light emission control board 161 on which an MPU 162 is mounted. In addition to the sound and light side CPU 163, which is a calculation processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit, the MPU 162 of the sound and light emission control board 161 also has built-in sound and light side ROM 164, sound and light side RAM 165, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The sound/light side ROM 164 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The sound/light side ROM 164 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the sound/light side CPU 163.

The sound/light side RAM 165 is a memory (i.e., a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound/light side RAM 165 is randomly accessible, and when compared with the sound/light side ROM 164 for the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster. The sound/light side RAM 165 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the sound/light side ROM 164.

The sound/light side CPU 163 receives commands from the main CPU 63, but does not transmit commands to the main CPU 63. The sound/light side CPU 163 receives a variation command, a type command, and an opening command from the main CPU 63, as in the first embodiment described above. When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives these commands, it executes a process to determine the performance corresponding to the received command, and executes light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the determined content. It also transmits a command corresponding to the determined content to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 according to the content of the received command.

In addition to the above commands, the sound/light CPU 163 also receives a demo start command and a check start command from the main CPU 63. The demo start command is a command that instructs the start of a demo performance. The demo performance refers to a start waiting performance that is started by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 when a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed since the end of the previous game round. In the start waiting performance, the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute a performance different from the performance for the game round and the performance for the open/close execution mode. The check start command, which will be described in detail later, is a command that instructs the pattern display device 41 to execute the display control in a corresponding manner during the execution of a calculation that uses the management result of this ball entry history and during the execution of the notification of the calculation result.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63.

Steps S2701 to S2705 are the same as steps S201 to S205 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8) in the first embodiment. After that, a check process is executed (step S2706). The check process, which will be described in detail later, uses the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 to calculate various parameters and executes a process to notify the results of the calculation.

Then, it is determined whether the game is stopped or the check result display period (step S2707). As in the first embodiment, if it is confirmed that a specified event (for example, detection of illegal radio waves or detection of illegal vibrations) has occurred in the fraud detection process (step S2705), the game stop flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", and it is determined that the game is stopped in step S2707. If it is confirmed that the occurrence of the specified event has been released, the game stop flag is cleared to "0", and it is no longer determined that the game is stopped in step S2707. The check result display period is a period during which the calculation results of various parameters performed using the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 are notified. When the notification is started in step S2706, it is set to the check result display period, and when the notification is ended in step S2706, the check result display period is released.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2707, the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed to progress the game. Specifically, in step S2708, port output processing is executed similarly to step S207 in the first embodiment, in step S2709, reading processing is executed similarly to step S208 in the first embodiment, in step S2710, ball entry detection processing is executed, in step S2711, timer update processing is executed similarly to step S210 in the first embodiment, in step S2712, launch control processing is executed similarly to step S211 in the first embodiment, and in step S2713, input state monitoring processing is executed similarly to step S212 in the first embodiment, In step S2714, special picture special power control processing is executed, in step S2715, normal picture normal power control processing is executed similarly to step S214 in the first embodiment described above, in step S2716, display control processing is executed similarly to step S215 in the first embodiment described above, in step S2717, payout status reception processing is executed similarly to step S216 in the first embodiment described above, in step S2718, payout output processing is executed similarly to step S217 in the first embodiment described above, and in step S2719, external information setting processing is executed similarly to step S218 in the first embodiment described above.

On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2707, the processes in steps S2708 to S2719 are not executed. As a result, if a setting indicating that play is stopped is made in the fraud detection process in step S2705, or if a display period for the check result is set in the check process in step S2706, some of the processes necessary to progress play will not be executed.

Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the special chart special power control process executed in step S2714.

First, it is determined whether it is time to start a demo display (step S2801). If a demo display is not being performed and a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed since the end of the previous game round, it is determined that it is time to start a demo display. If it is time to start a demo display (step S2801: YES), a demo start command is sent to the sound/light side CPU 163 (step S2802).

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the performance control process executed by the sound/light side CPU 163. The performance control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a demo start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S2902: YES), it executes a performance determination process for the demo (step S2903). In the performance determination process for the demo, the data table for the demo performance is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the demo performance is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. After that, the demo start command is sent to the display control device 82 (step S2904). By receiving the demo start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display performance for the demo performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart special power control process (FIG. 52), if a negative judgment is made in step S2801 or if the process of step S2802 is executed, the process of acquiring reserved information is executed (step S2803). In the process of acquiring reserved information, it is judged whether or not a winning has occurred in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, and if a winning has occurred, it is judged whether or not the number of reserved balls in the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit, the number of reserved balls is incremented by 1, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S2702 is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE. Note that if winning balls have been won in the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 at the same time, the process of acquiring the reserved information is executed multiple times within the range in which the process of acquiring reserved information is executed once.

In addition, when new pending information is acquired, a corresponding acquisition command is sent to the sound/light side CPU 163. When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives an acquisition command, it sends a command corresponding to the acquisition command to the display control device 82 in other processing (step S2914) in the performance control processing (Figure 53). The display control device 82 that receives the command changes the display mode in the pending display area Ga (Figure 66 (b)) on the pattern display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the increase in pending information. Details of the pending display area Ga will be explained later.

Then, the information of the special picture special call counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S2804), and the special picture special call address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S2805). Then, a start address corresponding to the information of the special picture special call counter is obtained from the special picture special call address table (step S2806), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address among the processes of steps S2808 to S2814 (step S2807). The special picture special call counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes of steps S2808 to S2814 should be executed, and the special picture special call address table is set with the start address of the program for executing the processes of steps S2808 to S2814 corresponding to the numerical information of the special picture special call counter.

In step S2808, the special chart change start process is executed. Figure 54 is a flowchart showing the special chart change start process.

In the special chart change start process, the data setting process is executed (step S3002) on the condition that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE is 1 or more (step S3001: YES). In the data setting process, the reserved number is first subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 of the reserved area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each reserved area RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE. This data shift process is a process to shift the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 to the lower area side in order, and the data in the first reserved area RE1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second reserved area RE2 to the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 to the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 to the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a shift command is sent to the sound and light side CPU 163 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a shift command, it transmits a command corresponding to the shift command to the display control device 82 in other processing (step S2914) in the performance control processing (FIG. 53). The display control device 82 that receives the command changes the display mode in the pending display area Ga (FIG. 66(b)) in the pattern display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to a decrease in pending information. Details of the pending display area Ga will be explained later.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart variation start process (FIG. 54), after the data setting process is executed, the win/loss determination process is executed (step S3003). In the win/loss determination process, first it is determined whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. If it is the high probability mode, it is determined whether the information for win/loss determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical information related to the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information for the high probability, by referring to the win/loss table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 64. Also, if it is the low probability mode, it is determined whether the numerical information related to the win random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the jackpot numerical information for the low probability by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 64.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S3004: YES), an allocation determination process is executed (step S3005). In the allocation determination process, the information for allocation determination from the information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2, is read out. Then, by referring to the allocation table provided in the main ROM 64, it is determined which jackpot result the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 read out above corresponds to. Specifically, it is determined which jackpot result it corresponds to among a low probability jackpot result, a low prize high probability jackpot result, and a most favorable jackpot result.

Then, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3006). Specifically, information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special chart display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is identified from a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 64, and the identified information is written to the main RAM 65. In this stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the form of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the special chart display unit 37a is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

After that, a flag set process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S3007). Specifically, flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result are provided in the main RAM 65, and in step S3007, the flag corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process in step S3005 is set to "1" among the flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3004 that the result is not a jackpot win, a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S3008). Specifically, information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the special chart display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is identified from a stop result table for miss results stored in advance in the main ROM 64, and the identified information is written to the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern form selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern form selected in the case of a jackpot result.

After executing either the process of step S3007 or step S3008, a process for grasping the duration of the game round is executed (step S3009). In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Also, it is determined whether or not a reach display will occur on the pattern display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation has a low probability jackpot result or a most favorable jackpot result, it is determined that a reach display will occur. Also, if there is no jackpot result and furthermore the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach display will occur.

If it is determined that a reach display will occur, the reach occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced to obtain the duration of the game corresponding to the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach display will not occur, the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced to obtain the duration of the game corresponding to the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS. Incidentally, the duration of the game that can be obtained by reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game that can be obtained by reference to the reach occurrence duration table.

The duration of the game when a reach does not occur is set so that the more reserved information stored in the reserved area RE, the shorter the duration of the game. In addition, the non-reach duration table is set so that a shorter duration of the game is selected when the support mode is a high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, when the number of reserved information is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the duration of the game may not change depending on the number of reserved information or the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game when a reach occurs. In addition, a duration table may be set separately for each of various jackpot results, a miss reach, and a miss result without a reach. In this case, the duration of the game is allocated according to each game result.

Then, the information on the duration of the game acquired in step S3009 is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3010). The numerical information set in the special chart special electricity timer counter is updated in the timer update process (step S2711). Incidentally, as a performance for a game round, the special chart display unit 37a displays a changing pattern, and the pattern display device 41 displays a changing pattern. When each of these changing displays ends, the final stop is displayed for the final stop period (e.g., 0.5 sec) in a state in which the stop result of that game round is displayed (in the pattern display device 41, a predetermined combination of patterns is waiting on the active line). In this case, the duration of the game round acquired in step S3009 is the total time for one game round.

Then, the variation command and the type command are sent to the sound/light side CPU 163 (step S3011). The variation command includes information on the duration of the game round. Here, as described above, the duration of the game round obtained by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the game round obtained by referring to the reach duration table. Therefore, even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not a reach has occurred, the sound/light side CPU 163 can determine whether or not a reach has occurred from the information on the duration of the game round. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Note that the variation command may also include information directly indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a variation command and a type command from the main CPU 63, it executes a game round performance determination process by making a positive judgment in step S2905 of the performance control process (FIG. 53) (step S2906). In the game round performance determination process, a performance lottery process is executed according to the contents of the variation command and type command received this time. In addition, a data table corresponding to the combination of the contents of the variation command and type command received this time and the result of the performance lottery process is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the performance for the game round is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 over the duration of the game round determined this time by the main CPU 63. After that, a variation pattern command corresponding to the type of the data table read in step S2906 is sent to the display control device 82 (step S2907). Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 starts the variation display of the pattern on the pattern display device 41, thereby starting the presentation for the game round on the pattern display device 41, and also controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the presentation for the game round corresponding to the currently received variation pattern command is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart change start process (Figure 54), after executing the process of step S3011, the display of the change in the pattern in the special chart display unit 37a is started (step S3012). Then, the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S3013). In this case, since the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter is "0" when the special chart change start process is executed, the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "1" when the process of step S3013 is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart special electricity control process (FIG. 52), in step S2809, special chart change processing is executed. In the special chart change processing, it is determined whether or not it is during the duration of a game round and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, processing is executed to regularly change the display mode of the image in the special chart display section 37a. When it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special chart change processing to that corresponding to the special chart determination processing. Note that in this embodiment, a final stop command is not transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163.

In step S2810, the special chart determination process is executed. In the special chart determination process, the display mode of the image on the special chart display unit 37a is changed to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. In addition, in the special chart determination process, it is determined whether the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether a transition to the opening and closing execution mode will occur. If a transition to the opening and closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0". If a transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special chart determination process to that corresponding to the special electricity start process.

In step S2811, the special call start process is executed. Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the special call start process.

If the process to start the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not yet been executed in the special call start process (step S3101: NO), the process to set the opening period is executed (step S3102). In this setting process, information on the opening period (e.g., 5 sec) is set in the special call timer counter in the main RAM 65. In addition, an opening command is sent to the sound/light side CPU 163 (step S3103).

When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives an opening command from the main side CPU 63, it executes the performance determination process for the open/close execution mode by making a positive judgment in step S2908 of the performance control process (Figure 53) (step S2909). In the performance determination process for the open/close execution mode, the data table for the open/close execution mode is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, it executes the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table. As a result, the performance for the open/close execution mode is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Then, it sends the opening command to the display control device 82 (step S2910). By receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display performance for the open/close execution mode is executed.

The effects for the open/close execution mode include an opening period effect that occurs when the open/close execution mode is started, an opening period effect in which the special electric winning device 32 is repeatedly opened and closed thereafter, and an ending period effect that occurs when the open/close execution mode ends. For example, in the pattern display device 41, an image indicating that the open/close execution mode has started is displayed in the opening period effect, an image indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is opening and closing is displayed in the opening period effect, and an image indicating that the open/close execution mode is ending is displayed in the ending period effect. The opening command also includes information indicating the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of this open/close execution mode, and the sound/light side CPU 163 and the display control device 82 refer to this information to execute the effects for the open/close execution mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of the special electric start process (FIG. 55), if the opening period has elapsed (step S3104: YES), a start process is executed to start the first round of play (step S3105). In the start process, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and the end condition of the round of play is set. When setting this end condition, the upper limit duration for continuing the special electric winning device 32 in the open state in this first round of play is set in the special chart special electric timer counter of the main RAM 65, and the upper limit number of game balls that can win the special electric winning device 32 in this first round of play is set in the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 65. The upper limit duration set in the special chart special electric timer counter is updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the upper limit number set in the winning number counter is decremented by one each time a win occurs in the special electric winning device 32. After that, the numerical information of the special chart special call counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special call start processing to that corresponding to the special call open processing (step S3106).

Returning to the explanation of the special line control process (FIG. 52), in step S2812, the special line open process is executed. In the special line open process, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is met. If the end condition is met, the special line winning device 32 is closed. Then, if the currently ended round game is not the last round game executed, the numerical information of the special line counter is incremented by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special line open process to that corresponding to the special line closed process, and if the currently ended round game is the last round game executed, the numerical information of the special line counter is incremented by 2 to update the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special line open process to that corresponding to the special line end process.

In step S2813, special line closed processing is executed. In the special line closed processing, it is determined whether or not the interval period between rounds of play has elapsed. The interval period is set in the special chart special line timer counter in the main RAM 65 when the previous round of play ends, and the set value is updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51). If the interval period has elapsed, the special line winning device 32 is opened and the end condition for the round of play is set. Then, the numerical information of the special chart special line counter is subtracted by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special line closed processing to that corresponding to the special line open processing.

In step S2814, the special call end process is executed. In the special call end process, if the process for starting the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not yet been executed, the information of the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the special call timer counter of the main RAM 65, and an ending command is sent to the sound/light side CPU 163. When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives an ending command from the main CPU 63, the sound/light side CPU 163 reads the data table for the ending period from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165 in other processes (step S2914) of the performance control process (FIG. 53). Then, the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the performance of the ending period is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Then, the ending command is sent to the display control device 82. By receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display performance of the ending period is executed.

Next, we will explain the ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51) in the main CPU 63.

First, referring to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 56, the normal counter area 171, the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the high frequency support mode counter area 173 provided in the main RAM 65 are described. Each of these areas 171 to 173 is provided with a general winning counter 171a, 172a, 173a, a special call winning counter 171b, 172b, 173b, a first operation counter 171c, 172c, 173c, a second operation counter 171d, 172d, 173d, and an out counter 171e, 172e, 173e. The general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a are counters for counting the number of game balls that enter the general winning port 31 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, and 173b are counters for counting the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The first operation counters 171c, 172c, and 173c are counters for counting the number of game balls that enter the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counters 171d, 172d, and 173d are counters for counting the number of game balls that enter the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counters 171e, 172e, and 173e are counters for counting the number of game balls that enter the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

Each counter 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171 is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and the game is neither in the open/close execution mode nor in the high-frequency support mode. Each counter 172a to 172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172 is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and the game is in the open/close execution mode. Each counter 173a to 173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and the game is in the high-frequency support mode. The reason why the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is not included in the measurement is because the number of balls that enter the ball entry areas 24a, 31-34 by hand when the front door frame 14 is open is excluded from the measurement.

Figure 57 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51) in the main CPU 63.

In the ball entry detection process, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S3201: YES), the normal ball entry detection process (step S3204), the ball entry detection process during the open/close execution mode (step S3205), and the ball entry detection process during the high frequency support mode (step S3206) are not executed. The game area PA is formed by the space partitioned in front and back by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided in the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, so when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the game area PA is opened toward the front, and even if a game ball is shot toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot flow down the game area PA normally. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, a game ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, it is when the manager of the game hall opens the front door frame 14 for maintenance or to resolve a malfunction, and a game ball enters due to maintenance or the like. Such balls entering the ball slot do not occur during normal gameplay, and therefore do not need to be managed. Therefore, in the ball entry detection process, none of steps S3204 to S3206 are executed if the front door frame 14 is open as described above.

If the front door frame 14 is closed and is not in the opening/closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode (steps S3201 to S3203: NO), the normal ball-entering detection process is executed (step S3204). Also, if the front door frame 14 is closed and is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S3201: NO, step S3202: YES), the ball-entering detection process in the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S3205). Also, if the front door frame 14 is closed and is in the high-frequency support mode (step S3201: NO, step S3203: YES), the ball-entering detection process in the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S3206).

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the normal ball scoring detection process in step S3204.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S3301: YES), if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S3304: YES), or if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S3307: YES), the value of the normal general winning counter 171a is incremented by 1 (steps S3302, S3305, S3308). In addition, the value of the 10-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (steps S3303, S3306, S3309). If the ball-scoring detection process is performed during the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 172a for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to steps S3302, S3305, and S3308. If the ball-scoring detection process is performed during the high-frequency support mode, the value of the general winning counter 173a for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to steps S3302, S3305, and S3308.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S3310: YES), the special electric winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3311), and then the value of the normal special electric winning counter 171b is incremented by one (step S3312). The value of the counter for 15 winning balls in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3313). If the ball is detected during the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the special electric winning counter 172b for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by one as the process corresponding to step S3312, and if the ball is detected during the high frequency support mode, the value of the special electric winning counter 173b for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one as the process corresponding to step S3312.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a (step S3314: YES), the first operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3315), and then the value of the normal first operation counter 171c is incremented by 1 (step S3316). The value of the one prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3317). If the ball entry detection process is during the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 172c for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3316, and if the ball entry detection process is during the high frequency support mode, the value of the first operation counter 173c for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3316.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a (step S3318: YES), the second operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3319), and then the value of the second operation counter 171d for normal use is incremented by 1 (step S3320). The value of the counter for one winning ball in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3321). Note that if the ball entry detection process is during the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 172d for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3320, and if the ball entry detection process is during the high frequency support mode, the value of the second operation counter 173d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3320.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the out-hole detection sensor 48a (step S3322: YES), the value of the normal out counter 171e is incremented by 1 (step S3323). Note that if the ball detection process is during the open/close execution mode, the value of the out counter 172e for the open/close execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3323, and if the ball detection process is during the high frequency support mode, the value of the out counter 173e for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3323.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S3324: YES), the gate winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 is measured using the general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a, the number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 is measured using the special winning counters 171b, 172b, 173b, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the first operating counters 171c, 172c, 173c, the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is measured using the second operating counters 171d, 172d, 173d, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured using the out counters 171e, 172e, 173e. This makes it possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34. In addition, by providing separate counter areas 171 for normal use, 172 for the open/close execution mode, and 173 for the high-frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 can grasp the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 by distinguishing between a situation that is neither the open/close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode, a situation that is the open/close execution mode, and a situation that is the high-frequency support mode.

Next, the check process executed in step S2706 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 59.

If it is not the display period of the check result or the check waiting period (step S3401 and step S3402: NO), it is determined whether or not a check start instruction signal has been received from the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 97 (step S3403). As already explained, the check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC to instruct the game machine to calculate various parameters using the ball entry history of each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 and notify the result of the calculation. The trigger for the hall computer HC to output the check start instruction signal is arbitrary. For example, the game machine may be configured so that the check start instruction signal is output to all pachinko machines 10 in the game machine when the manager of the game machine performs a predetermined operation on the hall computer HC, the check start instruction signal may be output from the hall computer HC to all pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined time has come, or the check start instruction signal may be output from the hall computer HC to all pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined time has passed since the game machine was last sent during the game machine's business hours.

If an instruction signal to start checking has been received (step S3403: YES), a process to prohibit the launch of game balls is executed (step S3404). As a result, even if an operation to launch game balls is performed on the launch operation device 28 when game balls are normally stored in the upper tray 55a, the game balls will not be launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27. This state in which the launch of game balls is prohibited is released when the notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 has finished.

After that, the game round interruption process is executed (step S3405). In the game round interruption process, if a game round is not being executed, the start of a new game round and the start of a new demo display are prohibited. As a result, even if new reserved information is acquired when a game round is not being executed, the start of a game round triggered by the reserved information is put on hold, and the start of a new demo display is also put on hold. Note that the start of a new demo display is prohibited by preventing the execution of step S2802 of the special chart special electricity control process (Figure 52).

In addition, in the game round interruption process, if a game round is being executed, the measurement of the duration of the game round measured by the main CPU 63 is stopped. Specifically, while a game round is being executed, the duration of the game round is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter in the main RAM 65, and the value of this special chart special electricity timer counter is periodically updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51), but the update of the special chart special electricity timer counter by this timer update process is stopped. Note that when the game round interruption process is executed, the process for starting the game round and the process for progressing the game round are not executed in the special chart special electricity control process (Figure 52). However, even if the game round interruption process is executed, the process for acquiring reserved information (step S2803) in the special chart special electricity control process (Figure 52) is executed.

Then, the opening and closing execution mode interruption process is executed (step S3406). In the opening and closing execution mode interruption process, if the opening and closing execution mode is not being executed, the start of a new opening and closing execution mode is prohibited. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode interruption process, if the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the measurement of the opening period, the upper limit duration of the round play, the interval period, or the ending period measured by the main CPU 63 is stopped. Specifically, during the opening period, the opening period is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter of the main RAM 65, during the execution of the round game, the upper limit duration of the special electricity winning device 32 is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter of the main RAM 65, between multiple round games, the interval period is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter of the main RAM 65, during the ending period, the ending period is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter of the main RAM 65, and the value of this special chart special electricity timer counter is periodically updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 51), but the update of the special chart special electricity timer counter by this timer update process is stopped. Also, in the interruption process of the opening and closing execution mode, if the special electricity winning device 32 is in an open state, the special electricity winning device 32 is closed. Note that when the interruption process of the opening and closing execution mode is executed, the process for starting the opening and closing execution mode and the process for progressing the opening and closing execution mode are not executed in the special chart special electricity control process (Fig. 52). However, even if the opening/closing execution mode interruption process is executed, the process of acquiring pending information (step S2803) in the special chart special call control process (Figure 52) is executed.

After that, the interruption process of the normal map normal power control is executed (step S3407). In the interruption process of the normal map normal power control, if the normal map display unit 38a is not displaying a change and the normal power role 34a is not in the normal power open state, the start of a new change display of the normal map display unit 38a is prohibited. As a result, even if a new value of the normal power role open counter C4 is acquired in a situation where the normal map normal power control is not being executed, the start of a new change display of the normal map display unit 38a triggered by that value is put on hold. In addition, in the interruption process of the normal map normal power control, if the normal map display unit 38a is displaying a change, the update of the timer of the main RAM 65 that measures the change display period is stopped. In addition, in the interruption process of the normal map normal power control, if the normal power role 34a is in the open state, the normal power role 34a is closed and the update of the open time of the normal power role 34a is stopped. In addition, even if the interruption process of the normal map normal power control is executed, the process of storing the value of the normal power feature opening counter C4 in the normal power holding area 65c in response to the entry of a game ball into the second operating port 34 is executed.

Then, a storage process is executed for the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a (step S3408). In this storage process, data showing the current display contents of the special map display unit 37a is stored in the main RAM 65, and data showing the current display contents of the ordinary map display unit 38a is stored in the main RAM 65. Then, a process is executed to start the check waiting display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a (step S3409). In this check waiting display start process, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a are changed to display contents to notify that the current status is a check waiting period. The check waiting period is the waiting period from when a command signal to start a check is received from the hall computer HC until the start of the notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 in response to the reception of the command signal.

Here, we will explain the display contents of the special map display section 37a and the general map display section 38a.

First, the special chart display unit 37a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60(a). FIG. 60(a) is a front view of the special chart display unit 37a. The special chart display unit 37a is provided with seven display segments 181-187. Each display segment 181-187 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of each individual light source, it is possible to light only one of the display segments 181-187, and to light any combination of the display segments 181-187. Since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 181-187, but this is not limited to this, and each of the display segments 181-187 may be configured to display different colors, or each of the display segments 181-187 may be configured to display multiple types of colors. The first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are all linear display segments, and are arranged to form a so-called seven-segment display. This makes it possible to display multiple types of characters, such as the numbers "1" to "9" and the letters "H" and "L," on the special chart display section 37a.

Figure 60 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special chart display section 37a. When the special chart display section 37a displays a changing pattern during the execution of a game round, the special chart display section 37a repeats a series of lighting states, such as only the second display segment 182 and the fifth display segment 185 being lit → only the first display segment 181 being lit → only the third display segment 183 and the sixth display segment 186 being lit → only the seventh display segment 187 being lit. Also, in the special chart display section 37a, only the fourth display segment 184 is lit as a stop result in a game round with a losing result, a lighting state in which "2" or "4" is displayed as a stop result in a game round with a low probability of winning a jackpot result, a lighting state in which "6" or "9" is displayed as a stop result in a game round with a low probability of winning a jackpot result, and a lighting state in which "L" or "H" is displayed as a stop result in a game round with a most favorable jackpot result.

In contrast, during the check waiting period, all of the first through seventh display segments 181-187 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any of the display content in the situation where the changing patterns are displayed on the special chart display unit 37a while a game round is being played, and further does not match any of the display content that may be displayed as a result of the stop of a game round. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to clearly understand whether or not the current situation is a check waiting period by visually checking the special chart display unit 37a.

After the check waiting period ends, the calculation results of various parameters using the winning history for each winning section 24a, 31 to 34 are notified using the special chart display section 37a. When this notification is made, the special chart display section 37a turns on and displays "3", "5" or "7". The display contents corresponding to the display period of these check results do not match any of the display contents of the situation in which the picture changes are displayed on the special chart display section 37a during the execution of a game round, and further do not match all of the display contents that may be displayed as a result of the stopping of a game round. In addition, the display contents corresponding to the display period of the check results do not match the display contents corresponding to the check waiting period. This allows the manager of the game hall to clearly understand whether the current situation is a check waiting period or not by visually checking the special chart display section 37a, as well as to clearly understand whether the current situation is a check result display period or not.

Next, the general map display unit 38a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60(b). FIG. 60(b) is a front view of the general map display unit 38a. The general map display unit 38a is provided with seven display segments 191-197. Each display segment 191-197 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of each individual light source, it is possible to light up only one of the display segments 191-197, and to light up any combination of the display segments 191-197. Since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 191-197, but this is not limited to this, and each of the display segments 191-197 may be configured to display different colors, or each of the display segments 191-197 may be configured to display multiple types of colors. The first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are all linear display segments, and are arranged to form a so-called seven-segment display. This makes it possible to display multiple types of characters, such as the numbers "1" to "9" and the letters "H" and "L," on the general display section 38a.

Figure 60 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the normal map display section 38a. When the normal map display section 38a displays a changing pattern, the normal map display section 38a repeats a series of lighting states: only the second display segment 192 and the fifth display segment 195 are lit → only the first display segment 191 is lit → only the third display segment 193 and the sixth display segment 196 are lit → only the seventh display segment 197 is lit. Also, in the normal map display section 38a, only the fourth display segment 194 is lit as a stop result of the changing display round that resulted in a loss in the normal power opening lottery, and the lighting state in which "H" is displayed is displayed as a stop result of the changing display round that resulted in a win in the normal power opening lottery.

In contrast, during the check waiting period, all of the first through seventh display segments 191-197 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any of the display content in the situation in which the picture changes are displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, and further does not match any of the display content that may be displayed as a result of the stopping of the changing display round. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to clearly understand whether or not the current situation is a check waiting period by visually checking the normal map display unit 38a.

In addition, the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the regular map display section 38a is the same as the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the special map display section 37a. In other words, during the check waiting period, the same corresponding display content is displayed in both the special map display section 37a and the regular map display section 38a. This makes it easier for the manager of the gaming hall to understand whether the current situation is a check waiting period or not.

After the check waiting period ends, the results of calculations of various parameters using the winning history for each winning section 24a, 31 to 34 are notified using not only the special chart display section 37a but also the regular chart display section 38a. In this case, when this notification is made, the regular chart display section 38a is in a lit state displaying "2", "3" or "4". The display contents corresponding to the display period of these check results do not match any of the display contents of the situation in which the picture change is displayed on the regular chart display section 38a, and further do not match all of the display contents that may be displayed as a stop result after the picture change display. In addition, the display contents corresponding to the display period of the check results do not match the display contents corresponding to the check waiting period. This allows the manager of the game hall to clearly understand whether the current situation is a check waiting period or not by visually checking the regular chart display section 38a, as well as to clearly understand whether the current situation is a check result display period or not.

Returning to the explanation of the check process (FIG. 59), after the process of step S3409 is executed, a set process is executed for the check waiting counter (step S3410). In this set process, information corresponding to the check waiting period is set in the check waiting counter provided in the main RAM 65. Specifically, the check waiting period is set to 5 sec. This time is set to a time sufficiently longer than the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to specify that the launched game ball has entered any of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 of the game area PA and been detected by the ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a corresponding to the ball entry section 24a, 31-34 into which the ball has entered, after the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28. Then, as already explained, when a command signal to start the check is received from the hall computer HC, the launch of the game ball is prohibited in step S3404. As a result, all game balls flowing down the game area PA will be eliminated by the time the check waiting period has elapsed, and all ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 will have been acquired by the time the check waiting period has elapsed.

Then, the check waiting flag stored in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3411). The check waiting flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 63 to identify that it is in a check waiting period. In addition, in step S3412, a check start command is sent to the audio/optical CPU 163.

When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a check start command, it makes a positive determination in step S2911 of the performance control process (FIG. 53) and sets the end waiting flag provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "1" (step S2912). The end waiting flag is a flag that the sound/light side CPU 163 uses to identify that it is in an end waiting state, and if the end waiting flag is set to "1", it makes a positive determination in step S2901. Note that the control content in the end waiting state will be explained in detail later. Also, in step S2913, it sends a check display command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives a check display command, it causes an image corresponding to the end waiting state to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. The display content will be explained later.

Returning to the explanation of the check process (FIG. 59), the check wait flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" in step S3411, which enters the check wait period. Therefore, a positive determination is made in step S3402 and the check wait process is executed (step S3413). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the check wait process.

First, the value of the check waiting counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3501). Then, if the value of the check waiting counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3502: YES), the check waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3503). This ends the check waiting period.

Then, the tallying process is executed (step S3504). In the tallying process, the seventh and eighth parameters are calculated using various counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171, the seventh and eighth parameters are calculated using various counters 172a to 172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the seventh and eighth parameters are calculated using various counters 173a to 173e in the high frequency support mode counter area 173. Regarding these seventh and eighth parameters, in the following case, the values of the out counters 171e, 172e, and 173e are K1, the values of the general winning counters 171a, 172a, and 173a are K2, the values of the special winning counters 171b, 172b, and 173b are K3, the values of the first operation counters 171c, 172c, and 173c are K4, and the values of the second operation counters 171d, 172d, and 173d are K5:
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34").

The seventh and eighth parameters calculated using the various counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171 are the seventh and eighth parameters in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and the mode is neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in normal times). The seventh and eighth parameters calculated using the various counters 172a to 172e in the opening/closing execution mode counter area 172 are the seventh and eighth parameters in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode). The seventh and eighth parameters calculated using the various counters 173a to 173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 are the seventh and eighth parameters in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and the mode is the high-frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in the high-frequency support mode).

In addition, in the aggregation process, the same process as the parameter management process (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is performed for each of the various parameters in normal operation, the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode, and the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. In other words, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the first range, if only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the second range, and if the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the third range. Then, the information on the judgment result is written to the main RAM 65.

After the tallying process of step S3504 is executed, a display start process of the check result is executed (step S3505). In the display start process of the check result, after the display of the display contents during the check waiting period on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a is terminated, the display corresponding to the result of the tallying process of step S3504 is started on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a. In this case, the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a do not continue the same display during the display period of the check result, but rather, a display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment result for the various parameters in normal time, a display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment result for the various parameters in the opening and closing execution mode, and a display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment result for the various parameters in the high frequency support mode are displayed in this order, and the display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a is controlled so that the sequential display in this order is repeated.

Specifically, the normal map display unit 38a displays which of the following is the display target: a display corresponding to the above judgment result for various parameters in normal operation, a display corresponding to the above judgment result for various parameters in the open/close execution mode, and a display corresponding to the above judgment result for various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. As already explained, the display contents corresponding to the display period of the check results in the normal map display unit 38a are set to have lighting states in which "2", "3", and "4" are displayed. When the display corresponding to the above judgment result for various parameters in normal operation is the display target, "2" is displayed in the normal map display unit 38a, when the display corresponding to the above judgment result for various parameters in the open/close execution mode is the display target, "3" is displayed in the normal map display unit 38a, and when the display corresponding to the above judgment result for various parameters in the high-frequency support mode is the display target, "4" is displayed in the normal map display unit 38a.

In addition, the special chart display unit 37a displays the above judgment results for each of the various parameters in normal operation, the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode, and the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. As already explained, the lighting states in which "3", "5", and "7" are displayed are set as display contents corresponding to the display period of the check results in the special chart display unit 37a. Of these, if the above judgment result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a, if the above judgment result corresponds to the second range, "5" is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a, and if the above judgment result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a.

When the display period of the check result is started, the display corresponding to the above judgment result for the various parameters in normal times is the display target, so "2" is displayed first in the normal map display section 38a. During this normal target period, the special map display section 37a displays the above judgment result for the various parameters in normal times. In other words, if the judgment result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed in the special map display section 37a, if the judgment result corresponds to the second range, "5" is displayed in the special map display section 37a, and if the judgment result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed in the special map display section 37a. For example, if the judgment result is in the first range, "2" is continuously displayed in the normal map display section 38a during the normal target period, and "3" is continuously displayed in the special map display section 37a. The normal target period continues for 5 seconds.

When the normal target period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment result for the various parameters during the opening and closing execution mode is displayed, so "3" is displayed in the normal map display section 38a. During this opening and closing execution mode target period, the special map display section 37a displays the above-mentioned judgment result for the various parameters during the opening and closing execution mode. In other words, if the judgment result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed in the special map display section 37a, if the judgment result corresponds to the second range, "5" is displayed in the special map display section 37a, and if the judgment result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed in the special map display section 37a. For example, if the judgment result is the second range, "3" is continuously displayed in the normal map display section 38a during the opening and closing execution mode target period, and "5" is continuously displayed in the special map display section 37a. The opening and closing execution mode target period continues for 5 sec, just like the normal target period.

When the open/close execution mode target period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment result for the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode is displayed, so "4" is displayed in the normal map display section 38a. During this high-frequency support mode target period, the special map display section 37a displays the above-mentioned judgment result for the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. In other words, if the judgment result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed in the special map display section 37a, if the judgment result corresponds to the second range, "5" is displayed in the special map display section 37a, and if the judgment result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed in the special map display section 37a. For example, if the judgment result is in the third range, "4" is continuously displayed in the normal map display section 38a during the high-frequency support mode target period, and "7" is continuously displayed in the special map display section 37a. The high-frequency support mode target period continues for 5 seconds, just like the normal target period and the open/close execution mode target period.

The display period for the check results is set to a period during which each of the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period occurs at least once. Specifically, the display period for the check results is set to 30 seconds so that each of the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period occurs twice. In addition, during the display period for the check results, the period changes repeatedly from normal target period → open/close execution mode target period → high-frequency support mode target period.

After executing the process of step S3505 in the check waiting process (FIG. 61), information corresponding to the display period of the check result (specifically, 30 seconds) is set in the display counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3506). After that, the display flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3507). The display flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 63 to identify that it is the display period of the check result.

When the display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S2707 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51) of the main CPU 63. In this case, the processing of steps S2708 to S2719 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51) is not executed. For example, even if a game ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34, it is invalidated because the ball entry detection processing (step S2710) is not executed. However, as already explained, before the display period of the check result starts, a game ball that has been properly launched is not present in the game area PA, so that a game ball that has been properly launched will not enter any of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 during the display period of the check result. In addition, the special chart special electric control processing (step S2714) is not executed, and all control of the special chart special electric, including the pending information acquisition processing (step S2803), is stopped. In addition, all control of the normal map and normal power is stopped by not executing the normal map and normal power control process (step S2715). In addition, all payout instructions to the payout side CPU 92 for game balls are stopped by not executing the payout output process (step S2718). However, the payout of game balls based on prize ball commands that have already been output to the payout side CPU 92 continues under the drive control of the payout side CPU 92.

When the display flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the check process (FIG. 59) makes a positive determination in step S3401 and executes the display process of the check result (step S3414). FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the display process of the check result.

First, the display counter value in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3601). Then, it is determined whether the display counter value after decrement is "0" (step S3602).

If the value of the display counter is not "0" (step S3602: NO), it is determined whether or not one of the target periods among the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period has ended during the display period of the check result, and it is time to switch to the next target period (step S3603). The determination of whether or not it is time to switch the target period is made based on the value of the display counter. If a positive determination is made in step S3603, an update process of the display content is executed (step S3604). In this update process, the display of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a is controlled so that the display content corresponds to the next target period of the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period, relative to the current target period. In this case, the display control is performed for the general map display unit 38a so that the display content corresponds to the target period of the switch destination, and the display control is performed for the special map display unit 37a so that the display content corresponds to the target period of the current switch destination among the judgment result information written to the main RAM 65 in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (Figure 61).

If it is determined in step S3602 that the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is "0", a display restoration process is executed for the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a (step S3605). In this display restoration process, the display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a is controlled so that the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a become the display contents stored in the main RAM 65 in step S3408 of the check process (Figure 59). As a result, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a are restored to the display contents immediately before the check waiting period began.

After that, the display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). This results in a negative judgment in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51), and the process returns to a state in which steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. Furthermore, when the process of step S3606 is executed, the values of the counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171, the counters 172a to 172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the counters 173a to 173e in the high frequency support mode counter area 173 are cleared to "0". This initializes the goal history of the goal sections 24a, 31 to 34, making it possible to start managing the goal history anew. However, this is not limited to this, and even if the processing of step S3606 is executed, the values of the counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171, the counters 172a to 172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the counters 173a to 173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is accumulated across multiple executions of the notification of the calculation result using the ball entry history. In addition, in this configuration, the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 may be erased based on the reception of a history erasure signal from the hall computer HC or the occurrence of an erasure operation using an operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10.

After that, the game round restart process is executed (step S3607). This allows a new game round to be started, and if a check waiting period is started during the execution of a game round, the progress of the temporarily stopped game round is restarted. Specifically, display control of the special chart display unit 37a corresponding to the game round that was temporarily stopped is restarted. In addition, the measurement of the duration of the game round is restarted by restarting the updating of the special chart special electricity timer counter. In addition, the game round restart process also releases the state in which the new start of the demo display is prohibited. In other words, the state in which the execution of step S2802 in the special chart special electricity control process (Figure 52) is prohibited is released.

Then, the resumption process of the open/close execution mode is executed (step S3608). This allows a new start of the open/close execution mode, and if a check waiting period starts during the execution of the open/close execution mode, the progress of the temporarily stopped open/close execution mode is resumed. Specifically, the update of the special chart special electric timer counter is resumed. Also, if a check waiting period starts during the execution of a round game, the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state. In this case, the restarted round game does not restart the measurement of the upper limit duration of the open state of the special electric winning device 32 from the beginning, but resumes measurement from the remaining upper limit duration when the round game was temporarily stopped.

Then, the resumption process of the normal map normal power control is executed (step S3609). This allows the normal map display unit 38a to start a new variable display round, and if a check waiting period starts during the execution of the normal map normal power control, the temporarily stopped normal map normal power control is resumed. Specifically, if a check waiting period starts during the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a, the display control of the normal map display unit 38a is resumed, and the measurement of the duration of the variable display round is resumed. Also, if a check waiting period starts when the normal power role 34a is in an open state, the normal power role 34a becomes in an open state. In this case, the resumed open state does not restart the upper limit duration of the open state of the normal power role 34a from the beginning, but resumes measurement from the remaining upper limit duration when the open state was temporarily stopped.

Then, the process of releasing the prohibition on launching game balls is executed (step S3610). As a result, when game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, the launch operation device 28 is operated to launch game balls, and the state in which the game balls can be launched is restored.

Next, the progress of the check waiting period and the check result display period will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 63. FIG. 63(a) shows the timing when the hall computer HC outputs an instruction signal to start a check, FIG. 63(b) shows the execution period of a game round, FIG. 63(c) shows the execution period of the open/close execution mode, FIG. 63(d) shows the execution period of the normal ball and normal power control, FIG. 63(e) shows the period during which the launch of game balls is prohibited, FIG. 63(f) shows the check waiting period, and FIG. 63(g) shows the display period of the check result.

First, we will explain the case where a signal to start a check is output during game play and normal power control.

When a game round is being played as shown in FIG. 63(b) and normal map and normal power control is being performed as shown in FIG. 63(d), a signal to start a check is output from the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. 63(a) at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 63(b), and the game round is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63(b) and normal map and normal power control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63(d). Also, at timing t1, the launch of game balls is prohibited as shown in FIG. 63(e) and a check waiting period begins as shown in FIG. 63(f). In this case, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a are displayed to notify the user that a check waiting period is in progress.

After that, at the timing of t2, the fixed time T1 has elapsed from the timing of t1, and the check waiting period ends. At the timing of t2, a calculation is performed using the management results of the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34. In this case, the time T1 is set to a time sufficiently longer than the longest time required from when a ball is launched from the ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28 until the main CPU 63 specifies that the launched ball has entered any of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 in the game area PA and been detected by the ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a corresponding to the ball entry section 24a, 31-34 into which the ball has entered. And, as already explained, the launch of balls is prohibited at the timing of t1. Therefore, by the time the check waiting period has elapsed, all balls flowing down the game area PA will no longer exist, and all ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 will have been acquired by the time the check waiting period has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 63(g), the display period of the check results starts at the timing of t2. During the display period of the check results, as already explained, a normal target period in which displays corresponding to the judgment results for various parameters in normal times are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a, an opening/closing execution mode target period in which displays corresponding to the judgment results for various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a, and a high-frequency support mode target period in which displays corresponding to the judgment results for various parameters in the high-frequency support mode are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a occur in sequence.

After that, at time t3, a fixed time T2 has elapsed since time t2, and the display period of the check result ends, as shown in FIG. 63(g). As a result, at time t3, the state in which the release of the game balls was prohibited is lifted, as shown in FIG. 63(e). Also, at time t3, the game round is restarted, as shown in FIG. 63(b), and the normal ball and normal power control is restarted, as shown in FIG. 63(d).

Next, we will explain the cases when an instruction signal to start a check is output during the opening/closing execution mode and during normal power control.

When the opening/closing execution mode is being executed as shown in FIG. 63(c) and the normal map/normal power control is being executed as shown in FIG. 63(d), a signal to start a check is output from the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. 63(a) at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 63(c), and the opening/closing execution mode is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63(c) and the normal map/normal power control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63(d). Also, at timing t4, the release of game balls is prohibited as shown in FIG. 63(e) and a check waiting period begins as shown in FIG. 63(f). In this case, the display contents of the special map display section 37a and the normal map display section 38a are displayed to notify the user that a check waiting period is in progress.

After that, at time t5, the check waiting period ends as the fixed time T1 has elapsed since time t4. At this time t5, a calculation is performed using the results of the management of the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34. This time T1 is the same as the time from time t1 to time t2.

As shown in FIG. 63(g), the display period of the check result starts at timing t5. Then, at timing t6, a fixed time T2 has passed from timing t5, and the display period of the check result ends as shown in FIG. 63(g). This time T2 is the same as the time from timing t2 to timing t3. Also, at timing t6, the state in which the release of the game ball is prohibited is lifted as shown in FIG. 63(e). Also, at timing t6, the opening and closing execution mode is resumed as shown in FIG. 63(c), and the normal map and normal power control is resumed as shown in FIG. 63(d).

Next, the main processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 64.

In the main processing, steps S3701 to S3703 and steps S3705 to S3714 execute the same processing as steps S101 to S109 and steps S112 to S115 of the main processing (FIG. 7) in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, in the main processing in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S3704 that the check waiting flag or display flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the processing in step S3706 is executed without executing the processing in step S3705 to determine whether the RAM erase switch of the power supply/launch control device 78 has been operated. In other words, operation of the RAM erase switch is disabled during the check waiting period or the display period of the check result. This makes it possible to prevent the clearing process of the main RAM 65 from being executed even if the manager of the game parlor mistakenly believes that the situation is due to an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10 when the check waiting period starts and the progress of the game is stopped, and turns the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF and ON while operating the RAM erase switch to execute the clearing process (step S3709) to initialize the main RAM 65. Note that, as in the first embodiment, the main RAM 65 is supplied with power for memory retention from the power supply unit for power outage of the power supply/launch control device 78 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF.

On the other hand, even if the check waiting flag or display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the processing of steps S3706 to S3708 is executed. In other words, even if it is the check waiting period or the check result display period, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" (step S3706: NO), the clearing processing of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3709), and even if the checksum calculation result is abnormal (step S3708: NO), the clearing processing of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3709). As a result, if the power outage processing is not executed normally or some abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, it is possible to execute the clearing processing of the main RAM 65 and initialize the main RAM 65 even if it is the check waiting period or the check result display period.

Next, we will explain the contents of the control of the execution of the performance during the check waiting period or the check result display period, and the display contents of the pattern display device 41.

First, we will explain the display contents of the pattern display device 41 when the performance for a game round is executed. Figure 65 is a diagram showing the individual patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41, and Figure 66 is a diagram showing the display surface of the pattern display device 41.

As shown in Figures 65(a) to 65(j), the design, which is a type of picture, is composed of nine main designs, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture. More specifically, the main designs are composed of nine character designs, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9."

As shown in FIG. 66(a), the symbol display device 41 has three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, which are upper, middle, and lower rows, set as multiple display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured with main and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. In detail, the upper symbol row Z1 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-symbol arranged between each main symbol. The lower symbol row Z3 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-symbol arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are configured with 18 symbols. In contrast, in the middle pattern column Z2, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main pattern of "4" additionally arranged between the main pattern of "9" and the main pattern of "1", and one sub-pattern is arranged between each of these main patterns. In other words, in the middle pattern column Z2 alone, ten main patterns are arranged, making up a total of twenty patterns. Then, in the pattern display device 41, the patterns of each of these pattern columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably, scrolling in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 66(b), the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are set in the pattern display device 41 so that three patterns are displayed for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, resulting in a total of nine patterns, 3 x 3, being displayed simultaneously. Incidentally, each of the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, and when the patterns are finally displayed, the patterns waiting in each of the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed at the respective stop positions. In addition, five effective lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the right downward line L4, and the right upward line L5, are set in the pattern display device 41 so as to connect the three waiting areas SA1 to SA9. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper pattern row Z1 → the lower pattern row Z3 → the middle pattern row Z2, and when the variable display of all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 ends in a state where a combination of patterns with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines, a jackpot video is displayed as the occurrence of a low probability jackpot result or a most favorable jackpot result. In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when the most favorable jackpot result occurs, the same combination of specific symbols is displayed. Also, main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a low probability jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is displayed.

In addition, when a low-prize high-probability jackpot result occurs, a predetermined combination of patterns that is not the same combination of patterns is displayed. Furthermore, the manner in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the patterns displayed in the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above patterns, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are displayed in a variable manner as patterns may be used.

In more detail, when the performance for a play round is started, the variable display of the patterns of all the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is started in a high-speed variable display which is a low discrimination mode, and then in a predetermined order, each pattern column Z1 to Z3 switches to a low-speed variable display which is a high discrimination mode, and the patterns are displayed in standby in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 on each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. Then, after the patterns are displayed in standby in each waiting area of all the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 for the oscillating display period, the patterns are displayed statically as a final stop display, and the static display state continues for the final stop period. In this case, the oscillating display means that the symbols waiting in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 oscillate within the same waiting area SA1 to SA9, and each symbol oscillates within the range that includes the stop position within the corresponding waiting area SA1 to SA9, and each symbol oscillates within the range that includes the corresponding stop position. By performing a still display after performing an oscillating display in this way, when the symbols are finally displayed as still symbols, it is possible to perform a gradual process such as variable display of symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 → oscillating display in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 → still display, making it easier for the player to recognize that the symbols will finally be displayed as still symbols.

When the display control device 82 receives a variation pattern command from the sound/light side CPU 163, it reads out a data table corresponding to the variation pattern command from a ROM (not shown) provided in the display control device 82, and executes display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the data table. In this case, this data table corresponds to the duration of the current game round, and by executing display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the data table, high-speed variation display → low-speed variation display → standby display → static display is performed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In other words, commands for recognizing the timing of switching from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display, the timing of switching from the low-speed variation display to the standby display, the timing of switching from the standby display to the static display, and the end timing of the static display are not sent to the display control device 82. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands sent from the sound/light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82. In addition, when a still display is started on the pattern display device 41, the final stop display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round is also started on the special pattern display section 37a, but when this final stop display starts, the main CPU 63 does not send a corresponding command to the sound/light CPU 163. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163.

In addition, when a standby display is being performed in the upper pattern column Z1 and the lower pattern column Z3 and a slow-changing display is being performed in the middle pattern column Z2, a reach effect may be executed using a character image different from the patterns displayed in the varying patterns in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. Since the start and end timings of this reach effect are also determined in the data table, there is no need to send commands from the sound/light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 when starting and ending the reach effect.

As shown in Figure 66 (b), the pattern display device 41 has a hold display area Ga set in the lower center. The hold display area Ga is partitioned so that unit hold display areas Ga1, Ga2, Ga3, and Ga4, the same number as the maximum number of hold information stored in the hold area RE, are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Specifically, the maximum number of hold information is four, and corresponding to this, the hold display area Ga has a first unit hold display area Ga1, a second unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 set. When the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE is one, the reserved image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Ga1, when the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE is two, the reserved image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Ga1 and the second unit reserved display area Ga2, when the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE is three, the reserved image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Ga1, the second unit reserved display area Ga2 and the third unit reserved display area Ga3, when the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE is four, the reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Ga1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4. When reserved information is acquired, a command corresponding to the acquisition command is sent from the audio-visual side CPU 163 to the display control device 82, and the number of unit reserved display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in which the reserved image is displayed increases. In addition, when a new game round is started, the sound/light side CPU 163 sends a command corresponding to the shift command to the display control device 82, thereby reducing the number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in which a specified hold image is displayed.

Next, we will explain how the performance is controlled during the waiting period for a check or the display period for the check results.

As already explained, when the check waiting period starts, the main CPU 63 sends a check start command to the sound/light side CPU 163 in step S3412 of the check process (Figure 59). Then, when the sound/light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, it sets the end waiting flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "1" in step S2912 of the performance control process (Figure 53) to set it to an end waiting state. Also, in step S2913, it sends a check display command to the display control device 82.

When the display control device 82 receives a command for displaying a check, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display a notification image Gr indicating that the check is in a waiting period for a check or a display period for a check result. Figures 67(a) and 67(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the pattern display device 41 during the waiting period for a check or the display period for a check result. As shown in Figures 67(a) and 67(b), notification images Gr saying "Checking" are displayed in the lower left and lower right corners of the pattern display device 41. This allows a player who is paying attention to the pattern display device 41 to understand that the current situation is the waiting period for a check or the display period for a check result by checking the notification image Gr. Figures 67(a) and 67(b) show the display contents of the pattern display device 41 when the performance for a game round is being executed, but even during the execution of the open/close execution mode and the execution of the demo performance, the notification image Gr is displayed on the pattern display device 41 during the waiting period for a check or the display period for a check result. This allows the pattern display device 41 to notify the user that it is a check waiting period or a check result display period not only when a game presentation is being performed, but also when the open/close execution mode is being performed or a demo presentation is being performed. The content of the notification image Gr is arbitrary, and the notification may be performed, for example, by dimming the entire pattern display device 41.

When the display control device 82 receives a check display command, it not only performs processing to display the notification image Gr on the pattern display device 41, but also performs processing to continue the execution of the display performance. Specifically, when a check display command is received while a demo performance is being executed, it controls the display of the pattern display device 41 to repeat a series of video displays for the demo performance.

If a check display command is received while a game play presentation is being executed and before the start of the final stop period for that game play presentation, the display control of the pattern display device 41 is executed according to the contents of the data table corresponding to the variable pattern command received from the sound/light side CPU 163 at the start of the current game play presentation until the timing to start the oscillating display in the current game play presentation arrives, but after the oscillating display has started, the oscillating display is continued even if the timing to start the still display arrives in the data table.

With reference to Fig. 67(a) and Fig. 67(b), we will explain how the effect for a game round is executed by the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in Fig. 67(a), when the variable display of symbols is being performed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, a notification image Gr indicating that it is a check waiting period or a check result display period is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display area in which the variable display of the symbol is being performed and the reserved display area Ga. Then, as shown in Fig. 67(b), a swaying display of symbols is performed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In this case, the symbols waiting in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed to sway in a vertical direction different from the horizontal direction in which the symbols change within the same waiting areas SA1 to SA9. This swaying display continues even when the timing comes to start the original static display.

When a check display command is received during the final stop period of the presentation for a game round, the pattern display device 41 is display controlled to continue the static display state of the pattern. When a check display command is received during the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the pattern display device 41 is display controlled to repeat the series of video displays of the opening period. When a check display command is received during the opening and closing period in which the opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 is repeated in the opening and closing execution mode, the pattern display device 41 is display controlled to repeat the series of video displays of the opening and closing period. When a check display command is received during the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode, the pattern display device 41 is display controlled to repeat the series of action displays of the ending period.

When the sound/light side CPU 163 enters the end waiting state, it makes a positive determination in step S2901 of the performance control process (Figure 53). In this case, it determines in step S2915 whether or not any performance command has been received from the main CPU 63. A performance command is a command that is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light side CPU 163 to indicate the start of a performance, and specifically corresponds to a demo start command, a variation command, an opening command, and an ending command.

If any of the presentation commands have been received (step S2915: YES), the end standby flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S2916). This releases the end standby state. After that, various presentation decision processes are executed when the end standby state is released (step S2917). In the various presentation decision processes when the end standby state is released, if the currently received command is a demo start command, the presentation decision process for the demo in step S2903 is executed, if the currently received command is a variation command, the presentation decision process for the game round in step S2906 is executed, if the currently received command is an opening command, the presentation decision process for the opening/closing execution mode in step S2909 is executed, and if the currently received command is an ending command, the corresponding presentation decision process is executed.

After that, if the currently ended end waiting state occurred during the execution of the game-round presentation and the waiting display is being performed in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 (step S2918: YES), the final stop process is executed (step S2919). Note that when the sound/light side CPU 163 controls the execution of the game-round presentation, as already explained, it reads out a data table from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165, and this data table contains data that indicates the timing at which the waiting display will start during the execution period of the game-round presentation if the end waiting state has not occurred.

In the final stop process, the content of the performance is adjusted so that the pattern is displayed statically for the final stop period (e.g., 0.5 sec) on the pattern display device 41 before the performance determined in step S2917. Specifically, a data table for the final stop period is read as a data table for controlling the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and after control based on the data table for the final stop period is executed, control based on the data table corresponding to the content of the performance determined in step S2917 is executed.

Then, a command transmission process is executed when the end standby is released (step S2920). In this command transmission process, if the current situation is such that a demo performance should be started, a demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 82, if the current situation is such that a performance for a game round should be started, a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined performance content is transmitted to the display control device 82, if the current situation is such that an opening/closing execution mode should be started, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82, and if the current situation is such that the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode should be started, an ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82.

Unless the display control device 82 is in a situation where the oscillating display of the patterns is continued as a performance for a game round, the display control device 82 controls the execution of the display performance in the pattern display device 41 in response to the reception of each of the above commands as already described. On the other hand, when the display control device 82 receives each of the above commands in a situation where the oscillating display of the patterns is continued as a performance for a game round (specifically, when the display control device 82 receives a demo start command, a variation command, or an opening command), it starts the display performance corresponding to the received command after statically displaying each of the oscillatingly displayed patterns for the final stop period (e.g., 0.5 sec). In this case, if the display performance executed after the final stop period is a display performance with a set execution period, such as a performance for a game round or an opening period, the execution period of the subsequent display performance is shortened by the final stop period in response to the fact that the final stop period has occurred earlier.

Specifically, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is an effect for a play round, the period during which the rapid fluctuation display is performed in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is shortened by the final stop period. This makes it possible to generate the final stop period before the start of an effect for a new play round while minimizing the impact on the appearance of the effect for the play round.

In addition, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is an opening period effect, the timing for starting the opening period effect is delayed by the final stop period. In the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the opening and closing period effect starts immediately after the opening period effect ends, but in the opening and closing period effect, a series of video displays are repeated. Therefore, even if the timing for the end of the opening period effect cuts in after the start of the opening and closing period, the impact on the appearance of the effect for the opening and closing execution mode is small.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When a ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31-34 as a predetermined event, the corresponding counters 171a-171e, 172a-172e, 173a-173e are incremented by 1, and the ball entry history information is stored in the counters 171a-171e, 172a-172e, 173a-173e. Then, a calculation is performed using the information stored in the counters 171a-171e, 172a-172e, 173a-173e to derive a predetermined parameter as a calculation result, and the derived calculation result information is notified. This makes it possible to properly manage the ball entry history of the game balls entering the ball entry section 24a, 31-34. In addition, since the ball entry history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the ball entry history information. In this case, when various parameters are derived using the ball entry history information, the progress of the game is restricted. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a situation different from the situation in which normal play is performed. This eliminates the need to run normal gameplay and the derivation of various parameters in parallel, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

In a situation where various parameters are derived, the progress of the game is restricted by restricting the execution of at least some of the processes for progressing the game. This makes it possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of processes per unit time in a situation where various parameters are derived.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the calculation is performed after the release of game balls is prohibited. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where game balls are restricted from entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, which are the trigger for changing various parameters.

When the various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the various parameters are calculated after a period of time that is longer than the longest period of time expected to be required for a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 to enter the ball entry section 24a, 31-34 after the launch of the game ball is restricted. This makes it possible to calculate the various parameters in a situation where the game ball does not reliably enter the ball entry section 24a, 31-34, which would be the trigger for changing the various parameters.

In a situation where information is set to indicate that various parameters are to be calculated using the ball entry history and the results of the calculation are to be notified (i.e., the check waiting flag or display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1"), the clear process of the main RAM 65 (step S3709) is prevented even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or off when the RAM clear switch is turned on. This makes it possible to prevent the clear process of the main RAM 65 from being executed in response to a restriction on the progress of play when various parameters are being calculated, even if the above-mentioned clear operation is mistakenly performed in an attempt to release the restricted situation.

Even if the execution of the clear process of the main RAM 65 in response to the clear operation is prevented as described above, the clear process of the main RAM 65 is executed if the main process (FIG. 64) is executed when the power outage flag is not set to "1" or if a checksum abnormality occurs. This makes it possible to leave room for the clear process of the main RAM 65 to be executed even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated.

When various parameters are calculated using the winning ball history, the state in which the game progress is restricted is lifted when a predetermined display period for the check results has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent an incident in which the game progress is left in a restricted state.

Even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated using the winning history, the execution of the presentation on the symbol display device 41 continues. This makes it possible to prevent the presentation from ending immediately even if an opportunity arises to calculate various parameters while the player is playing and the progress of the game is restricted, and makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

When the pattern display device 41 is executing a presentation for a game round and an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs and the progress of the game is restricted, control to end the presentation for that game round is not executed even if the duration of the game round that would normally be the opportunity to end the presentation for that game round has elapsed. This makes it possible to continue the presentation for the game round in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, and makes it possible for the player to believe that the execution of the presentation is continuing even in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are derived.

The state in which the presentation for a game round is continued in a situation in which the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters is released when a command for starting a new presentation, such as a variation command, an opening command, or a demo start command, is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163. This makes it possible to release the state in which the presentation for a game round is continued without sending a dedicated command for releasing the state from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163.

When the presentation for a game round is continued in a situation where the game progress is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the standby display, which is the stage before the stop display of the symbols when the presentation for that game round is ended, is continued. This makes it possible to continue the presentation for a game round in a situation where the game progress is restricted, while allowing the player to recognize the result of the symbols stopping. Also, when the restriction on the game progress is lifted and the presentation for a game round is ended, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stopped display at the timing when the restriction on the game progress is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the presentation for a game round when the restriction on the game progress is lifted.

If the gameplay presentation continues in a situation where game progress is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, a corresponding notification is also issued. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming confused by the fact that the gameplay presentation is continuing for longer than expected.

Notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the goal history are made by the special map display unit 37a, which displays changes in the special map, and the regular map display unit 38a, which displays changes in the regular map. This makes it possible to use both the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a as display units for making such notifications, making it possible to simplify the configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated display unit is provided.

When a notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the display of the special map in the special map display unit 37a and the general map in the general map display unit 38a are interrupted. This makes it possible to clarify the notification contents in these special map display units 37a and general map display units 38a.

In addition, when the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters using the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a ends, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a are restored to the display contents immediately before the notification began. This makes it possible to resume the display of the special map on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map on the ordinary map display unit 38a after the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters ends.

When notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are executed using the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a, the display mode used when displaying the special chart for the special chart display unit 37a is not used as the display mode for notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters, and the display mode used when displaying the regular chart for the regular chart display unit 38a is not used as the display mode for notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly understand that notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are being executed using the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a.

When notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are executed using the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the contents of different types of notification targets are sequentially switched and displayed. This makes it possible to display the contents of different types of notification targets using the same display units 37a and 38a.

<Alternative to the thirteenth embodiment>
When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history into the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, the launch of game balls is prohibited, but this is not limited to the above, and the launch of game balls may not be prohibited. In this case, when a command signal to start checking is received, the various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history information at that time, so that the various parameters can be calculated without being affected even if the launch of game balls continues thereafter.

- The device that issues notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 is not limited to the configuration of the special chart display section 37a and the regular chart display section 38a, but may also be configured to use the display light-emitting section 53 provided in the front door frame 14 for both, or may be configured to have a dedicated display section. By using the display light-emitting section 53 provided in the front door frame 14 to issue the above notification, it becomes possible to make the notification content easier to check. Also, by using a dedicated display section to issue the above notification, the device that issues the above notification becomes clear to the manager of the amusement hall.

In addition, in a configuration in which the above notification is performed using a dedicated display unit, when an event occurs, such as receiving an instruction signal to start a check, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history in the ball entry units 24a, 31-34, and the notification content of the calculation result is updated, and the notification based on the updated notification content may be continued until the next update. This makes it possible to understand the notification content corresponding to the most recent calculation result by checking the dedicated display unit at any time. In addition, the dedicated display unit may be configured so that its display surface is set in a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52, or may be configured to be provided inside the board box of the main control unit 60.

The trigger for performing the calculation using the ball entry history into the ball entry units 24a, 31-34 is not limited to receiving a signal instructing the start of a check from the hall computer HC of the gaming hall, and may be configured to generate the trigger each time a predetermined time has elapsed, or the trigger each time the total period during which game balls are being released reaches a predetermined period, or the trigger may be configured to generate when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, or the trigger may be configured to generate when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, or the trigger may be configured to generate when the demo performance continues for a predetermined period or more, or the trigger may be configured to generate when a specified operation unit provided on the pachinko machine 10 is operated, or the trigger may be configured to generate when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started with the specified operation unit being operated.

- When calculations are performed using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, the payout of game balls is not stopped in the above embodiment, but instead, the payout of game balls may be stopped.

- Even when a calculation is performed using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, the display light-emitting section 53, speaker section 54 and pattern display section 41 continue to display effects such as game play effects, open/close execution mode effects and demo effects, but this is not limited to this and the effects may be temporarily interrupted. In this case, when the notification of the calculation results is completed, the effects will be resumed from the state where they were temporarily interrupted.

- In a configuration in which the calculations using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 and the notification of the calculation results are performed in a control unit separate from the main CPU 63, as in the first embodiment, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 may be stopped when the calculations and the notification of the calculation results are being performed. Even in this case, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game when the calculations and the notification of the calculation results are being performed.

- The main CPU 63 may be equipped with an RTC, and if the date and time measured by the RTC is outside the opening hours of the amusement hall, even if a game ball enters the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, this may not be reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, it is possible to prevent intentional attempts to enter the ball entry history into the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 outside the opening hours of the amusement hall.

- Even if a game ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31-34 when no game ball is being released, the game ball may be configured not to be reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, if a game ball is tamed in the ball entry section 24a, 31-34, it is possible to prevent this from being reflected in the ball entry history.

- Although the game progress is restricted before the calculation using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is started, these may occur simultaneously, or the game progress may not be restricted when the calculation is performed, but may be restricted later when the calculation result is announced.

- The state in which the progress of the game is restricted as a result of the execution of calculations using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 may be released for a reason other than the lapse of the display period of the check results. For example, the state may be released when a signal instructing the end of the check is received from the hall computer HC of the game hall, or when an operating section provided on the pachinko machine 10 is operated.

- When an opportunity arises to execute a calculation using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 while a presentation for a game round is being executed on the pattern display device 41, the presentation for the game round in the middle of execution is not limited to a configuration in which it is put on hold in a standby display state, and it may be configured to wait for the start of the presentation for the next game round after, for example, the still display is completed.

- When an opportunity arises to execute a calculation using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 while a presentation for the open/close execution mode is being executed on the pattern display device 41, the presentation for the open/close execution mode that is currently being executed is not limited to being continued, but may be temporarily interrupted at that point.

- In a configuration in which the progress of a game is restricted when the occurrence of fraudulent activity is detected, a configuration may be applied in which the execution of a presentation continues even in a situation in which the progress of the game is restricted. Also, in a configuration in which the progress of a game is restricted when the state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a specified state, a configuration may be applied in which the execution of a presentation continues even in a situation in which the progress of the game is restricted.

- In a configuration in which a final stop command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163 when the presentation for a game round ends, the state in which the standby display is continued on the pattern display device 41 may be released based on the final stop command being sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163. Even in this case, there is no need to send a dedicated command from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163 to release the state in which the standby display is continued on the pattern display device 41.

- The values of various parameters calculated using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 may be reported directly. This allows the manager of the amusement hall to have a detailed understanding of the various parameters.

- The results calculated using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 or information corresponding thereto may be displayed on the pattern display device 41 in addition to or instead of the special pattern display section 37a and the regular pattern display section 38a. This makes it easier for the manager of the game hall to understand the above calculation results.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the process from when a check start instruction signal is received to when the check waiting period starts is different from that in the thirteenth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the thirteenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the checking process in this embodiment.

If it is not the check result display period or the check waiting period (steps S3801 and S3802: NO), it is determined whether the end trigger waiting flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3803). The end trigger waiting flag is a flag that the main CPU 63 uses to identify that it is waiting for the start of the check waiting period after receiving an instruction signal to start a check.

If the end trigger waiting flag is not set to "1" (step S3803: NO), it is determined whether the game is currently being played, the open/close execution mode is in effect, or the normal power control is in effect (step S3805), provided that a signal to start the check has been received from the hall computer HC (step S3804: YES). If the game is currently being played, the open/close execution mode is in effect, or the normal power control is in effect (step S3805: YES), the end trigger waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3806). This results in a wait period for the end trigger to begin waiting for the start of the check waiting period. On the other hand, if the game is not currently being played, the open/close execution mode is in effect, or the normal power control is in effect (step S3805: NO), the process of steps S3809 to S3814 is executed. Furthermore, if the end trigger waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" and the end trigger waiting period is in progress (step S3803: YES), and the current time is not during a game round, open/close execution mode, or normal map/normal power control (step S3807: NO), the end trigger waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" to end the end trigger waiting period (step S3808), and the processing in steps S3809 to S3814 is then executed.

Regarding the processing of steps S3809 to S3814 in detail, first, a process for prohibiting the release of the game ball is executed (step S3809) in the same manner as step S3404 of the check processing (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. After that, a process for storing the display contents of the special chart display unit 37a and the ordinary chart display unit 38a is executed (step S3810) in the same manner as step S3408 of the check processing (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, and a process for starting the check waiting display of the special chart display unit 37a and the ordinary chart display unit 38a is executed (step S3811) in the same manner as step S3409 of the check processing (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. Also, a setting process is executed on the check waiting counter (step S3812) in the same manner as in step S3410 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the 13th embodiment, and the check waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3813) in the same manner as in step S3411 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the 13th embodiment, and a check start command is sent to the audio/optical CPU 163 (step S3814) in the same manner as in step S3412 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the 13th embodiment. This starts the check waiting period.

Here, in this embodiment, if a command signal to start a check is received during the execution of a game round, during the open/close execution mode, or during the execution of normal map/normal power control, the system waits for the start of a check waiting period, and starts the check waiting period when the game round, the open/close execution mode, or the normal map/normal power control is no longer being executed. This makes it possible to reduce memory capacity and reduce processing load, since it is not necessary to interrupt these situations and then execute processing to return to them. Also, since it is not necessary to interrupt each situation in this way, in this embodiment, when the check waiting period starts, the game round interruption processing (step S3405), the open/close execution mode interruption processing (step S3406), and the normal map/normal power control interruption processing (step S3407) as in the thirteenth embodiment are not executed.

When the check waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" and the check waiting period begins, a positive judgment is made in step S3802 of the check processing, and check waiting processing is executed in step S3815. The processing content of the check waiting processing is the same as the check waiting processing in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 61). In addition, when the check waiting processing is executed and the check waiting period is switched to the check result display period, a positive judgment is made in step S3801 of the check processing, and processing during display of the check result is executed in step S3816.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the process while displaying the check results.

In the display process of the check result, the display counter value in the main RAM 65 is first decremented by 1 (step S3901). Then, it is determined whether the display counter value after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3902).

If the value of the display counter is not "0" (step S3902: NO), it is determined whether or not one of the target periods among the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period has ended during the display period of the check result, and it is time to switch to the next target period (step S3903). If the determination is affirmative in step S3903, an update process of the display content is executed (step S3904). In the update process, the display of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is controlled so that the display content corresponds to the next target period among the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period, with respect to the current target period. The process contents of these steps S3903 and S3904 are the same as the process contents of steps S3603 and S3604 of the process during display of the check result in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 62).

If it is determined in step S3902 that the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is "0", a display return process is executed for the special map display section 37a and the regular map display section 38a (step S3905), similar to step S3605 in the display process of the check result in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 62). Then, the display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3906). This results in a negative determination in step S2707 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the state returns to one in which the processes in steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. Then, a release process for the prohibition of launching game balls is executed (step S3907), similar to step S3610 in the display process of the check result in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 62).

Next, the progress of the waiting period for the end trigger, the waiting period for the check, and the display period of the check result will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 70. FIG. 70(a) shows the timing when the hall computer HC outputs an instruction signal to start a check, FIG. 70(b) shows the execution period of a game round, FIG. 70(c) shows the execution period of the normal ball and normal power control, FIG. 70(d) shows the period during which the release of game balls is prohibited, FIG. 70(e) shows the waiting period for the end trigger, FIG. 70(f) shows the waiting period for the check, and FIG. 70(g) shows the display period of the check result.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), at time t1 during a game round, the hall computer HC outputs a signal to start a check as shown in FIG. 70(a). In this case, the game round continues without interruption at time t1. Also, at time t1, a waiting period for the end trigger begins as shown in FIG. 70(e).

After that, at timing t2 while the game round is being played, normal power control is started as shown in FIG. 70(c). Then, at timing t3 while the normal power control is being played, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 70(b). However, since the normal power control is still being played, the waiting period for the end trigger continues.

After that, at the timing of t4, the normal map and normal power control ends as shown in FIG. 70(c). This results in a situation where the game is not being played, the open/close execution mode is not in effect, and the normal map and normal power control is not being executed. Therefore, at the timing of t4, the period waiting for the end trigger is shifted to the period waiting for a check as shown in FIG. 70(e) and FIG. 70(f). In this case, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a are displayed to notify the user that the check waiting period is in progress. Also, at the timing of t4, the launch of game balls is prohibited as shown in FIG. 70(d).

After that, at the timing of t5, the check waiting period ends when the fixed time T1 has elapsed since the timing of t4. At the timing of t5, calculations of various parameters are performed using the ball entry history of each ball entry section 24a, 31-34. In this case, the time T1 is set to a time sufficiently longer than the longest time required from when a ball is launched from the ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28 until the main CPU 63 specifies that the launched ball has entered any of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 of the game area PA and been detected by the ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a corresponding to the ball entry section 24a, 31-34 into which the ball has entered. As already explained, the launch of balls is prohibited at the timing of t4. Therefore, by the time the check waiting period has elapsed, all balls flowing down the game area PA will no longer exist, and all ball entry history into each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 will have been acquired by the time the check waiting period has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 70(g), the display period of the check results starts at the timing of t5. During the display period of the check results, as already explained, a normal target period in which displays corresponding to the judgment results for various parameters in normal times are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a, an opening/closing execution mode target period in which displays corresponding to the judgment results for various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a, and a high-frequency support mode target period in which displays corresponding to the judgment results for various parameters in the high-frequency support mode are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a occur in sequence.

After that, at time t6, the fixed time T2 has elapsed since time t5, and the display period for the check result ends, as shown in FIG. 70(g). As a result, at time t6, the state in which the release of the game ball was prohibited is lifted, as shown in FIG. 70(d).

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, when specific operations such as the game round, the open/close execution mode, and the normal map/normal power control are being performed in the pachinko machine 10, the progress of the game is not restricted even if a calculation trigger for various parameters using the ball entry history occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the game machine, the open/close execution mode, and the normal map/normal power control from being hindered by the occurrence of a calculation trigger for various parameters.

When an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs in the pachinko machine 10 while a game round, an open/close execution mode, or normal map/normal power control is being performed, the progress of the game is restricted after the specific action to be executed is completed. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the occurrence of an opportunity to calculate various parameters, without impeding the execution of the specific action.

When a game round is in progress, even if an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs, the progress of the game is not restricted. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters under conditions in which the progress of the game is restricted, without interrupting the game round.

When the open/close execution mode is in progress, the progress of the game will not be restricted even if an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters under conditions in which the progress of the game is restricted, without interrupting the open/close execution mode.

In addition, when the special electric winning device 32 is open during the open/close execution mode, the execution of calculations using the winning history of the winning balls in the winning ball sections 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction of the progress of the game are put on hold, and when the special electric winning device 32 is closed even during the open/close execution mode, the execution of calculations using the winning ball history of the winning balls in the winning ball sections 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction of the progress of the game are not put on hold.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirteenth embodiment in that the management of the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, the calculation using the results of this management, and the notification of the results of this calculation are performed by the sound and light side CPU 163 rather than the main side CPU 63. The following describes the configurations that differ from the thirteenth embodiment. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as the thirteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 201 provided in the MPU 162 of the audio and light emission control device 81. In addition to the input port 201, the MPU 162 is provided with an input port for receiving commands from the main CPU 63.

The input port 201 is provided with a number of buffers 202a-202g. Specifically, first to seventh buffers 202a-202g are provided. Each of the first to seventh buffers 202a-202g can receive one type of signal via signal paths 203a-203g, and each of the first to seventh buffers 202a-202g stores "0" as the first data when the input signal is at a LOW level, and stores "1" as the second data when the input signal is at a HI level. Note that the relationship between LOW and HI and the first and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 202a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when no new game balls are detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and outputs a HI level first signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. This specific period is sufficient for the sound/light CPU 163 to determine that a HI level first signal has been input to the first buffer 202a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 202b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when no new game balls are detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and outputs a HI level second signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. This specific period is sufficient for the sound/light CPU 163 to determine that a HI level second signal has been input to the second buffer 202b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 202c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when no new game balls are detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and outputs a HI level third signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. This specific period is sufficient for the sound/light CPU 163 to determine that a HI level third signal has been input to the third buffer 202c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when no new game balls are detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and outputs a HI level fourth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. This specific period is sufficient for the audio/light CPU 163 to determine that a HI level fourth signal has been input to the fourth buffer 202d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 202e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when no new game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, and outputs a HI level fifth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a. This specific period is sufficient for the sound/light CPU 163 to determine that a HI level fifth signal has been input to the fifth buffer 202e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 202f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when no new game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, and outputs a HI level sixth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a. This specific period is sufficient for the sound/light CPU 163 to determine that a HI level sixth signal has been input to the sixth buffer 202f.

The seventh buffer 202g receives a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal when no new game balls are detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and outputs a HI level seventh signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. This specific period is sufficient for the audio/light CPU 163 to determine that a HI level seventh signal has been input to the seventh buffer 202g.

Figure 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence area 204 provided in the sound/light side ROM 164. The correspondence area 204 has first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204g that correspond one-to-one to the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g provided in the input port 201 of the MPU 162 of the sound/light emission control device 81.

In the first correspondence area 204a, information indicating that the opening is a general winning opening 31 is stored in advance at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, as information for the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify the type of signal input to the first buffer 202a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 204a, information indicating that the opening is a general winning opening 31 as well as information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also stored in advance at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10. In the second correspondence area 204b, information indicating that the opening is a general winning opening 31 is stored in advance at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, as information for the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify the type of signal input to the second buffer 202b. In addition, the second correspondence area 204b is pre-stored with information indicating that the opening is the general winning opening 31, as well as information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10. In the third correspondence area 204c, information indicating that the opening is the general winning opening 31 is pre-stored with information for the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify the type of signal input to the third buffer 202c, at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the third correspondence area 204c is pre-stored with information indicating that the opening is the general winning opening 31, as well as information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10.

In the fourth correspondence area 204d, information indicating that the device is the special electric winning device 32 is stored in advance at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, as information for the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 202d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 204d, information indicating that the device is the special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls (15) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, is also stored in advance at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10. In the fifth correspondence area 204e, information indicating that the device is the first operating port 33 is stored in advance at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, as information for the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 202e. In addition, the fifth correspondence area 204e stores information indicating the first actuation port 33 and information on the number of game balls (1) to be paid out when one game ball enters the first actuation port 33 at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10. In the sixth correspondence area 204f, information indicating the second actuation port 34 is stored in advance at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10 as information for the sound/light side CPU 163 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 202f. In addition, the sixth correspondence area 204f stores information indicating the second actuation port 34 and information on the number of game balls (1) to be paid out when one game ball enters the second actuation port 34 at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10. In the seventh correspondence area 204g, information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in advance at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10 as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 202g.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) is configured to execute a check process (step S2706), but in this embodiment, the check process is not executed. In addition, in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), it is configured to not only determine whether or not the game is stopped, but also whether or not the check result is being displayed. In this embodiment, the determination of whether or not the game is stopped is executed, but the determination of whether or not the check result is being displayed is not executed. In addition, in the ball entry detection process in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the same process as the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the management output process is executed as the process following the external information setting process in step S2719 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51).

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63.

First, the managed object counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "7" (step S4001). The managed object counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to identify that there are managed objects for which it has not yet determined whether the signal output state to the sound/light side CPU 163 should be changed in the current management output process, and to identify which managed object the signal output state to the sound/light side CPU 163 should be changed for. In one management output process, the managed objects for which the main CPU 63 determines whether the signal output state to the sound/light side CPU 163 should be changed are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Therefore, the managed object counter is initially set to "7".

Then, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the audio/light side CPU 163 for the managed object corresponding to the current value of the managed object counter is at HI level (step S4002). If it is not at HI level (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether the output flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed object counter is set to "1" (step S4003). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning port detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", when the value of the managed counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning port detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", when the value of the managed counter is "5" and corresponds to the third winning port detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", when the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the special current detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", when the value of the managed counter is "3" and corresponds to the first operating port detection sensor 46a, it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1", when the value of the managed counter is "2" and corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to "1", and when the value of the managed counter is "1" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, it is determined whether or not the seventh output flag is set to "1". As in the first embodiment, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" during the ball entry detection process (Figure 10).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S4003: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to HIGH level (step S4004). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S4005).

If the answer is YES in step S4002, it is determined whether an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a LOW level has occurred (step S4006). Specifically, it is determined whether a HI output duration (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals was switched from a LOW level to a HI level. This HI output duration is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process described later for monitoring the input port 201 in the sound/light side CPU 163, and is a period during which the sound/light side CPU 163 can reliably identify the output state of the signal that has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level. If an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a LOW level has occurred (step S4006: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to a LOW level (step S4007).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4003, if the processing of step S4005 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S4006, or if the processing of step S4007 is executed, the value of the managed object counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S4008). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed object counter after the decrement is "0" (step S4009). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or greater (step S4009: NO), the processing from step S4002 onwards is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new managed object counter value.

Next, the performance control process of this embodiment executed by the sound/light side CPU 163 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 74. Note that the performance control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 msec).

If the sound/light side CPU 163 receives an opening command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4101: YES), it sets the open/close execution mode flag provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "1" (step S4102). The open/close execution mode flag is a flag for the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify that the open/close execution mode is in the open/close execution mode. Then, it executes the performance setting process for the open/close execution mode (step S4103). In the performance setting process for the open/close execution mode, the data table for the open/close execution mode is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, it executes the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table. As a result, the performance for the open/close execution mode is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It also sends an opening command to the display control device 82. By receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display performance for the open/close execution mode is executed.

When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives an ending command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4104: YES), it clears the open/close execution mode flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4105). After that, it executes the performance setting process for the ending (step S4106). In the performance setting process for the ending, it reads the data table for the ending from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, it executes the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table. As a result, the performance of the ending period is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It also sends the ending command to the display control device 82. By receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display performance of the ending period is executed.

If the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a high-frequency start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4107: YES), it sets the high-frequency support flag provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "1" (step S4108). The high-frequency start command is sent from the main side CPU 63 when the high-frequency support mode is started. The high-frequency support flag is a flag for the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify that the high-frequency support mode is in effect. Then, a performance setting process for high-frequency support is executed (step S4109). In the performance setting process for high-frequency support, a data table for the high-frequency support mode is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the performance for the high-frequency support mode is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, the high-frequency start command is sent to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the high frequency start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display performance for the high frequency support mode is executed.

When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a high-frequency end command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4110: YES), it clears the high-frequency support flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4111). The high-frequency end command is sent from the main side CPU 63 when the high-frequency support mode ends. After that, it executes a performance setting process for low-frequency support (step S4112). In the performance setting process for low-frequency support, it reads a data table for the low-frequency support mode from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, it executes the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table. As a result, the performance for the low-frequency support mode is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It also sends a high-frequency end command to the display control device 82. By receiving the high-frequency end command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display performance for the low-frequency support mode is executed.

If the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a door open command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4113: YES), it sets the door open flag provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "1" (step S4114). The door open command is sent from the main side CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 goes from a closed state to an open state. The door open flag is a flag for the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. Then, it executes an alarm start process (step S4115). In the alarm start process, a data table for door open alarm is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, it executes the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table. As a result, an alarm indicating that the front door frame 14 is in an open state is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, it transmits a door open command to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the door open command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that a notification is issued indicating that the front door frame 14 is open.

When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a door close command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4116: YES), it clears the door open flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4117). The door close command is sent from the main side CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 changes from an open state to a closed state. Then, an alarm end process is executed (step S4118). In the alarm end process, the alarm indicating that the front door frame 14 is in an open state in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 is ended. In addition, the door close command is sent to the display control device 82. By receiving the door close command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the alarm indicating that the front door frame 14 is in an open state is ended.

Then, in step S4119, history setting processing is executed, and in step S4120, checking processing is executed, and then in step S4121, other processing is executed. In other processing, processing such as when a fluctuation command and a type command are received from the main CPU 63 is executed.

Next, we will explain the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the performance control process (Figure 74).

First, the normal counter area 211, the open/close execution mode counter area 212, and the high frequency support mode counter area 213 provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 75. Each of these areas 211 to 213 includes a first counter 211a, 212a, 213a, a second counter 211b, 212b, 213b, a third counter 211c, 212c, 213c, a fourth counter 211d, 212d, 213d, a fifth counter 211e, 212e, 213e, a sixth counter 211f, 212f, 213f, and a seventh counter 211g, 212g, 213g. The first counters 211a, 212a, 213a store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The second counters 211b, 212b, and 213b store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The third counters 211c, 212c, and 213c store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fourth counters 211d, 212d, and 213d store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The fifth counters 211e, 212e, and 213e store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The sixth counters 211f, 212f, and 213f store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has been changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The seventh counters 211g, 212g, and 213g store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the performance control process (Figure 74) in the sound/light side CPU 163.

In the history setting process, if the door open flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 is set to "1", that is, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S4201: YES), the normal history setting process (step S4204), the history setting process during the open/close execution mode (step S4205), and the history setting process during the high frequency support mode (step S4206) are not executed. Since the play area PA is formed by the space partitioned into front and back by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided in the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the play area PA is opened toward the front, and even if a game ball is launched toward the play area PA in this situation, the game ball cannot flow down the play area PA normally. Furthermore, when game balls enter the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 while the front door frame 14 is open, this occurs when the manager of the amusement hall opens the front door frame 14 for maintenance or to resolve malfunctions, and game balls enter as a result of care, etc. Such game ball entries are not game balls that enter during normal game play, and so there is no need to manage such game ball entries. Therefore, in the history setting process, none of the processes in steps S4204 to S4206 are executed when the front door frame 14 is open as described above.

If none of the door open flag, open/close execution mode flag, and high frequency support flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 are set to "1," i.e., the front door frame 14 is closed and not in the open/close execution mode or high frequency support mode (steps S4201 to S4203: NO), a normal history setting process is executed (step S4204). In the normal history setting process, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to a HI level, the value of the normal first counter 211a is incremented by 1, when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to a HI level, the value of the normal second counter 211b is incremented by 1, when it is confirmed that the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has switched to a HI level, the value of the normal third counter 211c is incremented by 1, and when it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has switched to a HI level, the value of the normal third counter 211c is incremented by 1. When it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to the HI level, the value of the fourth counter 211d for normal use is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to the HI level, the value of the fifth counter 211e for normal use is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has switched to the HI level, the value of the sixth counter 211f for normal use is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to the HI level, the value of the seventh counter 211g for normal use is incremented by 1.

If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the opening/closing execution mode (step S4201: NO, step S4202: YES), a history setting process during the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S4205). In the history setting process during the opening/closing execution mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to a HI level, the value of the first counter 212a for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1, when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to a HI level, the value of the second counter 212b for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1, when it is confirmed that the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has switched to a HI level, the value of the third counter 212c for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1, and when it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has switched to a HI level, the value of the third counter 212c for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1. When it is confirmed that the signal has switched to the HI level, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to the HI level, the value of the fifth counter 212e for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has switched to the HI level, the value of the sixth counter 212f for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to the HI level, the value of the seventh counter 212g for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1.

If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the high-frequency support mode (step S4201: NO, step S4203: YES), a history setting process during the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4206). In the history setting process during the high-frequency support mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to the HI level, the value of the first counter 213a for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1, when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 213b for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1, when it is confirmed that the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has switched to the HI level, the value of the third counter 213c for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1, and when it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has switched to the HI level, the value of the third counter 213c for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1. When it is confirmed that the signal has switched to the HI level, the value of the fourth counter 213d for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to the HI level, the value of the fifth counter 213e for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has switched to the HI level, the value of the sixth counter 213f for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to the HI level, the value of the seventh counter 213g for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1.

Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the check process executed in step S4120 of the performance control process (Figure 74) in the sound/light side CPU 163.

If it is not the display period for the check result (step S4301: NO), steps S4303 to S4308 are executed on the condition that a check start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S4302: YES). The check start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the audio/visual CPU 163 when a check start instruction signal is sent from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that a check start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the demo display, or the main CPU 63 sends a check start command to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 when a predetermined operating unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is operated, or the main CPU 63 sends a check start command to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 when a predetermined time has arrived, or the main CPU 63 sends a check start command to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 every time a predetermined period of time (e.g., 120 minutes) has elapsed since the previous check start command was sent. Furthermore, the trigger for executing the processing of steps S4303 to S4308 is not limited to the configuration in which a command is received from the main CPU 63, but may be a configuration in which the sound/light side CPU 163 determines whether an event that triggered the transmission of the above-mentioned check start command has occurred, and executes the processing of steps S4303 to S4308 when the sound/light side CPU 163 determines that the event has occurred.

In the processing of steps S4303 to S4308, the normal calculation process is first performed (step S4303). In the normal calculation process, the values of the counters corresponding to the same ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 among the normal first to seventh counters 211a to 211g are summed up by referring to the contents of the first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204g of the sound/light side ROM 164. Specifically, since the first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c store information indicating that it is the general winning port 31 as already explained, the values of the normal first to third counters 211a to 211c corresponding to these first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c are summed up to calculate the total value K2. On the other hand, the fourth to seventh correspondence areas 204d to 204g store information corresponding to different ball entry sections 24a, 32 to 34. In this case, the values of the fourth to seventh counters 211d to 211g for normal use are grasped as the values of the different ball entry sections 24a, 32 to 34. Specifically, the value of the seventh counter 211g for normal use is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, the value of the fourth counter 211d for normal use is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, the value of the fifth counter 211e for normal use is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 211f for normal use is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same manner as the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. After that, the same process as the parameter management process (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in normal times. In other words, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the first range, if only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the second range, and if the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the third range. This determination process is then executed for the various parameters under normal conditions. Then, information on the determination results is written to the main RAM 65.

Then, the calculation process for the open/close execution mode is executed (step S4304). In the calculation process for the open/close execution mode, the values of the first to third counters 212a to 212c for the open/close execution mode are summed up to calculate the total value K2, as in the normal calculation process (step S4303). In addition, the value of the seventh counter 212g for the open/close execution mode is set to K1 corresponding to the outlet 24a, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the open/close execution mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, the value of the fifth counter 212e for the open/close execution mode is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 212f for the open/close execution mode is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same manner as in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Then, the same process as the parameter management process (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the open/close execution mode. In other words, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the first range, when only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the second range, and when the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the third range. This determination process is then performed on the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, information on the determination result is written to the main RAM 65.

Then, the calculation process for the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4305). In the calculation process for the high-frequency support mode, the values of the first to third counters 213a to 213c for the high-frequency support mode are summed up to calculate the total value K2, as in the normal calculation process (step S4303). In addition, the value of the seventh counter 213g for the high-frequency support mode is set to K1 corresponding to the outlet 24a, the value of the fourth counter 213d for the high-frequency support mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, the value of the fifth counter 213e for the high-frequency support mode is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 213f for the high-frequency support mode is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same manner as in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Then, the same process as the parameter management process (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. In other words, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the first range, when only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the second range, and when the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the third range. This determination process is then executed on the various parameters in the high frequency support mode. Then, information on the determination result is written to the main RAM 65.

After that, the display start process of the calculation result is executed (step S4306). In the display start process, a judgment result command corresponding to the information of each judgment result derived in each calculation process of steps S4303 to S4305 is sent to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the judgment result command, it causes all of the information of each judgment result derived in each calculation process of steps S4303 to S4305 to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. As a result, an image indicating which of the first, second, and third ranges the various parameters in the normal state correspond to, an image indicating which of the first, second, and third ranges the various parameters in the opening and closing execution mode correspond to, and an image indicating which of the first, second, and third ranges the various parameters in the high frequency support mode correspond to are displayed on the pattern display device 41. In this case, the images corresponding to the information of these judgment results are displayed in the corners of the pattern display device 41 in a manner that allows the manager of the game hall to recognize which images correspond to the various parameters in the normal state, the various parameters in the opening and closing execution mode, and the various parameters in the high frequency support mode.

Then, information corresponding to the display period of the check result (specifically, 30 seconds) is set in a display counter provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 (step S4307). The value set in the display counter is periodically decremented (for example, every 4 msec). In addition, a display flag provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 is set to "1" (step S4308). The display flag is a flag that allows the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify that the check result display period is in progress.

If the display flag of the sound/light side RAM 165 is set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S4301. In this case, the value of the display counter of the sound/light side RAM 165 is decremented by 1 (step S4309). Then, it is judged whether the value of the display counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" or not (step S4310). If the value of the display counter is "0" (step S4310: YES), a display termination process of the calculation result is executed (step S4311). In this display termination process, a display termination command is sent to the display control device 82 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each of the above judgment results in the pattern display device 41 is terminated. By receiving the display termination command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each of the above judgment results is terminated.

Then, the display flag of the sound/light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S4312). Also, when the process of step S4312 is executed, the values of the counters 211a to 211g of the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a to 212g of the counter area 212 for the open/close execution mode, and the counters 213a to 213g of the counter area 213 for the high-frequency support mode are cleared to "0". This initializes the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, and management of the ball entry history is newly started. However, this is not limited to this, and even if the process of step S4312 is executed, the values of the counters 211a to 211g of the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a to 212g of the counter area 212 for the open/close execution mode, and the counters 213a to 213g of the counter area 213 for the high-frequency support mode may be configured to be maintained as they are. In this case, the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is accumulated across multiple executions of the notification of the calculation results using the ball entry history. In addition, in this configuration, the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 may be erased based on the reception of a history erasure signal from the hall computer HC or the occurrence of an erasure operation using an operation unit provided on the pachinko machine 10.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, the accumulation of the scoring history of the scoring sections 24a, 31-34, the calculations using the scoring history, and the notification of the calculation results are executed by the sound/light side CPU 163, not the main side CPU 63. This makes it possible to accumulate the scoring history of the scoring sections 24a, 31-34, the calculations using the scoring history, and the notification of the calculation results, while preventing an increase in the processing load of the main side CPU 63, which overall manages the progress of the game.

The results of the ball scoring sections 24a, 31-34 are sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 using a dedicated signal path that is set up separately from the signal path for sending commands from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163. This makes it possible to send the results of the ball scoring sections 24a, 31-34 from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 without increasing the number of commands.

Information indicating which of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 the ball entry results correspond to through which signal paths transmitting the ball entry results of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, and information on the number of winning game balls corresponding to each signal path are stored in advance in the sound/light side ROM 164. This eliminates the need to transmit from the main side CPU 63 to the sound/light side CPU 163 a process for determining which of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 the ball entry results correspond to, and information on the number of winning game balls corresponding to each signal path.

The configuration is not limited to the case where the ball entry results of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 using a dedicated signal path separate from the signal path for commands, and may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 using a signal path for commands, for example. In this case, a command corresponding to the type of each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163. In this configuration, each command may include information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry section 24a, 31-34, and the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each command may be pre-stored in the sound-and-light side ROM 164.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the results of calculation of various parameters using the history of the balls scored in each of the scoring sections 24a, 31 to 34 are notified using the special chart display section 37a and the general chart display section 38a, but in this embodiment, the display section for executing this notification is different. The following describes the configuration that differs from the thirteenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, notification display devices 215-217 are provided on the main control board 61 of the main control device 60. First, the main control device 60 will be described. Figure 78 is a front view of the main control device 60, and Figure 79 is a cross-sectional view of line A-A in Figure 78.

As shown in Figures 78 and 79, the main control device 60 is configured by housing the main control board 61 in a board box 60a. As shown in Figure 79, an MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface 61a, which is one of the board surfaces of the main control board 61. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be seen from the outside of the board box 60a. Note that the board box 60a is formed colorless and transparent, but it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be seen from the outside of the board box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 60b of the base box 60a, and also to visually observe the MPU 62 through the opposing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c, 60d in front and behind, and as shown in FIG. 78, the plurality of case bodies 60c, 60d are provided with a joint 60e for preventing separation of the case bodies 60c, 60d and leaving a trace when the case bodies 60c, 60d are separated. The joints 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the board box 60a, which is approximately a rectangular parallelepiped. As a result, even if the case bodies 60c, 60d are separated by destroying some of the joints 60e in a state in which separation of the case bodies 60c, 60d is prevented using some of the joints 60e, it is possible to prevent separation of the case bodies 60c, 60d again by connecting another joint 60e thereafter. In addition, since the joints 60e are destroyed when the case bodies 60c, 60d are separated and a trace is left, it is possible to visually check the joints 60e to see whether the separation of the case bodies 60c, 60d is being performed illegally. In addition, a seal 60f is attached to the side of the board box 60a opposite to the side on which the joints 60e are arranged side by side, so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c and 60d. When the seal 60f is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case bodies 60c and 60d. This makes it possible to leave a trace when the seal 60f is peeled off when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated.

In the main control device 60 having the above configuration, the main control board 61 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 215-217 as shown in FIG. 78. Specifically, the first notification display device 215, the second notification display device 216, and the third notification display device 217 are provided. The first to third notification display devices 215-217 are all segment displays in which seven display segments using LEDs are arranged, but are not limited to this and may be a single light-emitting body of a multi-color light-emitting type, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 215-217 are all installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces. This makes it possible to visually check the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215-217 housed in the board box 60a from outside the board box 60a. As already explained, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b, which faces the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a, faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the rear surface of the resin base 21 is exposed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually observed through the opposing wall portion 60b.

The first notification display device 215 displays the judgment results of the various normal parameters (seventh and eighth parameters) identified in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. In this case, if the judgment results of the various parameters are in the first range, the first notification display device 215 displays letters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range, if the judgment results of the various parameters are in the second range, the first notification display device 215 displays letters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range, and if the judgment results of the various parameters are in the third range, the first notification display device 215 displays letters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range.

The second notification display device 216 displays the judgment results of the various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) in the opening/closing execution mode identified in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. In this case, if the judgment result of the various parameters is in the first range, the second notification display device 216 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the first range, if the judgment result of the various parameters is in the second range, the second notification display device 216 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the second range, and if the judgment result of the various parameters is in the third range, the second notification display device 216 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the third range.

The third notification display device 217 displays the judgment results of the various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) in the high frequency support mode identified in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. In this case, if the judgment result of the various parameters is in the first range, the third notification display device 217 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the first range, if the judgment result of the various parameters is in the second range, the third notification display device 217 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the second range, and if the judgment result of the various parameters is in the third range, the third notification display device 217 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the third range.

Incidentally, the display of each judgment result on the first to third notification display devices 215-217 starts when the check result display period is reached and ends when the check result display period ends, similar to the display of each judgment result on the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a in the thirteenth embodiment. However, this is not limited to this, and the first to third notification display devices 215-217 may be configured to always display each previous judgment result. Also, when the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 relative to the outer frame 11 is detected by a sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12, the display of each previous judgment result on the first to third notification display devices 215-217 may be started, and when the closing of the gaming machine main body 12 relative to the outer frame 11 is detected by a sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12, the display of each judgment result on the first to third notification display devices 215-217 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217.

In the substrate box 60a, a blocking sheet 60g is provided in the facing area facing the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 in the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control substrate 61. The blocking sheet 60g is provided to make the inside of the substrate box 60a, more specifically the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217, invisible through the area in the substrate box 60a where the blocking sheet 60g is provided. Specifically, a hologram sheet is provided as the blocking sheet 60g, but this is not limited thereto and a reflective sheet or a diffuse reflection sheet may be provided. By providing the blocking sheet 60g, even if the area in the substrate box 60a where the blocking sheet 60g is provided is viewed from the front, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 cannot be viewed due to the presence of the blocking sheet 60g. This reduces the possibility that a player will see the first through third notification display devices 215-217 when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 for maintenance or other purposes while a game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, because the blocking sheet 60g is provided in a partial area of the opposing wall portion 60b, it is possible to visually view the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215-217 from outside the board box 60a by viewing the opposing wall portion 60b diagonally toward the first to third notification display devices 215-217. Therefore, the manager of the amusement hall can visually view the notification contents of each judgment result on the first to third notification display devices 215-217 from outside the board box 60a.

Incidentally, the blocking sheet 60g is not provided in the area of the opposing wall portion 60b that faces the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in visibility when visually checking the MPU 62 even if the blocking sheet 60g is provided.

In addition, a member that reduces the visibility of the first to third alarm display devices 215-217 may be provided instead of the blocking sheet 60g. For example, a colored transparent sheet with low transparency may be provided instead of the blocking sheet 60g. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, the display surfaces of the first to third alarm display devices 215-217 can be seen, but the display contents on the display surfaces will be difficult to see.

Seventeenth embodiment
In each of the above embodiments, an example was shown in which a configuration for managing game history was adopted in a pachinko machine 10, but in this embodiment, an example is shown in which a configuration for managing game history is adopted in a slot machine 310. First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 310 will be described. Figure 80 is a front view of the slot machine 310, Figure 81 is a perspective view of the slot machine 310 with the front door 312 open, and Figure 82 is a front view of the cabinet 311.

As shown in Figures 81 and 82, the slot machine 310 has a housing 311 that forms its outer shell. The housing 311 is formed into a box shape that is open to the front as a whole by fixing multiple wooden panels.

As shown in Figures 80 and 81, a front door 312 is attached to the front side of the housing 311. The front door 312 is supported by the housing 311 with an axis 312a on the left side as a pivot axis so that the internal space of the housing 311 can be opened and closed. The front door 312 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 312b provided on the back side, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 313 with a specified key.

As shown in FIG. 80, a game panel 314 is provided at the upper center of the front door 312. The game panel 314 has three vertically long display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R arranged side by side. The display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 310 can be seen through each of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R.

As shown in Figures 81 and 82, the inside of the housing 311 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 311a, and a reel unit 316 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 311a. The reel unit 316 is equipped with a left reel 316L, a center reel 316M, and a right reel 316R, each of which is formed into a cylindrical shape. Each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is supported rotatably so that its central axis is the axis of rotation of the reel 316L, 316M, 316R. The axes of rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 316L, 316M, 316R corresponds one-to-one to each display window portion 315L, 315M, 315R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is visible through the corresponding display window 315L, 315M, 315R. Furthermore, when the reels 316L, 316M, 316R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are displayed as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R.

As shown in FIG. 80, a start lever 321 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 314, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. When this start lever 321 is operated after gaming media such as medals have been bet, each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R starts to rotate simultaneously.

To the right of the start lever 321, there are provided stop buttons 322, 323, 324 that are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 316L, 316M, 316R. Each stop button 322, 323, 324 is located directly below the display window 315L, 315M, 315R that corresponds to the reel 316L, 316M, 316R to be stopped. Each stop button 322, 323, 324 becomes capable of stopping the reel when a predetermined time has elapsed since the left reel 316L started to spin.

Note that one game (play) is played from the time when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R start to rotate based on the operation of the start lever 321, until the time when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R stop to rotate based on the operation of the stop buttons 322, 323, and 324, and until the execution of various processes such as the awarding of game media and management of the game status is completed.

On the lower right side of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R, there is a medal insertion port 325 for inserting medals as investment value. As shown in FIG. 81, the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 325 are guided by the selector 317 provided on the back side of the front door 312 to the hopper device 318 if reception is permitted, or from the medal discharge port 312c provided on the lower front side of the front door 312 to the medal receiving tray 312d if reception is prohibited (see FIG. 80). Note that the hopper device 318 has the function of paying out medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 312d through the medal discharge port 312c when a winning combination corresponding to the award of game media is established on the winning line.

As shown in FIG. 80, below the medal insertion slot 325, there is provided a return button 326 that is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 325 becomes stuck in the selector 317. Also, on the left below the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R, there are provided a first credit insertion button 327 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, a second credit insertion button 328 for inserting two virtual medals at one time, and a third credit insertion button 329 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

A settlement button 331 is provided to the left of the start lever 321. In other words, this slot machine 310 has a credit function that stores and memorizes surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and medals paid out when a prize is won as virtual medals, and when the settlement button 331 is operated while virtual medals are stored and memorized, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal discharge port 312c.

A power supply unit 319 is provided inside the housing 311 as shown in Figures 81 and 82. The power supply unit 319 is provided with a power switch 319a that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 319b for resetting various states of the slot machine 310, and a setting key insertion hole 319c that is operated to change the setting state of the slot machine 310 within the range from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6."

Next, we will explain the symbols on each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R.

Figure 83 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 316L, center reel 316M, and right reel 316R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. Numbers from "0" to "19" are assigned to correspond to each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 340 to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are eight types of symbols: "Bell" symbol (e.g., the 19th symbol on the left reel 316L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., the 18th symbol on the left reel 316L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., the 17th symbol on the left reel 316L), "Replay" symbol (e.g., the 16th symbol on the left reel 316L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., the 15th symbol on the left reel 316L), "LUCKY" symbol (e.g., the 13th symbol on the left reel 316L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., the 12th symbol on the left reel 316L), and "White 7" symbol (e.g., the 10th symbol on the left reel 316L). As shown in FIG. 83, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R.

Figure 84 is a front view of the display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R. Each display window portion 315L, 315M, and 315R is formed so that, of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel 316L, 316M, and 316R, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R is all stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window portion 315L, 315M, and 315R.

In this slot machine 310, one main line ML is set to connect the positions where the symbols on each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are visible. The main line ML is a line that connects the middle symbols on the left reel 316L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 316M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 316R. When a specified number of medals have been bet, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R start to spin, and if a winning combination corresponding to a winning combination is established on the main line ML, the player is awarded either a payout of medals, a replay, or a change in game state.

In other words, in this slot machine 310, only one main line ML is set as a line along which a winning combination can occur. The main line ML is set as a line that extends in a straight line. Therefore, even if a winning combination of symbols is formed on lines that extend in a straight line, such as subline SUL1 connecting the top pattern of the left reel 316L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 316M, and the bottom pattern of the right reel 316R, subline SUL2 connecting the top pattern of the left reel 316L, the top pattern of the middle reel 316M, and the top pattern of the right reel 316R, subline SUL3 connecting the bottom pattern of the left reel 316L, the bottom pattern of the middle reel 316M, and the bottom pattern of the right reel 316R, and subline SUL4 connecting the bottom pattern of the left reel 316L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 316M, and the top pattern of the right reel 316R, no winning combination is formed.

Below, we will explain the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the bonuses that will be awarded if a prize is won, with reference to Figure 85. Figure 85 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the bonuses that will be awarded if a prize is won.

The minor prizes that result in the payout of medals include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. In detail, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is either the "BAR" or the "white 7" symbol, the stopping pattern on the center reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 316R is the "bell" symbol, then the first supplementary prize is awarded. Also, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is either the "watermelon" or the "LUCKY" symbol, the stopping pattern on the center reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 316R is the "bell" symbol, then the second supplementary prize is awarded. Additionally, if the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "bell" symbol, then the third supplementary win will occur. If any of the first to third supplementary wins occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "1".

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L along the main line ML is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "bell" symbol, a bell win occurs. When a bell win occurs, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "9".

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L along the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon win occurs. When the first watermelon win occurs, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "7".

If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L along the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "BAR" symbol, a second watermelon win will occur. When a second watermelon win occurs, the number of game media to be awarded will be "7".

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L along the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, a cherry win will occur regardless of the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M or the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R. When a cherry win occurs, the number of game media to be awarded will be "2".

Winnings that grant a replay privilege, which allows you to play the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals), include the normal replay winning, the 1st RT replay winning, the 2nd RT replay winning, the 1st fall replay winning, and the 2nd fall replay winning. In detail, a normal replay winning occurs when the stopping pattern on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 316M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 316R is a "replay" pattern. A 1st RT replay winning occurs when the stopping pattern on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 316M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 316R is a "replay" pattern. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "replay" symbol, a second RT replay is won. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "replay" symbol, a first fall replay is won. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "watermelon" symbol, a second fall replay is won.

If any of the above replay wins are achieved, it becomes possible to play the next game without having to bet on either medals or virtual medals. Specifically, if any of the replay wins are achieved in a game in which three medals have been bet, it becomes possible to start playing the next game with three medals bet, without having to bet on either medals or virtual medals.

Of the various replay winnings mentioned above, the first RT replay winning, second RT replay winning, first fall replay winning, and second fall replay winning not only trigger the awarding of the replay winning privilege, but also trigger a transition in the game state. In this slot machine 310, multiple game states are set so that the types of roles to be drawn in the role drawing process and the winning probability of each role are different, and transitions between these game states occur when a replay winning, which triggers a transition in the game state, is achieved.

State transition winnings that only result in a transition of the game state include the 1st BB winning and the 2nd BB winning. In detail, if the stopped pattern on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the center reel 316M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 316R is a "red 7" pattern, then the 1st BB winning occurs. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the center reel 316M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 316R is a "white 7" pattern, then the 2nd BB winning occurs. When the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning occurs, the game state transitions to the BB state.

The BB state is a game state in which the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games is higher than in the normal mode and non-AT state (also called the normal game state) described later. More specifically, the BB state is a game state in which the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games is higher than in any game state other than the BB state. Specifically, a combination that allows a bell win to be established is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1/1.1) than in other game states, and when the combination is won, a bell win is established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R and the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324 relative to the rotation positions of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. The BB state continues over multiple games and ends when the end condition is established based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The termination condition can be any, but in this slot machine 310, the termination condition is set to be that the total number of game media awarded since the BB state began is equal to or greater than the termination reference number (e.g., "350").

Next, we will explain the devices used to make various announcements and perform various effects.

As shown in FIG. 80, an upper lamp 332 and a speaker 333 are provided on the upper part of the front door 312, and an image display device 334 is also provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light so that a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 334 is performed. The speakers 333 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and are controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, and are also controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the speaker 333 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 334 is performed.

The image display device 334 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device. If an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. The image display device 334 is also controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface.

On the game panel 314 of the front door 312, below the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R, there are provided a credit display section 335 that displays the number of stored virtual medals, and an award number display section 336 that displays the number of game media that are awarded when a small winning combination is achieved. These displays 335 and 336 are made up of seven-segment displays, and each segment uses a single-color LED that emits light in a color such as green.

The slot machine 310 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, a main control device 340 is provided above the reel unit 316. The main control device 340 is attached to a back plate 311b that forms the back portion of the housing 311. The main control device 340 is configured by housing a main control board 341 in a board box 345.

The MPU 342 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one of the plate surfaces of the main control board 341. The board box 345 is formed transparent so that the MPU 342 housed in the board box 345 can be seen from outside the board box 345. Although the board box 345 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 342 housed in the board box 345 can be seen from outside the board box 345. The main control device 340 is mounted on the back surface of the back plate 311b of the housing 311 so that the opposing wall portion 345a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 in the board box 345 faces the front of the slot machine 310. Therefore, by opening the front door 312 toward the front of the slot machine 310 relative to the cabinet 311 and exposing the internal space of the cabinet 311, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 345a of the board box 345 and the MPU 342 through the opposing wall portion 345a.

The board box 345 is formed by combining a number of case bodies in front and behind, and these case bodies are provided with a joint portion 345b for preventing separation of these case bodies and leaving a trace when these case bodies are separated. The joint portions 345b are arranged in parallel on one side of the board box 345, which is approximately a rectangular parallelepiped. As a result, even if some of the joint portions 345b are destroyed and the case bodies are separated when separation of the case bodies is prevented using some of the joint portions 345b, it is possible to prevent separation of the case bodies again by connecting other joint portions 345b thereafter. In addition, since the joint portions 345b are destroyed and traces are left when the case bodies are separated, it is possible to visually check the joint portions 345b to see whether the separation of the case bodies is being performed illegally. In addition, a seal seal 345c is attached to one side of the board box 345 other than the side on which the joint portions 345b are arranged in parallel so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal seal 345c is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave a trace if the seal 345c is peeled off when the case body is separated.

In the main control device 340 configured as above, the main control board 341 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 346-348. Specifically, the first notification display device 346, the second notification display device 347, and the third notification display device 348 are provided. The first to third notification display devices 346-348 are all segment displays in which seven display segments using LEDs are arranged, but are not limited to this and may be a single light-emitting body of a multi-color light-emitting type, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 346-348 are all installed so that their display surfaces face in the same direction as the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces. This makes it possible to visually check the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 346-348 housed in the board box 345 from outside the board box 345. As already explained, the main control device 340 is mounted on the back plate 311b of the housing 311 so that the opposing wall portion 345a, which faces the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 in the board box 345, faces the front of the slot machine 310. Therefore, when the front door 312 is opened toward the front of the slot machine 310 relative to the housing 311 to expose the internal space of the housing 311 to the front of the slot machine 310, the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 can be seen through the opposing wall portion 345a. The first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are used to notify the results of the game history management. This will be explained in detail later.

The main control device 340 is visually confirmed by opening the front door 312 toward the front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the cabinet 311. In order to improve the visibility of the main control device 340 when the front door 312 is opened, the cabinet 311 is provided with lighting devices 349a and 349b. The lighting devices 349a and 349b are provided on the back of the left side plate 311c and the back of the right side plate 311d of the cabinet 311 so as to form a left-right pair. The lighting devices 349a and 349b are equipped with high-brightness LEDs as light emitters, and are installed so that the direction of light irradiation is toward the main control device 340. The light irradiation range IR of the lighting devices 349a and 349b includes the range facing the MPU 342 on the opposing wall portion 345a of the main control device 340. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the MPU 342. Furthermore, the irradiation range IR includes the range that faces the first to third alarm display devices 346-348 on the opposing wall portion 345a of the main control device 340. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the first to third alarm display devices 346-348. Furthermore, the irradiation range IR includes the range in which the connecting portion 345b is provided and the range in which the sealing seal 345c is provided on the board box 345 of the main control device 340. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the connecting portion 345b and the sealing seal 345c.

The illumination devices 349a and 349b emit light according to the opening angle of the front door 312 relative to the housing 311, as will be described in detail later. In order to detect the opening angle of the front door 312, an opening angle sensor 312e is provided on the rear surface of the front door 312 adjacent to the shaft portion 312a, as shown in FIG. 81. The opening angle sensor 312e can detect whether the front door 312 is in a closed state relative to the housing 311, and can detect whether the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle when the front door 312 is open. The method of detecting the opening angle of the front door 312 by the opening angle sensor 312e is arbitrary, but for example, a configuration having a detection unit that is in a pressed state when the front door 312 is in a closed state and that releases the pressed state when the front door 312 is in an open state, and a detection unit that is in a pressed state when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle and does not become pressed until the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes the predetermined opening angle, can be considered.

In addition to the main control device 340, the slot machine 310 is also provided with a performance control device 350 as shown in FIG. 81. The performance control device 350 is arranged behind the image display device 334 and stacked on the front door 312. The performance control device 350 controls the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 based on commands received from the main control device 340. Note that, like the main control device 340, the performance control device 350 is configured with a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of this slot machine 310 will be explained based on the block diagram in Figure 86.

The main control device 340 is equipped with a main control board 341 which is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 341 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 has a ROM 343 which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343, a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generating circuit etc. built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 343 and RAM 344 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 342, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 342, various sensors are connected, such as the reel unit 316, a start detection sensor 321a that detects the operation of the start lever 321, stop detection sensors 322a, 323a, 324a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 322, 323, 324, an inserted medal detection sensor 325a that detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 325, credit insertion detection sensors 327a, 328a, 329a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 327, 328, 329, a settlement detection sensor 331a that detects the operation of the settlement button 331, a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 318, a sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 319b provided on the power supply device 319, a sensor that detects the insertion of a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 319c provided on the power supply device 319, and an opening angle sensor 312e that detects the opening angle of the front door 312, and the like. The signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 342.

The output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the reel unit 316, the selector drive unit 317a provided on the selector 317, the payout motor of the hopper device 318, the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, the lighting devices 349a and 349b, and the performance control device 350. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R of the reel unit 316 is performed by the MPU 342. As already explained, the selector 317 has the function of guiding a medal inserted from the medal insertion port 325 to the hopper device 318 after detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 325a if acceptance is permitted, and discharging it to the medal tray 312d without detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 325a if acceptance is prohibited. The selector drive unit 317a has a function for switching the state of the selector 317 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state, and specifically, it operates a path switching piece provided on the selector 317 between an acceptance permission position and an acceptance prohibition position. The MPU 342 switches the state of the selector 317 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a.

The MPU 342 also controls the operation of the hopper device 318 when a small winning combination is achieved and a medal is paid out. When the supply of operating power to the MPU 342 is started, the MPU 342 starts displaying information on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 to notify the results of the game history management, and updates the display content each time the game history management results are updated. The MPU 342 also controls the emission of light from the lighting devices 349a and 349b according to the opening angle of the front door 312. The MPU 342 also sends commands to the performance control device 350 at each timing of each game, and sends commands to the performance control device 350 to notify the image display device 334 of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 319 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342 (not shown). The power supply 319 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 310, including the main control device 340. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors the voltage applied to the power supply unit from an external power source, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 342 when the voltage falls below a reference voltage. The MPU 342 executes power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and enables the processing state before the power failure to be restored after power is restored. In addition, the power supply 319 is provided with a power failure power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 344 as power failure power in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 344 in a situation where the power failure power supply unit can supply backup power (for example, for one or two days). However, by pressing the reset button 319b on the power supply device 319 and then turning on the slot machine 310, the data stored in the RAM 344 is initialized.

The performance control device 350 is equipped with a performance control board 351 for controlling the execution of various notifications and various performances. The performance control board 351 is equipped with an MPU 352. The MPU 352 has a ROM 353 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 352, and a RAM 354 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 353 is executed. It also has a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generating circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 353 and the RAM 354 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 352, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. In addition, the RAM 354 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply unit of the power supply device when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, but the RAM 354 may be supplied with backup power.

The MPU 352 is provided with an input port and an output port. As already explained, the MPU 342 of the main control device 340 is connected to the input side of the MPU 352, and various commands are received from the MPU 342. The upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 are connected to the output side of the MPU 352. Based on the commands received from the MPU 342 of the main control device 340, the MPU 352 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 332, the sound output of the speaker 333, and the display of the image display device 334, thereby enabling various notifications and various performances to be performed.

For ease of explanation, in the following explanation, the MPU 342, ROM 343, and RAM 344 of the main control device 340 are referred to as the main MPU 342, main ROM 343, and main RAM 344, respectively, and the MPU 352, ROM 353, and RAM 354 of the performance control device 350 are referred to as the performance MPU 352, performance ROM 353, and performance RAM 354, respectively.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the main MPU 342. Figure 87 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 342.

In the main process, the initialization process is first executed (step S4401). In the initialization process, an interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and various initial settings are made to the register group and I/O devices in the main MPU 342. After the initialization process is completed, the display start process is executed (step S4402). In the display start process, the display is started on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. In this case, if the main RAM 344 stores information on the management results of the game history immediately before the previous power outage, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is executed so that a display corresponding to the information is performed. On the other hand, if the main RAM 344 does not store information on the management results of the game history immediately before the previous power outage or if the information does not store regular information, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is executed so that a predetermined initial display (for example, all lights are turned on) is performed.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c and the power has been turned ON (step S4403). If the power has been turned ON with the setting key inserted (step S4403: YES), and if the reset button 319b has not been turned ON when the power was turned ON (step S4404: NO), the winning probability setting process is executed (step S4406). On the other hand, if the reset button 319b has been turned ON when the power was turned ON (step S4404: YES), a clear process (step S4405) is executed, and then the winning probability setting process is executed (step S4406).

In the clear process, all areas in the master RAM 344 are initialized. In this case, the areas in the master RAM 344 that store the setting values of the slot machine 310, the area that stores data indicating whether or not the slot machine is in the BB state, the area that stores data indicating the total number of game media awarded in the BB state, the area that stores data indicating whether or not the slot machine is in the AT state, the area that stores data for specifying the end condition of the AT state, the data indicating the type of lottery mode described below, the area that stores information on the management results of the game history, the total game number counter 344a, and the advantageous game number counter 344b are all cleared to "0". As a result, when the clear process is executed, the game returns to the normal game state regardless of the state before the power cut, and if the state before the power cut was a state in which the progress of the game was restricted due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the abnormal state is released.

In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned ON, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 335 provided on the game panel 314. If the clear process (step S4405) of the main RAM 344 is executed, the credit display unit 335 displays "Setting 1" at the start of the winning probability setting process, and if the clear process (step S4405) is not executed, the display corresponds to the setting value before the power is cut off. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 319b is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 335. If the reset button 319b is operated when the setting value is "Setting 6", the setting value is updated to "Setting 1". The winning probability setting process ends when the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 321 is operated. In this case, the display of the setting value on the credit display unit 335 ends. After the winning probability setting process is executed, the process moves to normal processing (step S4407). Normal processing will be explained in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S4403: NO), the power recovery process from step S4408 onwards is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 310 to the state before the power was cut off. In the power recovery process, the main RAM 344 is checked to determine whether the setting value of the slot machine 310 is normal (step S4408). Specifically, if the setting value is any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the setting value is normal, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S4409). The power outage flag is provided in the main RAM 344, and if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is executed normally, the power outage flag is set to "1". If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM judgment value is normal (step S4410). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 344 is checked to see if it is normal.

If the answer is yes in all of steps S4408 to S4410, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was executed normally. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 344 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 342, and the data saved in the main RAM 344 is restored to the register of the main MPU 342, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main MPU 342 to the state before the power was cut off (step S4411). In addition, the power failure flag of the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4412). After that, a power recovery command is sent to the production side MPU 352 to make it recognize that the power recovery processing has been executed (step S4413), and then the address before the power was cut off is returned to (step S4414).

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S4408 to S4410, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is prohibited (step S4415), all output ports of the main MPU 342 are cleared to "0" to turn off all actuators connected to those output ports (step S4416), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S4417). This then results in an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing the clear process (step S4405).

Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 88. Note that the timer interrupt process is started, for example, every 1.49 msec.

In the register save process (step S4501), the values of all registers in the main MPU 342 that are used in the normal process described below are saved to the main RAM 344. In step S4502, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set to "1", and if the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S4503 and power outage processing is executed.

The power outage flag is set when a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the power supply device 319 is input to the main MPU 342. In the power outage processing, first, it is determined whether the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is returned to, and the command transmission is terminated. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 342 is saved in the main RAM 344. Then, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 342 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power outage is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether the data in the main RAM 344 is normal or not is calculated and saved in the main RAM 344, and further access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S4502, various processes from step S4504 onwards are performed. In step S4504, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S4505, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the main MPU 342 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S4506, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors provided on each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to spin these reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. In step S4507, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors connected to the input ports and to monitor whether the read results are normal.

In step S4508, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S4509, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S4510, a command output process is performed to send various commands to the performance side MPU 352. In step S4511, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S4512, the values of each register saved in the main side RAM 344 in the previous step S4501 are restored to the corresponding register in the main side MPU 342. In step S4513, a management process is performed to manage the game history and to display the display corresponding to the management result on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. In step S4514, a lighting process is performed to control the light emission of the lighting devices 349a and 349b according to the opening angle of the front door 312. After that, in step S4515, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated. Details of the management process in step S4513 and the lighting process in step S4514 will be explained later.

Figure 89 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU 342.

In the normal process, first, a waiting-to-start process is executed (step S4601). In the waiting-to-start process, if any replay win occurred in the previous game, an automatic insertion process is executed to set the state in which the same number of gaming media as the number of bets in the previous game has been bet. In addition, in the waiting-to-start process, if a medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a, if the current number of bets is not equal to or greater than the maximum specified number of "3", the number of bets is incremented by 1, and if the number of bets is equal to or greater than the maximum specified number of "3", the value of the credit counter provided in the main RAM 344 is incremented by 1. The credit counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 342 to identify the number of virtual medals stored and stored.

In the start waiting process, when the automatic insertion process is not being performed and any of the credit insertion buttons 327 to 329 is operated, a credit insertion response process is executed to set the number of bets corresponding to that operation. In the credit insertion response process, when the first credit insertion button 327 is operated, the maximum number of gaming media that can be bet at that time is bet, and when the second credit insertion button 328 or the third credit insertion button 329 is operated, the corresponding bet state is set. In this case, if virtual medals are used for that bet, the value of the number of virtual medals bet is subtracted from the credit counter. Also, when the number of virtual medals required to set the number of bets corresponding to the operated credit insertion button 327 to 329 is not stored and stored, the maximum number of gaming media that can be bet in relation to the stored and stored virtual medals is bet.

In the start waiting process, if the number of bets is equal to or greater than the maximum number and the value of the credit counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of reserved medals (specifically, "50" ), the reception prohibition process is executed. In the reception prohibition process, the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a is stopped to set the selector 317 to the reception prohibition state. As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion port 325, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. On the other hand, if the number of bets is less than the maximum number or the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit of the number of reserved medals, the reception permission process is executed. In the reception permission process, the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a is started to set the selector 317 to the reception permission state. As a result, the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 325 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a and then collected by the hopper device 318. In the start waiting process, when the settlement button 331 is operated and the automatic insertion process is not being executed, the hopper device 318 is controlled and driven so that medals corresponding to the total number of bets and the value of the credit counter are discharged to the medal tray 312d via the medal discharge port 312c. As a result, the game media stored internally are paid out to the player as actual medals.

After the start waiting process is executed, it is determined whether the number of medal bets has reached a specified number ("3" in this embodiment) (step S4602), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S4601). If the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether the start lever 321 has been operated (step S4603). If the start lever 321 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S4601). On the other hand, if the start lever 321 has been operated, the main line ML is enabled and then the reception prohibition process is executed (step S4604). As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion port 325, the medal is discharged into the medal tray 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. After that, a lottery process is executed to select the winning combination for the current game (step S4605), and a reel control process is executed (step S4606) to drive and control each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R in a manner corresponding to the result of the current lottery process (step S4605).

Then, the medal payout process is executed (step S4607). In the medal payout process, if a small win has been achieved in the current game, a process is executed to award the player with a number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small win. Specifically, when awarding virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the credit counter, and if the value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit of the number of medals that can be stored, the hopper device is driven and controlled so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of medals can be paid out to the medal tray 312d.

After that, a response process is executed at the end of the game to enable the setting of the game state corresponding to the result of the current game (step S4608). Then, an acceptance permission process is executed (step S4609). As a result, the medal inserted through the medal insertion port 325 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a and then collected by the hopper device.

The lottery process executed in step S4605 of the normal process (FIG. 83) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 90.

First, a random number to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved is obtained (step S4701). In this slot machine 310, when the start lever 321 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers between 0 and 65535, and the main MPU 342, after confirming the operation of the start lever 321, stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in the main RAM 344. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 321 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 310 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 321 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for determining whether the winning combination is a winning combination is read from the main ROM 343 (step S4702). Here, in this slot machine 310, six winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 319c and turning it ON and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the lottery process. Note that "setting n+1" has a more favorable winning probability for the player than "setting n". In addition, even if the setting value is the same level, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery table differs in the main MPU 342: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In addition to the state of each of these lottery modes, there is also a BB state as a game state. In step S4702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value and the current game state is selected.

Using "Setting 3" as an example, the lottery tables corresponding to normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode will be explained. First, the lottery table for normal mode that is selected in normal mode will be explained. Figure 91 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for normal mode. Note that the following explanation will refer to the explanatory diagram in Figure 92 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 91, index values IV are set in the lottery table for normal mode, and each index value IV is associated with a winning role and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery role in relation to the maximum value of the free run counter ("65535").

Specifically, the index value IV=1 is set with bell winning data and first compensation winning data. When a win occurs with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. 92, if the first stop (the reel on which the first stop command was issued) is the left reel 316L, a bell win will definitely occur regardless of the type of reel that is the second and third stop target and the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in all other cases the first compensation win will definitely occur.

In this slot machine 310, reel control that allows up to four symbols to slide after the stop buttons 322-324 are operated is performed on each reel 316L, 316M, 316R. In other words, reel control that stops each reel 316L, 316M, 316R within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 322-324 are operated is performed on each reel 316L, 316M, 316R. By performing such reel control, it becomes easier to achieve a winning combination that corresponds to a winning role, and it becomes possible to prevent a winning combination that corresponds to a non-winning role from being achieved. However, since the amount of rotation that the reels 316L, 316M, 316R can slide is limited as described above, if there are five or more constituent symbols on one reel 316L, 316M, 316R among the combination of symbols that result in a winning prize, it is possible that the constituent symbols will not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 322-324 (this phenomenon is also known as a "missed out"). The first to third compensation wins, bell wins, and various replay wins are winning modes that will not result in missed wins if the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped in the corresponding order, while the first watermelon win, second watermelon win, cherry win, first BB win, and second BB win are winning modes that may result in missed wins depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R.

As shown in FIG. 91, bell winning data and second compensation winning data are set for index value IV=2. When a win occurs with index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. 92, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, a bell win is guaranteed to be achieved regardless of the type of reel that is the second and third stop target and the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in all other cases, a second compensation win is guaranteed to be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 91, bell winning data and third compensation winning data are set for index value IV=3. When a win occurs with index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. 92, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, a bell win is guaranteed to be achieved regardless of the type of reel that is the second and third stop target and the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in all other cases, a third compensation win is guaranteed to be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 91, only the first watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=4. When a win occurs with index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 92, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, there is a possibility that the first watermelon winning will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 91, only the second watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=5. When a win occurs with index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 92, the second watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, the second watermelon winning may not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 91, only cherry winning data is set for index value IV=6. When a win occurs with index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 92, a cherry winning can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of left stop button 322 relative to the spinning position of left reel 316L, there is a possibility that a cherry winning will not occur.

As shown in FIG. 91, 1st BB winning data is set for index value IV=7. When a win occurs with index value IV=7, 1st BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R, as shown in FIG. 92. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, 1st BB winning may not be achieved. Also, as shown in FIG. 91, 2nd BB winning data is set for index value IV=8. When a win occurs with index value IV=8, 2nd BB winning may be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R, as shown in FIG. 92. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, 2nd BB winning may not be achieved.

Here, winning data other than the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data is erased in the game in which the winning was made, regardless of whether or not a winning was made, and is not carried over to the game following the winning game. In contrast, the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data are stored and held until the corresponding BB winning is made, even in the game following the winning game, except when the main RAM 344 is cleared. In this case, in a game in which the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data is excluded from the lottery. This makes it possible to prevent new BB winning data from being stored even if the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data has already been stored and held, and to prevent multiple BB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

As shown in Figure 91, normal replay winning data and 1st RT replay winning data are set for index values IV = 9 to 12. In this case, if a win occurs with index value IV = 9, as shown in Figure 92, if the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command was issued) is the left reel 316L, and the third stop (the reel on which the last stop command was issued) is the right reel 316R, then the 1st RT replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and otherwise, normal replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=10, if the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the first RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=11, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the center reel 316M, the first RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In addition, if a win occurs with index value IV=12, and the first stop is on the right reel 316R, the second stop is on the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is on the left reel 316L, then the first RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324; otherwise, a regular replay win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324.

When the normal mode lottery table in FIG. 91 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=3 are each approximately 1/5.0, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4 is approximately 1/131, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5 is approximately 1/187, the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 is approximately 1/423, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=8 are each approximately 1/218, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=9, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=12 are each approximately 1/28.0.

As already explained, in the lottery table for normal mode, in addition to the normal replay winning data, the first RT replay winning data is set as the winning data for index values IV = 9 to 12 (see FIG. 91). The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is approximately 1/7.0. If any of index values IV = 9 to 12 is won, and the stop order of the first, second, and third stops of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R corresponds to the winning combination, a first RT replay win is established, and the lottery mode transitions from normal mode to first RT mode. When transitioning to first RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the lottery table for first RT mode.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the first RT mode that is selected when "Setting 3" is selected as the first RT mode. Figures 93 and 94 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, the winning combination data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 91). In this case, the combination that allows the award of game media is set for index values IV=1 to 6, and the winning combination data and the winning probability set for each of the index values IV=1 to 6 are the same, so that the types of combinations that allow the award of game media and the winning probability of those combinations are the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode. In addition, BB winning data is set for index values IV=7 to 8, as in the lottery table for the normal mode, and the winning probability is the same as that in the lottery table for the normal mode. In other words, the probability of winning any of the BB combinations is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The winning data set for index values IV=9 and after is different from that in the normal mode. In detail, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 93, the winning data for index values IV=9 to 12 includes the winning data for the second RT replay in addition to the winning data for the normal replay. The probability of winning any of these index values IV=9 to 12 is approximately 1/10.1. When the winning is made with index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 94, if the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, the second RT replay winning will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and otherwise, the normal replay winning will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=10, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the second RT replay winning is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=11, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M, the second RT replay winning is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In addition, when the index value IV=12 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the center reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the second RT replay winning combination will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and otherwise, the normal replay winning combination will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. In the first RT mode, if the index value IV=9-12 is a winning combination, and the first, second, and third stops of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination, the second RT replay winning combination will be established and the lottery mode will shift from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process (FIG. 90) will be the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, in addition to the regular replay winning data, the first fall replay winning data is set as the winning data for index values IV = 13 to 18. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 13 to 18 is approximately 1/10.9.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, when the index value IV=13 is won, as shown in FIG. 94, if the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the center reel 316M, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. Also, in the case of a win with index value IV=14, if the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the center reel 316M, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. In addition, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=15, if the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, a first fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=16, if the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, a first fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=17, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the center reel 316M, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and otherwise the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=18, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the center reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and otherwise the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. When the first fall replay winning is made, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When switching to normal mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process (Figure 90) becomes the lottery table for normal mode.

Only normal replay winning data is set for index value IV=19 in the lottery table for the first RT mode. The probability of winning with index value IV=19 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically, the winning rate is approximately 1 in 6.7. If a win occurs with index value IV=19, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R and the timing of the stopping operation of each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, combinations that make it possible to achieve a replay win are set for index values IV = 9 to 19. And because the winning probabilities of these combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of combinations that make it possible to achieve a replay win in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is approximately 1/2.9. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/7.0. In other words, the first RT mode is a gaming state in which the replay probability is higher than in normal mode.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the second RT mode that is selected when the setting is "Setting 3" and the second RT mode is selected. Figures 95 and 96 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 95, the winning combination data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 91) and the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 93). In this case, the combination that allows the award of game media is set for the index values IV=1 to 6, and the winning combination data and the winning probability set for each of the index values IV=1 to 6 are the same, so that the types of combinations that allow the award of game media and the winning probability of those combinations are the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, the BB winning data is set for the index values IV=7 to 8 in the same way as in the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the winning probability is the same as that in the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode. In other words, the probability of winning any of the BB combinations is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

The winning data set for index values IV=9 and above is different from that in normal mode and first RT mode. In detail, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 95, in addition to the normal replay winning data, the second fall replay winning data is set as the winning data for index values IV=9 to 14. The probability of winning any of these index values IV=9 to 14 is approximately 1/5.5.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, when the index value IV=9 is won, as shown in FIG. 96, if the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the center reel 316M, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. Also, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, when the index value IV=10 is won, if the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the center reel 316M, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. In addition, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=11, if the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, a second fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=12, if the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, a second fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=13, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the center reel 316M, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=14, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the center reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. When the second fall replay winning is made, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When the first RT mode is entered, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process (Figure 90) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Only normal replay winning data is set for index value IV=15 in the lottery table for the second RT mode. The probability of winning with index value IV=15 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically, the winning rate is approximately 1 in 6.3. If a win occurs with index value IV=15, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R and the timing of the stopping operation of each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, combinations that enable a replay win are set for index values IV = 9 to 15. And because the winning probabilities of these combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of combinations that enable a replay win in the second RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is approximately 1/2.9. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/7.0. In other words, the second RT mode is a gaming state with a higher replay probability than the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is approximately 1/2.9. In other words, the replay probability in the second RT mode is the same as that in the first RT mode. However, the replay probability in the first RT mode is not limited to being the same as the replay probability in the second RT mode; for example, the replay probability in the first RT mode and the second RT mode may be substantially the same, though slightly different, or the second RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, or the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

The lottery table for normal mode, the lottery table for first RT mode, and the lottery table for second RT mode are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the BB role, but the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or approximately the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, if any BB role has been won, the first BB role and the second BB role are excluded from the lottery target regardless of whether it is the normal mode, the first RT mode, or the second RT mode, so that the BB role is not won twice. In addition, in the main ROM 343, in addition to the lottery table for normal mode, the lottery table for first RT mode, and the lottery table for second RT mode, a lottery table for BB that is referenced in the lottery process (Figure 90) when in the BB state is stored. In the BB lottery table, only three types of roles are set as the roles to be selected: Bell, First Watermelon, and Second Watermelon. The probability of winning the Bell role is set to approximately 1/1.1, the probability of winning the First Watermelon role is set to approximately 1/100, and the probability of winning the Second Watermelon role is set to approximately 1/100. As a result, the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games in the BB state is higher than in other game states.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (FIG. 90), after a lottery table is selected (step S4702), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S4703), and a judgment value DV to be used when judging whether a hand is a hit or miss is set (step S4704). In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S4701 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV of "1" is added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, a win/loss judgment is made for the role corresponding to the index value IV (step S4705). In the role win/loss judgment, it is judged whether the judgment value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535", a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning role data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the master RAM 344 (step S4706). In the winning data acquisition process, all winning data set for the current index value IV in the lottery table being referenced is set in the master RAM 344. If the winning data is winning data other than BB winning data, the state in which the winning data is set is cleared to "0" after the end of the current game regardless of whether or not a win corresponding to the winning data is achieved, and if it is BB winning data, it is cleared to "0" if a win is achieved.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S4705: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been obtained. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S4707), and it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether or not there is a target for which judgment is to be made (step S4708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which judgment is to be made, the process returns to step S4704, and judgment of the hand continues. At this time, in step S4704, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S4705, judgment of the hand is made based on the judgment value DV.

When the process of step S4706 is executed, or when a negative judgment is made in step S4708, it means that the judgment of the winning or losing role has been completed. In this case, after the stop information setting process is executed to set the stop information for reel stop control (step S4709), a game start command is set as a target for transmission to the production side MPU 352 (step S4710). The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 352 recognize that a new game has started, and the game start command includes information indicating whether the current game state is the normal game state, the BB state, or the AT state, and information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (Figure 90) for the current game.

When the production side MPU 352 receives a game start command, it determines the general content of the production for the current game based on the content of the game start command, and determines the details of the production by lottery in a manner that corresponds to the general content of the production that it has determined. It then reads a data table corresponding to the determined content of the production from the production side ROM 353 to the production side RAM 354, and executes light emission control of the upper lamp 332, sound output control of the speaker 333, and display control of the image display device 334 according to the read data table.

Next, we will explain the reel control processing executed in step S4606 of normal processing (Figure 89).

In the reel control process, if the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R have not yet started to rotate, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are caused to start to rotate. In this case, the drive of each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is controlled so that it rotates at a constant speed after a predetermined acceleration period. Note that operation of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324 is disabled until the reels start to rotate at a constant speed.

In the reel control process, after each reel 316L, 316M, 316R starts to rotate at a constant speed, the stop button 322-324 corresponding to the rotating reel 316L, 316M, 316R is operated, and the reel 316L, 316M, 316R corresponding to the operated stop button 322-324 is stopped. In this case, the number of slides until the actual pattern is stopped is determined based on the information for stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role in the current game (step S4605) and the pattern present in a predetermined position (for example, the lower row) on the reel 316L, 316M, 316R that is the target of the stop operation at the time when the stop operation is performed. Then, the reel 316L, 316M, 316R that is the target of the stop operation is moved in the rotation direction by the determined number of slides, and the reel 316L, 316M, 316R is stopped. The number of slides is either "0", "1", "2", "3" or "4". The number of slides is set to allow the stop of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the main line ML as much as possible, while reliably avoiding the stop of the symbol combination corresponding to the non-winning combination on the main line ML. In addition, since the winning combination changes according to the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R at index values IV=1 to 3 and IV=9 and above, when such an index value IV is won, the information for stop control is changed according to the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. In addition, in the reel control process, when all the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R have stopped, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the main line ML. Then, when any replay winning is established, a replay privilege is granted, and when any winning corresponding to the granting of game media is established, the number of game media corresponding to the winning is granted.

Next, the response process at the end of the game, which is executed in step S4608 of the normal process (FIG. 89), will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 97.

In the corresponding process at the end of the game, the value of the total game number counter 344a (see FIG. 86) provided in the main RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S4801). The total game number counter 344a is a counter for measuring the number of games played regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. The AT state refers to a state in which the stop order corresponding to the stop buttons 322 to 324 being a predetermined correct order is notified in a situation in which a lottery role that is more advantageous to the player than a case in which the correct order is not obtained is won by forming a corresponding combination of symbols on the main line ML. Such a lottery role corresponding to the stop order can be won in both the non-AT state and the AT state, but since the non-AT state does not notify the stop order that is the correct order, whereas the AT state is configured to notify the stop order that is the correct order, the AT state is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state. Specifically, when the index value IV of the combination that establishes a winning combination according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is won for index values IV=1 to 3 and index value IV=9 or later, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing the winning combination that is advantageous to the player is notified in the AT state, and such a notification of the stop order is not executed in the non-AT state. In addition, when the lottery process for the combination is executed (FIG. 90), a game start command corresponding to the lottery result is transmitted from the main MPU 342 to the production MPU 352, and the production MPU 352 controls the display of the image display device 334 based on the game start command, so that the notification of the stop order is started before the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R become capable of stopping in the game corresponding to the execution of the lottery process for the combination (FIG. 90). In addition, the ART state is a gaming state in which the player is in the first RT mode or the second RT mode in the AT state. In the ART state, the probability of a replay winning increases, and as described above, the expected number of gaming media awarded in one game increases. Therefore, it is possible to make the ART state an advantageous gaming state.

In the corresponding process at the end of the game, if any of the BB roles is in a winning state or in the BB state (step S4802: YES), the BB process is executed (step S4803). In the BB process, if any of the BB roles is in a winning state, it is determined whether or not a BB win corresponding to the winning BB role has occurred in the current game, and if a BB win has occurred, the BB state flag provided in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" to transition the game state to the BB state. As a result, the BB lottery table is referenced in the lottery process for roles in the next game and thereafter (FIG. 90). In addition, by sending a command indicating that the state has been transitioned to the BB state to the performance side MPU 352, the performance for the BB state is started in the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334. In addition, when the state is transitioned to the BB state, the BB winning data is erased from the main RAM 344 to release the state in which the BB role has been won. Additionally, whether the first BB win or the second BB win occurs, the same BB state will result.

In the BB processing in the BB state, it is determined whether or not game media have been awarded in the current game, and if game media have been awarded, the number of game media awarded in the current game is added to the total awarded number counter provided in the main RAM 344. Then, it is determined whether the value of the total awarded number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the termination reference number. If it is less than the value corresponding to the termination reference number, the BB processing is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the termination reference number, the BB state flag in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" to terminate the BB state. In addition, a command indicating that the BB state has ended is sent to the production side MPU 352, causing the image display device 334 to display an ending image, and then the BB state production in the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 is terminated.

When the BB state ends, the lottery mode will become the normal mode, regardless of the lottery mode before the BB state begins. Also, if the BB state begins in the AT state, the ART preparation state process described below will be executed after the BB state ends, regardless of the state before the BB state begins.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4802, or if the processing of step S4803 is executed, it is judged whether or not the game is in the AT state (step S4804). If the game is not in the AT state (step S4804: NO), the RT mode transition processing (step S4805) and transition chance management processing (step S4806) are executed. Note that, if a stopping operation is performed first on the center reel 316M or right reel 316R in a game that is neither the BB state nor the AT state, a notification is issued indicating that a stopping operation should be performed starting with the left reel 316L, but no penalty is given that limits the awarding of profits in subsequent games.

In the RT mode transition process (step S4805), if it is determined that a first RT replay win has occurred in the current game, the mode is transitioned to the first RT mode, and if it is determined that a second RT replay win has occurred in the current game, the mode is transitioned to the second RT mode. Also, in the RT mode transition process, if it is determined that a second fall replay win has occurred in the current game, the mode is transitioned to the first RT mode, and if it is determined that a first fall replay win has occurred in the current game, the mode is transitioned to the normal mode.

In the transition chance management process (step S4806), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, it is determined whether or not a special role has been won in the role lottery process for the current game (FIG. 90) (step S4901). A special role is any of the index values IV = 4 to 6. If a special role has been won (step S4901: YES), it is determined whether or not the advantageous regulation flag provided in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S4902). The advantageous regulation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 342 to identify a situation in which transition to the AT state (i.e., ART state) is prohibited. The processing when the advantageous regulation flag is set to "1" will be explained later.

If the advantageous regulation flag is not set to "1" (step S4902: NO), the transition lottery table corresponding to the contents of the stock bonus is read from the main ROM 343 to the main RAM 344. The stock bonus is a bonus that can be accumulated when the special role is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 90) in the normal game state when the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1". The stock bonus is set to six levels from "0" to "5", and the stock bonus is set to "0" when there is no accumulated bonus. In the transition lottery table corresponding to the stock bonus being "0", if the index value IV=4 is won, the AT transition win is set to a 5% probability, if the index value IV=5 is won, the AT transition win is set to a 10% probability, and if the index value IV=6 is won, the AT transition win is set to a 15% probability. The contents of the transition lottery table referenced when the stock bonus is "1" to "5" will be explained later.

After the transition lottery table is read in step S4903, an AT transition lottery process is executed (step S4904). In the AT transition lottery process, the value of the transition lottery counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 344, is read, and the value of the read transition lottery counter is compared with the transition lottery table.

If the AT transition lottery process results in an AT transition win (step S4905: YES), an initial game number lottery table corresponding to the contents of the stock benefit is read from the main ROM 343 to the main RAM 344 (step S4906). In the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the stock benefit being "0", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 90%, the probability that 100 games will be selected is 9%, and the probability that 200 games will be selected is 1%. The contents of the initial game number lottery table referenced when the stock benefit is "1" to "5" will be explained later.

After the initial game number lottery table is read in step S4906, an initial game number lottery process is executed (step S4907). In the initial game number lottery process, the value of the game number lottery counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 1.49 msec) in the master RAM 344, is read, and the read value of the game number lottery counter is compared with the initial game number lottery table. Then, the initial game number corresponding to the comparison result is set in the ART game number counter provided in the master RAM 344 (step S4908).

Then, it is determined whether the current RT mode is the second RT mode (step S4909). If it is the second RT mode (step S4909: YES), there is no need to wait for the AT state to be promoted to the second RT mode, so this transition chance management process is terminated. As a result, the game state becomes the ART state, which is the AT state and the second RT mode. In this case, a command indicating that the ART state has started is sent to the production side MPU 352. By receiving the command, the production side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 to perform a performance indicating that the ART state has started, and then causes the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 to perform a performance corresponding to the ART state. Then, the value of the stock bonus counter provided in the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4909). The stock bonus counter is a counter for the main side MPU 342 to identify the presence or absence of a stock bonus and the value of the stock bonus.

If the mode is not the second RT mode (step S4910: NO), it is necessary to wait for the mode to be promoted to the second RT mode as an ART preparation state, so the ART preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S4911). The ART preparation state flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 342 to identify that the mode is in the ART preparation state.

Returning to the explanation of the response process at the end of play (FIG. 97), if the value of the ART game number counter in the master RAM 344 is 1 or greater, or if the ART preparation status flag in the master RAM 344 is set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S4804. In this case, on the condition that the ART preparation status flag in the master RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S4807: YES), ART preparation status processing is executed (step S4808).

The ART preparation state processing determines whether promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, and if promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, the ART preparation state flag in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0". This transitions the game state from the AT state to the ART state. In addition, a command indicating that the ART state has started is sent to the presentation side MPU 352. Upon receiving this command, the presentation side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 to perform a presentation indicating that the ART state has started, and then causes the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 to perform a presentation corresponding to the ART state.

When the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for enabling a bell win is announced when a win occurs with index value IV = 1 to 3, regardless of whether the ART preparation state flag is set to "1." When the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for enabling a 1st RT replay win or a 2nd RT replay win is announced when a win occurs with index value IV = 9 to 12 in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 91) or the 1st RT mode lottery table (Figure 93), regardless of whether the ART preparation state flag is set to "1." Additionally, if the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, regardless of whether the ART preparation status flag is set to "1" or not, if a win occurs with index value IV = 13 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (Figure 93), the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to achieve a normal replay win is announced.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4807, ART state processing is executed (step S4809). Figure 99 is a flowchart showing the ART state processing.

First, the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b (see FIG. 86) provided in the master RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S5001). The advantageous game number counter 344b is a counter for measuring the number of games played from when a transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the master RAM 344 becomes "0". The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter in the master RAM 344 becomes "0" after a transition to the ART state occurs. In other words, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used to measure the total number of games that have occurred in multiple ART states.

Then, RT mode transition processing is executed (step S5002). In the RT mode transition processing, if it is determined that a first RT replay winning has occurred, a transition to the first RT mode is made, if it is determined that a second RT replay winning has occurred, a transition to the second RT mode is made, if it is determined that a first fall replay winning has occurred, a transition to the normal mode is made, and if it is determined that a second fall replay winning has occurred, a transition to the first RT mode is made.

After that, in the lottery process for the role in this game (Figure 90), it is determined whether or not a special role has been won (step S5003). A special role is any of the index values IV = 4 to 6. If a special role has been won (step S5003: YES), a lottery process for adding the number of continued games is executed (step S5004). In the lottery process for adding the number of continued games, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continued games in the ART state, and if so, the number of games to be added. In the lottery process for adding the number of continued games, a lottery table for adding the number of continued games corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main ROM 343, and the value of a lottery counter for the number of games, which is updated periodically (for example, every 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 344, is read, and the value of the lottery counter is compared with the lottery table for adding the number of continued games. The lottery table for adding the number of continued games is set so that the probability of an addition occurring increases in the order of IV=4 → IV=5 → IV=6, and the expected number of games to be won in the added games increases in that order. If an addition is won in the lottery process for adding the number of continued games (step S5005: YES), the number of added games selected in the lottery process for adding is added to the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 (step S5006).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5003, if a negative judgment is made in step S5005, or if the processing of step S5006 is executed, the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is decremented by 1 (step S5007). Then, if the value of the ART game number counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S5008: YES), an end process of the ART state is executed (step S5009). In this end process, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is sent to the presentation side MPU 352. By receiving this command, the presentation side MPU 352 controls each of the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 so that an effect corresponding to the normal game state is executed after an effect indicating that the ART state has ended is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 97), if the process of step S4806, step S4808, or step S4809 has been executed, a game end command is sent to the presentation side MPU 352 (step S4810). If the presentation side MPU 352 receives the game end command, it controls the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 so that the presentation being executed in the current game is ended. Then, game management process is executed (step S4811).

Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the game management process.

In the game management process, if the advantageous regulation flag of the master RAM 344 is not set to "1" (step S5101: NO), it is determined whether the value of the total game number counter 344a of the master RAM 344 is equal to or greater than "3000", which is a value corresponding to the number of games triggering management (step S5102). The number of games triggering management is not limited to 3000 games, and may be, for example, 6000 games. The number of games triggering management is not limited to a configuration set to less than the maximum number of games that can be played in a business day in a game parlor, and may be set to about the maximum number of games, or may be set to more than the maximum number of games. If the value of the total game number counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of games triggering management (step S5102: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the master RAM 344 to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated (step S5103). In other words, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of advantageous game number counter 344b" / "value of total game number counter 344a".

Then, it is determined whether the value of the calculation result exceeds the regulated ratio (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the calculation result in step S5103 exceeds the regulated ratio of "0.7". In other words, when the total number of games in all game states including the normal game state, BB state, AT state, and ART state reaches 3000 games, it is determined whether the total number of games played in the ART state or the AT state after the ART state has started exceeds 2100 games, which is 70% of 3000 games.

If the determination is affirmative in step S5104, a calculation process of the restricted number of games is executed (step S5105). In the calculation process of the restricted number of games, the restricted number of games that prohibits transition to the AT state and the ART state is calculated so that the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is surely lower than the ratio of the regulated game. Specifically, the following is calculated: Restricted number of games = "value of advantageous game number counter 344b" - "value of total game number counter 344a" x "restricted ratio (i.e., "0.7") + "number of additional games (specifically, "100"). Then, the calculated value of the restricted number of games is set in the restricted game number counter provided in the master RAM 344 (step S5106). The restricted game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of games that prohibits transition to the AT state and the ART state in the master MPU 342. In addition, the advantageous regulation flag in the master RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5107). This prohibits transition to the AT state and the ART state.

After that, if the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5108: YES), as various clearing processes, the ART preparation state flag is cleared to "0" and the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5109). As a result, if the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" in the ART preparation state, the ART preparation state ends without transitioning to the ART state. In this case, since the AT state ends, the notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is not executed, and the notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay winning or the second fall replay winning is not executed. Then, the normal return process is executed (step S5110). In the normal return process, a normal return command is sent to the presentation side MPU 352. When the presentation side MPU 352 receives the normal return command, it executes a presentation indicating that the ART preparation state has ended and the normal game state has been returned to without transitioning to the ART state, and then controls the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 so that a presentation corresponding to the normal game state is executed.

If the ART preparation state flag of the master RAM 344 is not set to "1" (step S5108: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ART game number counter of the master RAM 344 is 1 or more (step S5111). If the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (step S5111: YES), that is, in the ART state, the value of the ART game number counter is cleared to "0" (step S5112). As a result, if the advantageous regulation flag of the master RAM 344 is set to "1" in the ART state, the ART state will end even if the number of continuing games in the ART state remains. In this case, the AT state ends, and notification of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to achieve a first RT replay win or a second RT replay win is not performed, and notification of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to avoid the achievement of a first fall replay win or a second fall replay win is not performed.

After that, the ART state termination process is executed (step S5113). In this termination process, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is sent to the presentation side MPU 352, similar to step S5009 in the ART state process (Figure 99). By receiving this command, the presentation side MPU 352 controls each of the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 so that a presentation corresponding to the normal game state is executed after a presentation indicating that the ART state has ended is executed. The presentation executed in this case is the same as the presentation executed when the process of step S5009 in the ART state process (Figure 99) is executed, that is, when the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0". This makes it difficult for players to recognize whether the ART state ends when the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" during the ART state, or when the remaining number of games to continue in the ART state becomes "0."

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101(a), in the ART state, the image display device 334 notifies the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R when the winning combination is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 90) with index values IV=1 to 3 and index values IV=9 or higher. In FIG. 101(a), an image G1 indicating that the center reel 316M will be stopped first, an image G2 indicating that the left reel 316L will be stopped next, and an image G3 indicating that the right reel 316R will be stopped last are displayed. In this manner, when an image indicating the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is displayed, a number of games played image G4 (specifically, an image saying "30 games in progress") is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 334, which indicates the number of games played since the start of the current ART state before the value of the ART game counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0". Additionally, a text image G5 asking "How long will this continue?" is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 334.

However, an image notifying the remaining number of games to be continued in the current ART state, i.e., the value set in the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344, is not displayed on the image display device 334. In addition, a notification that allows the player to recognize the remaining number of games to be continued in the current ART state is not executed, including by the image display device 334. As a result, even if the ART state is configured to be forcibly terminated even in the middle of the ART state when the value of the total game number counter 344a becomes equal to or exceeds a value corresponding to the management trigger game number and the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a exceeds the regulated ratio, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the end of the ART state is due to the forcible termination or the remaining number of games to be continued in the ART state becoming "0".

Returning to the explanation of the game number management process (FIG. 100), if the process of step S5110 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S5111, or if the process of step S5113 is executed, the value of the total game number counter 344a of the master RAM 344 and the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the master RAM 344 are each cleared to "0" (step S5114). On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S5102 or if a negative judgment is made in step S5104, the process of step S5114 is not executed. As a result, on the condition that the value of the total game number counter 344a becomes the management trigger game number and the execution restriction of the AT state and the ART state has occurred, the game history managed using the total game number counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b are temporarily cleared to "0".

However, this is not limited to the above, and the processing of step S5114 may be executed even if a negative judgment is made in step S5104. In this case, when the value of the total game number counter 344a becomes equal to or greater than the management trigger game number, the game history managed using the total game number counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b will be cleared to "0" once, regardless of whether the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" or not.

If the advantageous regulation flag in the master RAM 344 is set to "1", the transition chance management process (FIG. 98) makes a positive judgment in step S4902. In this case, a lottery process for granting a stock bonus is executed (step S4912). In the lottery process for granting a stock bonus, it is determined whether or not to grant a stock bonus. Specifically, in the lottery process for granting a stock bonus, a lottery table for granting a stock bonus corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the master ROM 343, and the value of a stock bonus lottery counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 1.49 msec) in the master RAM 344 is read, and the value of the lottery counter is compared with the lottery table for granting a stock bonus. The lottery table for granting a stock bonus is set so that the probability of winning the stock bonus increases in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6. If the stock bonus lottery process results in a winning award (step S4913: YES), the value of the stock bonus counter in the main RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S4914).

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101(b), if the value of the stock bonus counter is 1 or greater, a stock bonus image G6 indicating that a stock bonus has been granted is displayed on the image display device 334. Also, the same number of bonus number images G7 as the number of stock bonuses granted are displayed. In the case of FIG. 101(b), since the value of the stock bonus counter is "2", two bonus number images G7 are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a stock bonus has been granted, and also makes it possible for the player to recognize the number of stock bonuses granted.

When a stock bonus is granted, in step S4903 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 98), a transition lottery table corresponding to the value of the granted stock bonus is read out. In this case, the larger the value of the stock bonus, the more advantageous the transition lottery table for the player is read out. Specifically, as already explained, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "0", if the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability of AT transition is 5%, if the index value IV = 5 is won, the probability of AT transition is 10%, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, the probability of AT transition is 15%. On the other hand, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "1", if the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability of AT transition is 15%, if the index value IV = 5 is won, the probability of AT transition is 20%, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, the probability of AT transition is 25%. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "2", if the winning is made with an index value IV = 4, the probability of the AT transition is 25%, if the winning is made with an index value IV = 5, the probability of the AT transition is 30%, and if the winning is made with an index value IV = 6, the probability of the AT transition is 35%. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "3", if the winning is made with an index value IV = 4, the probability of the AT transition is 35%, if the winning is made with an index value IV = 5, the probability of the AT transition is 40%, and if the winning is made with an index value IV = 6, the probability of the AT transition is 45%. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "4", if the winning is made with an index value IV = 4, the probability of the AT transition is 45%, if the winning is made with an index value IV = 5, the probability of the AT transition is 50%, and if the winning is made with an index value IV = 6, the probability of the AT transition is 55%. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "5", if the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability of the AT transition is 55%, if the index value IV = 5 is won, the probability of the AT transition is 60%, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, the probability of the AT transition is 65%. With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the stock benefit being granted, and it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with winning a special role in the role lottery process (Figure 90) even in a situation where the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1". In addition, the process of clearing the stock benefit counter of the main RAM 344 to "0" is executed when the AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery process, so the probability of the AT transition winning in the AT transition lottery process does not decrease until the AT transition is won.

In addition, when a stock benefit is granted, in step S4906 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 98), an initial game number lottery table corresponding to the value of the granted stock benefit is read out. In this case, the larger the value of the stock benefit, the more advantageous the initial game number lottery table for the player is read out. Specifically, as already explained, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "0", the probability of 50 games being selected is 90%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 9%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 1%. In contrast, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "1", the probability of 50 games being selected is 80%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 14%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 6%. In addition, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "2", the probability of 50 games being selected is 70%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 19%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 11%. In addition, in the initial game number selection table selected when the stock benefit is "3", the probability of 50 games being selected is 60%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 24%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 16%. In addition, in the initial game number selection table selected when the stock benefit is "4", the probability of 50 games being selected is 50%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 29%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 21%. In addition, in the initial game number selection table selected when the stock benefit is "5", the probability of 50 games being selected is 40%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 34%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 26%. With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the stock benefit is being awarded, and it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with winning a special role in the role selection process (FIG. 90) even in a situation where the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1".

Returning to the explanation of the game management process (FIG. 100), if the advantageous regulation flag in the master RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5101: YES), the value of the regulated game number counter in the master RAM 344 is decremented by 1 (step S5115). Then, if the value of the regulated game number counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S5116: YES), the advantageous regulation flag in the master RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5117). This releases the state in which the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted. Incidentally, the value of the regulated game number counter is not notified, and no notification is made to indicate that the state in which the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted has been released. This makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing when the release of the restriction will occur.

Next, the management process executed by the main MPU 342 to manage the game history and notify the management results will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 102. Note that the management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

First, the value of the total game number counter 344a of the master RAM 344 is grasped (step S5201), and the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the master RAM 344 is grasped (step S5202). Then, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the master RAM 344 to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated (step S5203). In other words, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of advantageous game number counter 344b" / "value of total game number counter 344a". Then, the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are displayed and controlled without going through another control device so that the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is displayed with the hundreds digit on the first notification display device 346, the tens digit on the second notification display device 347, and the ones digit on the third notification display device 348 (step S5204). The above calculation result is notified as a percentage. Specifically, if the result of the above calculation multiplied by 100 is "35", then the first alert display device 346 displays "0", the second alert display device 347 displays "3", and the third alert display device 348 displays "5". Also, for example, if the result of the above calculation multiplied by 100 is "100", then the first alert display device 346 displays "1", the second alert display device 347 displays "0", and the third alert display device 348 displays "0".

By executing the management process as described above, the results of the game history management are constantly displayed on the first to third notification display devices 346-348, and the manager of the game hall can grasp the results of the game history management by opening the front door 312 and visually checking the first to third notification display devices 346-348. In addition, the timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) is executed at intervals shorter than the shortest period required to complete one game, and furthermore, is executed at intervals shorter than the shortest period required from the end of one game to the start of the next game. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp the results of the game history management up to the most recently completed game by visually checking the first to third notification display devices 346-348.

Next, the lighting process for controlling the emission of the lighting devices 349a and 349b, which are provided for the purpose of irradiating the main control device 340 with light when the front door 312 is in the open state, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 103. The lighting process is executed in step S4514 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

If light is not being emitted from the lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: NO), it is determined whether the front door 312 is in an open state based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e (step S5302). If the front door 312 is in an open state (step S5302: YES), it is determined whether the opening angle of the front door 312 is within a predetermined angle range (step S5303). Specifically, it is determined whether the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e. This predetermined opening angle is set as an angle of 86% of the maximum opening angle of the front door 312. Specifically, since the maximum opening angle of the front door 312 is when the front door 312 is opened 90° relative to the housing 311, the state in which the front door 312 is opened approximately 77° relative to the housing 311 is set as the predetermined opening angle. If the determination in step S5303 is positive, that is, if the front door 312 is not closed and the opening angle of the front door 312 is 77° or less, a drive signal is output to the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b (step S5304). This causes light to be irradiated from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b to the irradiation range IR including the main control device 340. This light irradiation state continues until the processing of step S5306 described later is executed.

If light is being emitted from the lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: YES), it is determined whether the front door 312 is closed or the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e (step S5305). If a positive determination is made in step S5305, the output of the drive signal to the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is stopped (step S5306). This causes the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b to enter a non-illuminating state, and the emission of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b toward the irradiation range IR is stopped.

Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 312 and the control state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b will be described with reference to the time charts of Figures 104(a) and 104(b). Figure 104(a) shows the state of the front door 312, and Figure 104(b) shows the control state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b. In the following description, Figures 105(a) and 105(b) will be referred to as appropriate. Figure 105(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b when the front door 312 is in an open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle, and Figure 105(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b when the opening angle of the front door 312 is the maximum opening angle exceeding the predetermined opening angle.

First, we will explain the case where the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped when the opening angle of the front door 312 is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the front door 312 is closed, the opening operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing of t1. In this case, the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b start emitting light at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 104(b). After that, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped at the timing of t2 before the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle. In this state, the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b emit light toward the main control device 340 as shown in FIG. 105(a). As a result, even when the front door 312 is slightly open, the main control device 340 is brightly illuminated, so that the manager of the game hall can visually check the display contents of the board box 345 of the main control device 340 and the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. In this case, the front door 312 does not need to be fully opened during the checking operation, which makes the checking operation easier.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104(a), the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at timing t3, and the front door 312 is closed at timing t4. In this case, the emission of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b is stopped at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 104(b).

Next, we will explain the case where the front door 312 is opened until the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the front door 312 is in a closed state, the opening operation of the front door 312 is started at timing t5. In this case, at timing t5, the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b start emitting light as shown in FIG. 104(b). Then, at timing t6, the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle as shown in FIG. 104(a). As a result, at timing t6, the emission of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b is stopped as shown in FIG. 104(b).

After that, at the timing of t7, when the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped. In this state, as shown in FIG. 105(b), the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b do not emit light toward the main control device 340. When the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, such as when the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle, the inside of the cabinet 311 is illuminated by the light from the in-store lighting of the game hall or sunlight. In this case, if the main control device 340 is illuminated by the lighting devices 349a, 349b, there is a concern that the visibility of the main control device 340 and the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be reduced. On the other hand, when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring by stopping the emission of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b.

Then, as shown in FIG. 104(a), the closing operation of the front door 312 starts at timing t8, and the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes equal to or smaller than a predetermined opening angle at timing t9. In this case, the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b start emitting light at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 104(b). Then, as shown in FIG. 104(a), the front door 312 enters a closed state at timing t10. In this case, the emission of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b is stopped at timing t10 as shown in FIG. 104(b).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The total number of games played regardless of the game state is measured by the total game number counter 344a of the main RAM 344, and the number of games played in the ART state or in the AT state after the ART state has started is cumulatively measured by the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main RAM 344. The ratio of the advantageous game number to the total number of games is then calculated, and if the calculated ratio is a regulated ratio, restrictions are placed on the progress of the game. This makes it possible to place restrictions on the progress of the game depending on the occurrence mode of the ART state, and makes it possible to deal with cases in which the occurrence mode of the ART state does not match the mode assumed during the design stage of the slot machine 310.

When restrictions are imposed on the progress of play based on the calculation result of the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, restrictions are imposed on the progress of play so that the ratio does not fall within the regulated ratio. This makes it possible to ensure that even if the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes a regulated ratio, the ratio falls within the range of ratios envisaged during the design stage of the slot machine 310.

If the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is a regulated ratio, the ART state is terminated even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is not "0". This makes it possible to forcibly terminate the ART state when the above ratio becomes a regulated ratio, and makes it possible to restrict the execution mode of the game state when the occurrence mode of the ART state does not match the mode assumed during the design stage of the slot machine 310.

When the total number of games measured by the total game number counter 344a reaches or exceeds the management trigger game number, which is a number of games that is greater than the number of games that can be initially set for the continuation of the ART state when the ART state is newly started, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and if the calculated ratio is the regulated ratio, the ART state is forcibly terminated. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the ART state is forcibly terminated.

In the ART state, the number of remaining games to be played in that ART state is not announced. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly ended because the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games reaches a regulated ratio.

When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games reaches a regulated ratio, the transition to the ART state is regulated. This makes it possible to forcibly prevent the transition to the ART state depending on the occurrence mode of the ART state, and makes it possible to restrict the execution mode of the game state when the occurrence mode of the ART state does not match the mode assumed during the design stage of the slot machine 310.

The period during which transition to the ART state is restricted varies depending on the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the restriction on transition to the ART state from being set too low or too high regardless of the ratio.

In a situation where the ratio of advantageous games to the total number of games is a regulated ratio and transition to the ART state is prevented, if a special role is won in the role selection process (Figure 90), the process to determine whether or not to transition to the ART state is not executed, but a stock bonus is awarded as an alternative bonus. This makes it possible to prevent a player from thinking that a special role was wasted when it is won in the role selection process (Figure 90) in a situation where transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented.

The more stock bonuses that are awarded, the more advantageous it is for the player. This makes it possible to maintain the player's anticipation of winning a special role in the role selection process (Figure 90) even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented.

When a stock bonus is granted, a corresponding notification is issued. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing their motivation to continue playing even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented.

When a stock bonus is granted, a transition to the ART state is more likely to occur after the state in which the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked is lifted. This makes it possible to associate the granting of a stock bonus with the transition to the ART state. Therefore, even if a special role is won in the role selection process (Figure 90) in a situation in which the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked, it is possible to make the player expect a transition to the ART state.

By providing the lighting devices 349a and 349b for illuminating the main control device 340, it becomes easier to check the main control device 340 with the front door 312 open. In this case, when the front door 312 is closed, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illuminated state. This makes it possible to prevent the lighting devices 349a and 349b from being in an unnecessarily illuminated state when the main control device 340 is not being checked. In addition, when the front door 312 is opened, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are automatically illuminated. This makes it easier to check the main control device 340, since there is no need to perform a separate operation to turn the lighting devices 349a and 349b on.

The lighting devices 349a and 349b are provided in the housing 311 in which the main control device 340 is provided. This makes it easier to illuminate the main control device 340 by the lighting devices 349a and 349b in response to the opening operation of the front door 312.

Regardless of which open position the front door 312 is in, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are not in an illuminated state, but are selectively illuminated in some open positions. This allows the lighting devices 349a and 349b to be illuminated only in favorable conditions for checking the main control device 340, and to be in a non-illuminated state in conditions where checking the main control device 340 would be made more difficult if the lighting devices 349a and 349b were in an illuminated state.

When the front door 312 is in the maximum open position, the lighting devices 349a, 349b are in a non-illuminating state. This prevents the lighting devices 349a, 349b from being in a non-illuminating state in a situation where the main control device 340 is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting in the game hall, making it difficult to check the main control device 340 due to the illumination from the lighting devices 349a, 349b.

<Another example of the seventeenth embodiment>
The total number of games played regardless of which game state it is in and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the ART state, are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, but this is not limited to this, and the number of wins of the predetermined role to be selected in the role selection process (FIG. 90) and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined role may be calculated. In this case, the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role exist as the target predetermined roles, and the number of wins for each of the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role may be stored as history information and the winning probability for each of the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role may be calculated. In addition, the number of wins for each of all roles may be stored as history information and the winning probability for each role may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the role to be managed.

The total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games may also be stored as history information, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games. The combination of the total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games may also be stored as history information separately for each of the BB state, ART state, and normal gaming state, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may also be calculated separately for each of the BB state, ART state, and normal gaming state.

Also, the number of transitions to the BB state and the total number of games played in a game state other than the BB state may be stored as historical information, and the probability of transitioning to the BB state may be calculated.Also, the number of transitions to the ART state and the total number of games played in a game state other than the ART state may be stored as historical information, and the probability of transitioning to the ART state may be calculated.Also, the total number of transitions to the BB state and the ART state and the total number of games played in a game state other than the BB state and the ART state may be stored as historical information, and the probability of transitioning to the BB state and the ART state may be calculated.

- The display of each judgment result on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be configured to start when the display period for the check result is entered and to end when the display period for the check result is ended. In addition, when a sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312 detects that the front door 312 has been opened relative to the housing 311, the display of each previous judgment result on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be started, and when a sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312 detects that the front door 312 has been closed relative to the housing 311, the display of each judgment result on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be ended. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348.

- Although the number of remaining games to be played in the ART state is not notified, the number of remaining games to be played may be notified. In this case, if the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the reason for the forced termination may be notified on the image display device 334. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming confused by the fact that the ART state has been forcibly terminated even though the number of remaining games to be played in the ART state is not "0".

In addition, if the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state is greater than the number of games at which the ART state will be forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the number of games remaining until the ART state is forcibly terminated may be announced as the remaining number of games to be continued in the ART state. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated.

Also, the number of games remaining until the ART state ends may not be notified until the number of games remaining to continue in the ART state, or the number of games at which the ART state will be forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, reaches 10 games, and the number of games remaining until the ART state ends may be notified when either of these numbers reaches 10 games. In this case, it is possible to make the player aware that there are 10 games or less remaining in the ART state, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated.

- If the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state reaches or exceeds the number of games at which the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the configuration may be such that the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state will not be increased even if an opportunity arises to increase the number of games to be continued.

- If the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the degree of advantage of the next ART state may be configured to change in relation to the number of continuing games remaining in the ART state at the time the forced termination occurred. For example, the greater the number of remaining continuing games in the ART state at the time the forced termination occurred, the greater or more likely the initial number of continuing games will be in the next ART state, or the more likely it is that the number of continuing games will be increased in the next ART state. This makes it possible to provide compensation according to the remaining number of continuing games in response to the forced termination of the ART state when the number of remaining continuing games in the ART state is large.

- The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which it is performed by the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, and may be performed, for example, by using the credit display unit 335 and the awarded number display unit 336. This makes it possible to use both the credit display unit 335 and the awarded number display unit 336 as display units for notifying the calculation result. In this configuration, when there are multiple types of events to be notified, similar to the thirteenth embodiment, the events to be notified may be displayed in sequence by switching between each type. When the events are displayed in sequence in this manner, for example, the type of event to be notified may be displayed in the credit display unit 335, and the calculation result for the event to be notified or information corresponding to the content of the calculation result may be displayed in the awarded number display unit 336. This makes it possible to notify the multiple types of events to be notified using a small number of display units even when there are multiple types of events to be notified.

- A configuration may be provided with a counter that measures the gaming history up to the management trigger game number (specifically, 3000 games), and a counter that measures the gaming history beyond the management trigger game number. In this case, the former counter is used to perform a calculation using the gaming history up to the management trigger game number, and control corresponding to the calculation result is performed. When the calculation is performed, the former counter is cleared to "0". On the other hand, the latter counter is configured to cumulatively store the gaming history without being cleared to "0" even if the above calculation is performed, and to perform a calculation using the cumulative gaming history. This makes it possible to manage the gaming history beyond the management trigger game number while enabling control corresponding to the calculation result to be executed each time the management trigger game number is reached.

- The targets of forced termination in relation to the results of game history management are not limited to advantageous game states such as the ART state, but may also be unfavorable game states.

- A configuration may be provided in which an operation unit is provided to forcibly switch the lighting devices 349a, 349b to a non-illuminating state even when the front door 312 is in an open state. In this case, when illumination by the lighting devices 349a, 349b is not required, the lighting devices 349a, 349b can be switched to a non-illuminating state. The operation unit may be provided in a position where it can be operated even when the front door 312 is closed, or in a position where it cannot be operated when the front door 312 is closed and can be operated when the front door 312 is open.

- The lighting devices 349a and 349b may be configured to be constantly illuminated when the front door 312 is open, and constantly non-illuminated when the front door 312 is closed.

-Even if the front door 312 goes from a closed state to an open state, the lighting devices 349a, 349b may be maintained in a non-illuminating state until a predetermined opening angle is reached, and then the lighting devices 349a, 349b may be configured to be in an illuminating state when the opening angle is equal to or greater than the predetermined angle. In addition to this configuration, the lighting devices 349a, 349b may be configured to be in a non-illuminating state when the front door 312 is in the maximum open position as in the above embodiment.

- The intensity of light irradiated from the lighting devices 349a and 349b may be changed according to the opening angle of the front door 312. For example, when the front door 312 is closed, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illuminating state or in an illuminating state with a relatively low intensity, when the front door 312 is open and the opening angle of the front door 312 is equal to or smaller than a predetermined opening angle, the lighting state is in a relatively high intensity, and when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, the lighting state is in a relatively low intensity.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration for managing the game history in the slot machine 310 is different from that of the seventeenth embodiment. The configuration that differs from the seventeenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the seventeenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 106(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main RAM 344.

The master RAM 344 is provided with a total game number counter 344a and an advantageous game number counter 344b, as in the seventeenth embodiment. The total game number counter 344a is a counter for measuring the number of games played regardless of whether the game state is a normal game state, a BB state, an AT state, or an ART state, as in the seventeenth embodiment. The total game number counter 344a measures a maximum of 3000 games, so the total game number counter 344a has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games. Specifically, the total game number counter 344a has a data capacity of 2 bytes. Even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, the total game number counter 344a retains the information on the measured number of games unless the clear process of the master RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned ON thereafter.

As in the seventeenth embodiment, the advantageous game number counter 344b is a counter for measuring the number of games played from when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0". The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. In other words, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used to measure the total number of games that have occurred in multiple ART states. Since the advantageous game number counter 344b measures a maximum number of 3000 games, the advantageous game number counter 344b has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games. Specifically, the advantageous game number counter 344b has a data capacity of 2 bytes. Note that even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, the advantageous game number counter 344b retains the information on the number of games being measured unless the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned ON thereafter.

The master RAM 344 is provided with a total game number counter 361. The total game number counter 361, like the total game number counter 344a, is a counter for measuring the number of games played regardless of whether the game state is a normal game state, a BB state, an AT state, or an ART state. However, the total game number counter 361 maintains the measurement for a number of games exceeding 3000 games, and even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the information on the number of games being measured is retained unless the master RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on thereafter. The total game number counter 361 has a data capacity that allows the number of games to be measured over multiple business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total game number counter 361 has a data capacity of 2 bytes. With a data capacity of 2 bytes, for example, if the maximum number of games that can be played on one business day is 8000 games, the total game number counter 361 can continuously measure the number of games for more than five years.

The main RAM 344 is provided with a total accumulation buffer 362. FIG. 106(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the various counters 362a to 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. The total accumulation buffer 362 includes a total payout counter 362a, a total favorable counter 362b, and a total bonus counter 362c.

The total payout counter 362a is a counter for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to a player regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. Even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total payout counter 362a retains information on the total number of gaming media being measured as long as the main RAM 344 is not cleared when the power is turned on. The total payout counter 362a has a data capacity that allows the total number of gaming media to be measured over multiple business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total payout counter 362a has a data capacity of 3 bytes. With a data capacity of 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total payout number of gaming media in one business day is set to "120,000", the total payout counter 362a can measure the total number of gaming media paid out over four months or more.

The total favorable counter 362b is a counter for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to a player from when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0". The value of the total favorable counter 362b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. In other words, the total favorable counter 362b is used to measure the total number of gaming media paid out in multiple ART states. Even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, the total favorable counter 362b retains information on the total number of gaming media being measured as long as the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is not executed when the power is turned ON thereafter. The total favorable counter 362b has a data capacity that allows the measurement of the total number of gaming media over multiple business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total favorable counter 362b has a data capacity of 3 bytes. With a data capacity of 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of gaming media paid out in one business day is 120,000, it will be possible to measure the total number of gaming media paid out over a period of four months or more using the total advantageous counter 362b.

The total bonus counter 362c is a counter for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to a player in the BB state. The value of the total bonus counter 362c is maintained without being cleared to "0" even when the BB state ends. In other words, the total bonus counter 362c is used to measure the total number of gaming media paid out in multiple BB states. Even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total bonus counter 362c holds the information of the total number of gaming media paid out that is being measured, unless the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned on thereafter. The total bonus counter 362c has a data capacity that allows the total number of gaming media to be measured over multiple business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total bonus counter 362c has a data capacity of 3 bytes. With a data capacity of 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of gaming media paid out in one business day is set to "120,000", the total bonus counter 362c can measure the total number of gaming media paid out over four months or more.

The main RAM 344 is provided with a first accumulation buffer 363 and a second accumulation buffer 364. FIG. 106(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the various counters 363a to 363c provided in the first accumulation buffer 363, and FIG. 106(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the various counters 364a to 364c provided in the second accumulation buffer 364. As shown in FIG. 106(c), the first accumulation buffer 363 is provided with a first total payout counter 363a, a first advantageous counter 363b, and a first bonus counter 363c. Also, as shown in FIG. 106(d), the second accumulation buffer 364 is provided with a second total payout counter 364a, a second advantageous counter 364b, and a second bonus counter 364c.

The first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a, like the total total payout counter 362a, are counters for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to the player regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. The first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a measure the total number of gaming media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, so that the data capacity is capable of measuring the total number of gaming media. Specifically, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. Note that even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a retain information on the total number of gaming media paid out that are being measured, unless the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned ON thereafter.

The first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b are counters for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player from when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0", similar to the total advantageous counter 362b. The value of the first advantageous counter 363b and the value of the second advantageous counter 364b are maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. In other words, the first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b are used to measure the total number of game media paid out in multiple ART states. The first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, so that the data capacity is capable of measuring the total number of the game media. Specifically, the first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. In addition, even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, the first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b retain the information of the total number of gaming media paid out that they are measuring, unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is subsequently turned ON.

The first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c are counters for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to a player in the BB state, similar to the total bonus counter 362c. The value of the first bonus counter 363c and the value of the second bonus counter 364c are maintained without being cleared to "0" even when the BB state ends. In other words, the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c are used to measure the total number of gaming media paid out in multiple BB states. The first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c measure the total number of gaming media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, so that the data capacity is capable of measuring the total number of gaming media. Specifically, the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. In addition, even if the slot machine 310 is powered off, the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c retain the information on the total number of gaming media paid out that they are measuring, unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on.

106(a), the main RAM 344 is provided with a calculation area 365 for the total cumulative total, a calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total, and a calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total. The calculation area 365 for the total cumulative total stores information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state to the total number of payouts of gaming media using the total total payout counter 362a and the total favorable counter 362b provided in the total cumulative total buffer 362, and stores information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the BB state to the total number of payouts of gaming media using the total total payout counter 362a and the total bonus counter 362c provided in the total cumulative total buffer 362. The calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total stores information on the results of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state to the total number of game media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games, using the first total payout counter 363a and the first advantageous counter 363b provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363, and also stores information on the results of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games, using the first total payout counter 363a and the first bonus counter 363c provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363. The second cumulative calculation area 367 uses the second total payout counter 364a and the second favorable counter 364b provided in the second cumulative buffer 364 to store information on the results of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state to the total number of game media paid out over a continuous period of 6000 games, and also uses the second total payout counter 364a and the second bonus counter 364c provided in the second cumulative buffer 364 to store information on the results of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out over a continuous period of 6000 games.

As described above, the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 are provided, so that it is possible to calculate the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state to the total number of game media paid out in a continuous period of 6000 games, and the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out in a continuous period of 6000 games. In this case, the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 are used so that the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted from each other. Specifically, if the total number of games to be managed by each accumulation buffer 363, 364 is A (specifically, 6000 games) and the number of accumulation buffers 363, 364 is B (specifically, 2), the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted from each other by the number of games A/B (specifically, 3000 games). Furthermore, when a period to be managed in first accumulation buffer 363 ends, the next period to be managed in first accumulation buffer 363 occurs from the next game, and when a period to be managed in second accumulation buffer 364 ends, the next period to be managed in second accumulation buffer 364 occurs from the next game. Therefore, the period to be managed by first accumulation buffer 363 and the period to be managed by second accumulation buffer 364 occur repeatedly with the start and end of these periods shifted by a certain number of games.

Figure 107 is a time chart showing how the game history is managed in this embodiment. Figure 107(a) shows the timing when 3000 games have passed, Figure 107(b) shows the timing when the game is executed, Figure 107(c) shows the timing when the total cumulative buffer 362 is updated, Figure 107(d) shows the timing when the first cumulative buffer 363 is updated, Figure 107(e) shows the timing when the first cumulative buffer 363 is initialized, Figure 107(f) shows the timing when the second cumulative buffer 364 is updated, Figure 107(g) shows the timing when the second cumulative buffer 364 is initialized, and Figure 107(h) shows the timing when the display target is switched from one of the management results calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 and the management results calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364 to the other on the notification display devices 346-348.

At the timing of t1, the power of the slot machine 310 is turned on and the supply of operating power to the master MPU 342 is started. In this case, the clearing process of the master RAM 344 is executed, so that the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(e), and the various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(g). If the clearing process of the master RAM 344 is not executed even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the master MPU 342 is started, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are not cleared to "0" at the timing when the supply of operating power to the master MPU 342 is started, and the values at the time when the slot machine 310 was last powered off are maintained as they are.

After that, one game is executed at each of the timings t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6, as shown in FIG. 107(b). Then, 3000 games have passed at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 107(a). If it is assumed that a payout of gaming media occurs in each of these games, an update process of the total cumulative buffer 362 is executed at each of the timings t2 to t6, as shown in FIG. 107(c), and an update process of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(d). Note that in games in which no payout of gaming media occurs, the update processes of the total cumulative buffer 362 and the first cumulative buffer 363 are not executed. An update process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is not executed at each of the timings t2 to t6, as shown in FIG. 107(f). Since the period managed by the first accumulation buffer 363 and the period managed by the second accumulation buffer 364 both begin and end at a difference of 3000 games, when the initialization process for these accumulation buffers 363 and 364 is performed, the update process for the second accumulation buffer 364 will be put on hold until 3000 games have elapsed since the initialization process was performed.

After that, one game is executed at each of the times t7, t8, t9, and t10 as shown in FIG. 107(b). Assuming that a payout of gaming media occurs in each of these games, an update process of the total cumulative buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c), an update process of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(d), and an update process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(f). Note that in games in which no payout of gaming media occurs, the update processes of the total cumulative buffer 362, the first cumulative buffer 363, and the second cumulative buffer 364 are not executed.

As shown in FIG. 107(a), the timing of t10 is the timing when 3000 games have passed since the timing of t6. In other words, it is the timing when 6000 games have passed since the first cumulative buffer 363 became the target of update, which is the period of time that the first cumulative buffer 363 is the target of management. Therefore, the management results for 6000 games are calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363. This calculated management result is stored in the first cumulative calculation area 366. Then, after the management result is stored in the first cumulative calculation area 366, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first cumulative buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(e).

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(h), the timing for switching the display target is reached. When the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed, the display contents corresponding to the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 become initial display contents that do not correspond to any management results. Then, the initial display contents continue during the period in which the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 are the display targets until the first management result is calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363. By storing the information on the management result calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363 at the timing of t10 in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total, the display contents of the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 become display contents corresponding to the information on the management result stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. This display content is maintained as the display content of the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363, 364 on the notification display devices 346-348 until the information on the management results calculated using the second cumulative total buffer 364 is stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367.

After that, one game is played at each of the times t11, t12, t13, and t14, as shown in FIG. 107(b). Assuming that a payout of gaming media occurs in each of these games, an update process of the total cumulative buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c), an update process of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(d), and an update process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(f). Note that in games in which no payout of gaming media occurs, the update processes of the total cumulative buffer 362, the first cumulative buffer 363, and the second cumulative buffer 364 are not executed.

As shown in FIG. 107(a), the timing of t14 is the timing when 3000 games have passed since the timing of t10. In other words, it is the timing when 6000 games have passed since the second cumulative buffer 364 became the target of update, which is the period of time that the second cumulative buffer 364 is the target of management. Therefore, the management results for 6000 games are calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364. This calculated management result is stored in the second cumulative calculation area 367. Then, after the management result is stored in the second cumulative calculation area 367, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second cumulative buffer 364 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(g).

The timing for switching the display target is as shown in FIG. 107(h). At timing t14, the information on the management results calculated using the second cumulative total buffer 364 is stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367, and the display contents of the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 are switched from the display contents corresponding to the information on the management results stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366 to the display contents corresponding to the information on the management results stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367. This display content is maintained as the display contents of the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the information on the management results calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363 is newly stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366.

After that, one game is executed at each of the times t15, t16, t17, and t18, as shown in FIG. 107(b). Assuming that a payout of gaming media occurs in each of these games, an update process of the total cumulative buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c), an update process of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(d), and an update process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(f). Note that in games in which no payout of gaming media occurs, the update processes of the total cumulative buffer 362, the first cumulative buffer 363, and the second cumulative buffer 364 are not executed.

As shown in FIG. 107(a), the timing of t18 is the timing when 3000 games have passed since the timing of t14. In other words, it is the timing when 6000 games have passed since the start of a new period to be managed using the first cumulative total buffer 363. Therefore, the management results for 6000 games are calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363. This calculated management result is stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366. Then, after the management result is stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first cumulative total buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(e).

The timing for switching the display target is as shown in FIG. 107(h). At timing t18, the information on the management result calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363 is stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366, and the display contents of the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 are switched from the display contents corresponding to the information on the management result stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367 to the display contents corresponding to the information on the management result stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366. This display content is maintained as the display contents of the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the information on the management result calculated using the second cumulative total buffer 364 is newly stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration that enables management of game history as described above. Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the game management processing executed by the main MPU 342. Note that the game management processing is executed in step S4811 in the response processing at the end of a game (Figure 97).

First, the processing for advantageous period regulation is executed (step S5401). In the processing for advantageous period regulation, the same processing as each of steps S5101 to S5117 of the game management processing (FIG. 100) in the above 17th embodiment is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the game media has been awarded in the current game (step S5402). If the game media has been awarded (step S5402: YES), a value corresponding to the number of game media awarded this time is added to the total total payout counter 362a of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5403), and a value corresponding to the number of game media awarded this time is added to the first total payout counter 363a of the first accumulation buffer 363 (step S5404). Additionally, on the condition that the period is not the second cumulative waiting period, which is the period before 3,000 games have elapsed since the clearing process of the main RAM 344 was executed (step S5405: NO), a value corresponding to the number of game media currently awarded is added to the second total payout counter 364a of the second cumulative buffer 364 (step S5406).

If a positive judgment is made in step S5405, or if the processing of step S5406 is executed, the ART state is judged by judging whether the value of the ART game number counter of the master RAM 344 is 1 or more (step S5407). If a positive judgment is made in step S5407, a value corresponding to the number of game media currently granted is added to the total favorable counter 362b of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5408), and a value corresponding to the number of game media currently granted is added to the first favorable counter 363b of the first accumulation buffer 363 (step S5409). In addition, on the condition that it is not the second accumulation waiting period, which is the period before 3000 games have elapsed since the clear processing of the master RAM 344 was executed (step S5410: NO), a value corresponding to the number of game media currently granted is added to the second favorable counter 364b of the second accumulation buffer 364 (step S5411).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5407, it is judged whether the current gaming state is a BB state (step S5412). If a positive judgment is made in step S5412, a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the total bonus counter 362c of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5413), and a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the first bonus counter 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 (step S5414). In addition, on the condition that it is not the second accumulation waiting period, which is the period before 3000 games have elapsed since the clearing process of the main RAM 344 was executed (step S5415: NO), a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the second bonus counter 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 (step S5416).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5402, if a positive judgment is made in step S5410, if the processing of step S5411 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S5412, if a positive judgment is made in step S5415, or if the processing of step S5416 is executed, a calculation process for the total cumulative total is executed (step S5417). In this calculation process, the total total payout counter 362a and the total favorable counter 362b provided in the total cumulative total buffer 362 are used to calculate the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the ART state to the total payout number of gaming media, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 365 for the total cumulative total. In addition, in this calculation process, the total total payout counter 362a and the total bonus counter 362c provided in the total cumulative total buffer 362 are used to calculate the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the BB state to the total payout number of gaming media, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 365 for the total cumulative total. When the display target of the notification display devices 346-348 is the total cumulative buffer 362 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state is reached, the former calculation result is reported, and when the display target of the notification display devices 346-348 is the total cumulative buffer 362 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is reported.

Then, in step S5418, the target switching process is executed. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the target switching process. First, the value of the total game number counter 361 in the master RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S5501). The total game number counter 361 is used by the master MPU 342 to identify a period to be managed using the first cumulative total buffer 363 and a period to be managed using the second cumulative total buffer 364. Then, in step S5502, it is determined whether the value of the total game number counter 361 after incrementing by 1 is 3000×2n (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1). If the value of the total game number counter 361 is 3000×2n, this means that a period to be managed using the first cumulative total buffer 363 has ended. For example, when 6000 games have passed, when 12000 games have passed, or when 18000 games have passed since the clear process of the master RAM 344 was executed, the period to be managed using the first cumulative total buffer 363 has ended.

If the result of the determination in step S5502 is affirmative, a calculation process for the first cumulative total is executed (step S5503). In the calculation process, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state to the total number of game media paid out in a period of 6000 consecutive games is calculated using the first total payout counter 363a and the first favorable counter 363b provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. In the calculation process, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out in a period of 6000 consecutive games is calculated using the first total payout counter 363a and the first bonus counter 363c provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. When the display target of the notification display devices 346-348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state is reached, the former calculation result is reported, and when the display target of the notification display devices 346-348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is reported.

Then, the first cumulative display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5504), and the second cumulative display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5505). The first cumulative display flag and the second cumulative display flag are flags for the main MPU 342 to specify which of the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364 is to be displayed when the display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the management result calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364. When the first cumulative display flag is set to "1" and the value of the second cumulative display flag is "0", the management result calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 is displayed, and when the value of the first cumulative display flag is "0" and the value of the second cumulative display flag is set to "1", the management result calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364 is displayed. In addition, when the values of both the first cumulative total display flag and the second cumulative total display flag are "0", the initial display content that does not correspond to either the first cumulative total buffer 363 or the second cumulative total buffer 364 is displayed.

Then, a process of clearing the first accumulation buffer 363 is executed (step S5506). This clears the various counters 363a to 363c in the first accumulation buffer 363 to "0."

If a negative judgment is made in step S5502, it is judged whether the value of the total game number counter 361 after adding 1 is 3000 x (2n + 1) (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) (step S5507). If the value of the total game number counter 361 is 3000 x (2n + 1), this means that a period to be managed using the second accumulation buffer 364 has ended. For example, when 9000 games have passed since the clearing process of the main RAM 344 was executed, when 15000 games have passed, or when 21000 games have passed, the period to be managed using the second accumulation buffer 364 has ended.

If the result of the positive judgment is given in step S5507, a calculation process for the second cumulative total is executed (step S5508). In the calculation process, the second total payout counter 364a and the second favorable counter 364b provided in the second cumulative total buffer 364 are used to calculate the ratio of the total number of payouts of the gaming media in the ART state to the total number of payouts of the gaming media in a continuous period of 6000 games, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total. In addition, in the calculation process, the second total payout counter 364a and the second bonus counter 364c provided in the second cumulative total buffer 364 are used to calculate the ratio of the total number of payouts of the gaming media in the BB state to the total number of payouts of the gaming media in a continuous period of 6000 games, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total. When the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is the second cumulative buffer 364 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state is reached, the former calculation result is reported, and when the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is the second cumulative buffer 364 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is reported.

Then, the first cumulative display flag in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5509), and the second cumulative display flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5510). In addition, a clear process is executed for the second cumulative buffer 364 (step S5511). As a result, the various counters 364a to 364c in the second cumulative buffer 364 are cleared to "0".

Next, the management process executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 110. Note that the management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

First, it is determined whether it is time to update the display contents of the notification display devices 346 to 348 (step S5601). The display targets of the notification display devices 346 to 348 include the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state in the total accumulation buffer 362, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state in the total accumulation buffer 362, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state in the first accumulation buffer 363, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state in the first accumulation buffer 363, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state in the second accumulation buffer 364, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state in the second accumulation buffer 364, and the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. In the notification display devices 346-348, the display contents of one display object are displayed for a predetermined notification period (specifically, 5 seconds), and then the display contents are changed to the next display object and the display contents of the changed display object are displayed for the above-mentioned predetermined notification period. In the notification display devices 346-348, first, each ratio for the total accumulation buffer 362 becomes the display object, then each ratio for the first accumulation buffer 363 or the second accumulation buffer 364 that is closest to the timing of the end of the period to be managed becomes the display object, and then the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a becomes the display object. Then, this flow of switching the display object is repeated. Note that the content set at the previous update timing continues to be displayed on the notification display devices 346-348 until it is time to update the display contents.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5601, an update process of the display target counter is executed (step S5602). The display target counter is provided in the main RAM 344, and if the value of the display target counter is "0", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state, if the value of the display target counter is "1", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state, if the value of the display target counter is "2", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state, if the value of the display target counter is "3", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state, if the value of the display target counter is "4", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state, if the value of the display target counter is "5", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state, if the value of the display target counter is "6", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state, if the value of the display target counter is "7", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state If the display target counter value is "3", the display target of the notification display devices 346-348 is the first accumulation buffer 363 or the second accumulation buffer 364, which is the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state, and if the display target counter value is "4", the display target of the notification display devices 346-348 is the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. Also, if the value of the display target counter after adding 1 is "5", the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0".

Then, by determining whether the value of the display target counter is "0" or "1", it is determined whether the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is a ratio of the total cumulative buffer 362 (step S5603). If a positive determination is made in step S5603, a setting process for displaying the type of total cumulative is executed (step S5604). In this setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "0", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display target counter is "1", "1" is displayed on the first notification display device 346. In other words, in this embodiment, information corresponding to the type of display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is displayed on the first notification display device 346. Then, a setting process for displaying the result of the total cumulative is executed (step S5605). In this setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "0", the information corresponding to the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state, which is stored in the total cumulative buffer 362 in the total cumulative calculation area 365, is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Also, if the value of the display target counter is "1", the information corresponding to the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the BB state, which is stored in the total cumulative calculation area 365, is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. In these cases, the ratio is displayed as a percentage, and the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 348. In this configuration, it is not possible to distinguish between 100% and less than 1%, so different displays may be made for 100% and less than 1%.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5603, it is judged whether the value of the counter to be displayed is "2" or "3", thereby judging whether the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is the ratio for the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364 (step S5606). If a positive judgment is made in step S5606, a setting process for the type display for a partial period is executed (step S5607). In this setting process, if the value of the counter to be displayed is "2", "2" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the counter to be displayed is "3", "3" is displayed on the first notification display device 346.

After that, if the first cumulative total display flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5608: YES), a setting process for displaying the result of the first cumulative total is executed (step S5609). In this setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", the information corresponding to the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state, which is the first cumulative total buffer 363 stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total, is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Also, if the value of the display target counter is "3", the information corresponding to the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state, which is the first cumulative total buffer 363 stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total, is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

If the first cumulative total display flag of the main RAM 344 is not set to "1" and the second cumulative total display flag is set to "1" (step S5610: YES), a setting process for displaying the result of the second cumulative total is executed (step S5611). In this setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", the second cumulative total buffer 364 stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total, which corresponds to the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state, is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Also, if the value of the display target counter is "3", the second cumulative total buffer 364 stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total, which corresponds to the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state, is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

If neither the first cumulative display flag nor the second cumulative display flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5610: NO), the initial display setting process is executed (step S5612). In this setting process, the display contents of the second and third notification display devices 347 and 348 are set to the initial display contents regardless of the value of the display target counter. Specifically, the letter "L", which is not displayed when displaying the ratio of other situations, is displayed on both the second and third notification display devices 347 and 348. However, even in this case, the first notification display device 346 displays the contents corresponding to the value of the display target counter. This allows the manager of the game hall to know which display target the initial display contents correspond to when they are displayed on the second and third notification display devices 347 and 348.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5606, this means that the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. In this case, a setting process for displaying the type of advantageous period ratio is first executed (step S5613). In this setting process, the first notification display device 346 is caused to display "4" corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed. In addition, a setting process for displaying the result of the advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5614). In this setting process, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated, and information corresponding to the calculation result is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

Equipped with a first cumulative buffer 363 and a second cumulative buffer 364, the first cumulative buffer 363 is used to manage a continuous period of 6000 games, and the second cumulative buffer 364 is used to manage a continuous period of 6000 games, and further, the period managed using the first cumulative buffer 363 (hereinafter also referred to as the first period) and the period managed using the second cumulative buffer 364 (hereinafter also referred to as the second period) partially overlap. This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to the management results in the first period in the middle of one second period, and to derive various ratios corresponding to the management results in the second period in the middle of one first period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various ratios while ensuring the first period and the second period as the periods in which management is performed. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various ratios while ensuring that the first and second periods are managed without excessively increasing the storage capacity of each of the first and second accumulation buffers 363 and 364.

The first and second periods both end when 6,000 games have elapsed, so the end conditions for the periods are the same. This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration in which management is performed using each of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364.

When a first period ends, a new first period starts following the first period, and when a second period ends, a new second period starts following the second period, and the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to the first period and the second period while maintaining a constant deviation.

When a first period ends, the first cumulative buffer 363 is cleared to "0," and when a second period ends, the second cumulative buffer 364 is cleared to "0." This allows the first cumulative buffer 363 to have a sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second cumulative buffer 364 to have a sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the second period. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while keeping the capacity of the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 low.

When the first period has elapsed, notification of the various ratios corresponding to the first period begins, and when the second period has elapsed, notification of the various ratios corresponding to the second period begins. This allows various ratios to be notified as the first period and second period elapse, making it possible to notify various ratios in a situation that is relatively close to the current situation.

<Another example of the eighteenth embodiment>
The number of accumulation buffers 363, 364 used to calculate various ratios in a period of 6000 games is not limited to two, the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364, but may be three, four, five or more. With three accumulation buffers, both the start and end of the period managed by each accumulation buffer will be shifted by 2000 games, with four accumulation buffers, both the start and end of the period managed by each accumulation buffer will be shifted by 1500 games, and with five accumulation buffers, both the start and end of the period managed by each accumulation buffer will be shifted by 1000 games.

- The period to be managed by the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not limited to 6,000 games, and may be a number of games less than 6,000, such as 4,000 games, or a number of games more than 6,000, such as 8,000 games. Also, it is not limited to a number of games that is divisible by the number of accumulation buffers 363, 364, such as 6,000 games, and may be a number of games that is not divisible by the number of accumulation buffers 363, 364, such as 6001 games. If the number of games is not divisible, then if the total number of games managed by each accumulation buffer 363, 364 is A (specifically, 6001 games) and the number of accumulation buffers 363, 364 is B (specifically, 2), then both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of games that is the quotient of A/B (specifically, 3000 games), or both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of games that is the quotient of A/B plus 1 (specifically, 3001 games).

-Instead of the cumulative total buffers 363, 364, ring buffers such as the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 in the 19th embodiment described below may be used. The results of each game are stored as history information in the ring buffer corresponding to the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the ring buffer corresponding to the second cumulative total buffer 364, and the stored history information is used to calculate various ratios as in the 18th embodiment. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various ratios while allowing the first and second periods, which are periods spanning 6,000 games, to partially overlap each other.

- The objects managed by the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 are not limited to the above-mentioned various ratios, and may be, for example, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games (in the 18th embodiment, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a) managed by these accumulation buffers 363, 364.

Nineteenth embodiment
A configuration that can notify the management results of each management period at a cycle shorter than the management periods while overlapping each other by using the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 as in the 18th embodiment may be applied to the third embodiment. Fig. 111 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the third embodiment will basically be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 111, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a calculation result memory 131, similar to the third embodiment. These functions are the same as those of the third embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372. The first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 have the same configuration. Although the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 have different overall data capacities, their basic configuration is a ring buffer similar to the history memory 117 in the third embodiment. Figure 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

Each history memory 371, 372 is provided with a history area 371a, 372a for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 371a, 372a, multiple pointer information is set with consecutive numbers, and history information storage areas 371b, 372b are set in one-to-one correspondence with each pointer information. The history information storage areas 371b, 372b can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 371b, 372b has a data capacity of 2 bytes, with 1 byte of data capacity allocated as an area for storing RTC information and 1 byte of data capacity allocated as an area for storing correspondence information. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j in this pachinko machine 10), the date information and time information currently measured by the RTC 115 are first stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage areas 371b, 372b corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storages 371b, 372b corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

The history information storage areas 371b, 372b are provided in a number sufficient to store all the history information when 30,000 game balls are launched. For example, if history information is generated a maximum of 40,000 times under normal use before 30,000 game balls are launched, then more than 40,000 history information storage areas 371b, 372b are provided. This makes it possible to store and hold history information up to the time at least 30,000 game balls are launched in each history memory 371, 372.

The history memories 371 and 372 are provided with pointer areas 371c and 372c in addition to the history areas 371a and 372a. The pointer areas 371c and 372c store information for the management CPU 112 to identify the pointer information currently being written in the history memories 371 and 372. Specifically, at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10, information is set in the pointer areas 371c and 372c specifying the pointer information of "0" as the writing target. Then, each time a piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b, the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the last pointer information is written and history information is stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b corresponding to the last pointer information, the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the pointer information of "0" is the writing target. As a result, if a trigger occurs to store history information when the number of pieces of history information that can be stored is exceeded, the oldest history information will be overwritten with new history information in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b, starting with the oldest history information.

In addition, when various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 using the history memories 371, 372 and the calculation results are stored in the calculation result memory 131, the history information storage areas 371b, 372b for the history memories 371, 372 that were referenced during the calculation are all cleared to "0", and the information in the pointer areas 371c, 372c is updated so that pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been read from becoming the target for reading again.

The provision of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 makes it possible to calculate various parameters using history information for the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. In this case, the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are used such that the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted from each other, as in the case of the cumulative buffers 363 and 364 in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment. Specifically, when the number of game balls discharged to be managed by each history memory 371 and 372 is A (specifically, 30,000 balls) and the number of history memories 371 and 372 is B (specifically, 2 balls), both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number of game balls discharged that is A/B (specifically, 15,000 balls). Furthermore, when a period to be managed in the first history memory 371 ends, the next period to be managed in the first history memory 371 occurs from the release of the next game ball, and when a period to be managed in the second history memory 372 ends, the next period to be managed in the second history memory 372 occurs from the release of the next game ball. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first history memory 371 and the period to be managed by the second history memory 372 occur repeatedly with both the start and end of those periods shifted by a certain number of balls released.

Next, a process configuration for enabling management of game history using the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 in the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S5701). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in which information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information of the identified number is set in the check target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S5701 the check target counter is set to "10".

Then, it is determined whether the contents of the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are contents that trigger the writing of history information (step S5702). Specifically, if the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has changed from "0" to "1", it is determined that a write trigger has occurred. Also, if the current value of the counter to be checked is between "8" and "10", it is determined that a write trigger has occurred if the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked has changed from "1" to "0".

If the result of step S5702 is positive, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S5703). Then, a write process to the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5704). In the write process, the pointer information of the history area 371a currently being written is identified by referring to the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371, and the RTC information read in step S5703 is written to the history information storage area 371b of the history area 371a corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be confirmed, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, if the correspondence information is any of the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, the information indicating the high frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, not only the correspondence information but also the start information or end information is written to the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information being written.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S5705). In this update, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the increment of one has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 371a. If the maximum value has not been exceeded, the pointer information after the increment of one is overwritten in the pointer area 371c as the new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value has been exceeded, the pointer area 371c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the initial pointer information.

After that, it is determined whether the second cumulative waiting period is in progress by determining whether the number of game balls discharged from the play area PA has reached 15,000 since the clearing process of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 was executed (step S5706). In this embodiment, when the clearing process of the main RAM 65 is executed, a clear signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, and when the management IC 66 receives a clear signal from the main CPU 63, it executes the clearing process of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372. By executing the clearing process, the history areas 371a, 372a of each history memory 371, 372 are all cleared to "0", and the pointer areas 371c, 372c of each history memory 371, 372 are cleared to "0". Then, when an opportunity to write history information occurs thereafter, only the first history memory 371 is updated until the number of discharged pieces reaches 15,000 pieces, and after the number of discharged pieces reaches 15,000 pieces, both the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are updated each time an opportunity to write history information occurs.

If the determination in step S5706 is negative, a write process to the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5707). In this write process, the pointer information of the history area 372a currently being written is identified by referring to the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372, and the RTC information read in step S5703 is written to the history information storage area 372b of the history area 372a corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be confirmed, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, if the correspondence information is any of information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and information indicating the front door frame 14, not only the correspondence information but also the start information or end information is written to the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information being written.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S5708). In this update, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after incrementing by one has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 372a. If the maximum value has not been exceeded, the pointer information after incrementing by one is overwritten in the pointer area 372c as the new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value has been exceeded, the pointer area 372c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the initial pointer information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5702, if a positive judgment is made in step S5706, or if the processing of step S5708 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S5709). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S5710). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S5710: NO), the processing from step S5702 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value. If the value of the confirmation target counter is "0" (step S5710: YES), target switching processing is executed (step S5711).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the target switching process.

First, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA (step S5801). If a game ball has been discharged (step S5801: YES), an addition process is performed on the total discharge counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S5802). In this addition process, the value of the number of game balls discharged this time from the game area PA is added to the total discharge counter. Then, in step S5803, it is determined whether or not the value of the total discharge counter is 15000 x 2n (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1). If the value of the total discharge counter is 15000 x 2n, this means that a period of time to be managed using the first history memory 371 has ended. For example, if 30,000 game balls have been discharged since the clear process of the first history memory 371 was executed, if 60,000 game balls have been discharged, or if 90,000 game balls have been discharged, the period of time to be managed using the first history memory 371 has ended.

If the determination in step S5803 is affirmative, a calculation process using the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5804). In this calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the first history memory 371. The contents of the calculation of the various parameters are the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Then, the various parameters resulting from the calculation are written to the calculation result memory 131. In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to identify the timing to which the calculation result information written this time corresponds.

Then, a process of clearing the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5805). As a result, the history area 371a of the first history memory 371 is cleared to all "0"s, and the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step S5803, it is judged whether the value of the total number of dispensed balls counter is 15000 x (2n + 1) (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) (step S5806). If the value of the total number of dispensed balls counter is 15000 x (2n + 1), this means that a period of time that is subject to management using the second history memory 372 has ended. For example, if 45,000 game balls have been dispensed since the clearing process of the second history memory 372 was executed, if 75,000 game balls have been dispensed, or if 105,000 game balls have been dispensed, the period of time that is subject to management using the second history memory 372 has ended.

If the determination in step S5806 is affirmative, a calculation process using the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5807). In this calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the second history memory 372. The contents of the calculation of the various parameters are the same as those in steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Then, the various parameters resulting from the calculation are written to the calculation result memory 131. In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to identify the timing to which the calculation result information written this time corresponds.

Then, a process of clearing the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5808). As a result, the history area 372a of the second history memory 372 is cleared to all "0"s, and the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0".

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The device includes a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372, and the first history memory 371 is used to manage the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, and the second history memory 372 is used to manage the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. Furthermore, the period managed using the first history memory 371 (hereinafter also referred to as the first period) and the period managed using the second history memory 372 (hereinafter also referred to as the second period) partially overlap. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to the management results in the first period during one second period, and to derive various parameters corresponding to the management results in the second period during one first period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various parameters while ensuring the first period and the second period as periods during which management is performed. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various parameters while ensuring that the first and second periods are managed without excessively increasing the storage capacity of each of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

The first and second periods both end when 30,000 game balls have been discharged from the game area PA, and therefore the end conditions for the periods are the same. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration in which management is performed using both the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

When a first period ends, a new first period starts following the first period, and when a second period ends, a new second period starts following the second period, and the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to the first period and the second period while maintaining a constant deviation.

When a first period ends, the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0," and when a second period ends, the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0." This allows the first history memory 371 to have a sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second history memory 372 to have a sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the second period. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while keeping the capacity of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 low.

<Alternative to the 19th embodiment>
The number of history memories 371, 372 used to calculate various parameters during the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is not limited to two, the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, and may be three, four, five or more. With three history memories, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each history memory will be shifted by 10,000 balls, with four history memories, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each history memory will be shifted by 7,500 balls, and with five history memories, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each history memory will be shifted by 6,000 balls.

The period that is the subject of management by the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is not limited to the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, and may be a number less than 30,000, such as 20,000, or a number greater than 30,000, such as 40,000. In addition, it is not limited to a number that is divisible by the number of history memories 371, 372, such as 30,000, and may be a number that is not divisible by the number of history memories 371, 372, such as 30001. If the number is not divisible, then if the number of discharged items managed by each history memory 371, 372 is A (specifically, 30,001 items) and the number of history memories 371, 372 is B (specifically, 2 items), then both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of items that is the quotient of A/B (specifically, 15,000 items), or both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of items obtained by adding 1 to the quotient of A/B (specifically, 15,001 items).

-Instead of the history memories 371, 372, counters such as the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 in the 18th embodiment may be used. The number of balls entering each entry section is stored in the counter corresponding to the first history memory 371 and the counter corresponding to the second history memory 372, respectively, and the stored number of balls entering is used to calculate various parameters as in the 19th embodiment. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various parameters while allowing the first period and the second period, which are the periods until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, to overlap each other partially.

- The configuration is not limited to using multiple history memories such as the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, and may be configured to use, for example, one history area capable of storing history information over a long period as in the third embodiment above, extract history information corresponding to a first period from the history information stored in the history area to calculate various parameters, and extract history information corresponding to a second period that partially overlaps with the first period to calculate various parameters. In this case, by making the history area large enough to store history information for the period until 45,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, it is possible to extract history information corresponding to each of the first and second periods.

- When writing history information to history memories 371, 372, the configuration is not limited to updating the pointer information in pointer areas 371c, 372c after writing history information in an area corresponding to the pointer information indicated in pointer areas 371c, 372c, and the area to which new history information is written may always be fixed, and the information stored in each area may be shifted sequentially when writing new history information. For example, when first to fifth areas exist, the area to which new history information is written is always the first area, and when an opportunity arises to write new history information, the new history information may be written to the first area after shifting each piece of information, such as the fourth area to the fifth area, the third area to the fourth area, the second area to the third area, and the first area to the second area.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The following configurations of the other embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the first embodiment and the like, all of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 are configured to store history information (or ball entry history), but this is not limited to this, and only some of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 may be configured to store history information. For example, only the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, and second operating opening 34 may be configured to store history information, or only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry state of game balls during a specified period for the ball entry section for which history information is stored.

(2) In the first embodiment and the like, the signal paths 118a-118c are set to transmit information corresponding to the ball's entry result in correspondence with the first entry port detection sensor 42a, the second entry port detection sensor 43a, and the third entry port detection sensor 44a, respectively. However, this is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of entry port may be transmitted as one type of information even in a configuration in which there are multiple ball entry ports of the same type and multiple ball entry detection sensors corresponding to them. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(3) In the first embodiment and the like, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but this is not limited thereto, and the correspondence information may be pre-stored in the management IC 66. In this case, it is not necessary to execute a process to cause the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, and therefore it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

(4) In the first embodiment and the like, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be capable of two-way communication, and the correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting the transmission of the correspondence information is received from the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is configured to be used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is stored and held in the correspondence memory 116 even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) In the first embodiment and the like, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the detection result information of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. However, this is not limited to this, and a dedicated signal path may be provided for transmitting the correspondence information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This allows the management IC 66 to determine what type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 based on the type of buffer 122a to 122o that receives the information.

(6) In the first embodiment and the like, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may directly execute notification control of the notification means as in the eleventh embodiment so that notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters received are made, or the main CPU 63 may transmit commands corresponding to the contents of the various parameters received to the audio and light-emitting control device 81, thereby making it possible to use the display light-emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the pattern display device 41 to make notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters.

(7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 may calculate various parameters based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the contents of the calculated various parameters may be notified using the display light-emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the pattern display unit 41, etc. In this case, when the game hall opens for business, it is possible to check whether the ball entry pattern in the game area PA on the previous business day was normal or not.

(8) If the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to allow play to begin until a prohibition release operation is performed. Examples of configurations that prevent play from beginning include prohibiting the release of game balls, disabling each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, and not executing a win/loss determination process even if a win occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The prohibition release operation may also be an operation of turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 again with the RAM erase switch turned ON, or an operation of an operation means that becomes operable when the game machine main body 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11. This makes it possible to prevent play from continuing in a situation where the game ball entry mode in the game area PA is abnormal.

(9) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using that history information may not be performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the calculation of various parameters using the read history information may be performed by the operator performing the reading operation, or the calculation of various parameters using the read history information may be performed by the reading device. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the function of executing the storage process of the history information and the function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments may be provided by the main CPU 63, the payout CPU 92, or the sound and light emission control device 81. If the payout CPU 92 or the sound and light emission control device 81 has these functions, the information on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a will be sent from the main CPU 63 to a control entity that has those functions.

(11) The management IC 66 may be provided with a power supply separate from the main CPU 63, and may be configured to be able to calculate various parameters using history information in the management IC 66 and output information on the history information or various parameters even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This makes it possible to read the history information and various parameters using a reading device even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

(12) Although the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is configured to double as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters with a reading device, this is not limited thereto, and the terminal used to read history information or various parameters with a reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used to read history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position on the main control board 61 separate from the MPU 62.

(13) In the above embodiments, the correspondence memory 116, history memory 117, and calculation result memory 131 are not limited to being provided as non-volatile storage means such as flash memory. For example, any of these memories 116, 117, and 131 may be provided as volatile storage means that require a supply of power to store and retain information, and backup power may be supplied to the memory so that information can be stored and retained even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, or backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply and launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65.

(14) The configuration is not limited to one in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and the history information may not be stored and held, and various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new game ball is detected by any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. In this case, although the frequency of calculation of various parameters increases, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at any time.

(15) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU and performs storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113, and a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. Also, for example, in the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the counter value corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is incremented by one. In addition, when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using the history information at that time. In addition, when a trigger for external output to the read terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit outputs the various parameters that are the calculation results to the outside, and also outputs the history information to the outside.

(16) In addition to or instead of storing the information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a as history information, the occurrence of a transition to the opening and closing execution mode may be stored as history information, the timing of the transition to the opening and closing execution mode and the timing of the end may be stored as history information, the occurrence of a transition to the high-frequency support mode may be stored as history information, or the occurrence of a specified abnormality may be stored as history information. Furthermore, the above-mentioned history information may be used to calculate the probability of transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the probability of transition to the high-frequency support mode, or the frequency of occurrence of a specified abnormality. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be configured as separate chips, as separate boards, or as separate control devices.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the outlet 24a is counted, while history information including RTC information may be stored for game balls entering bonus opportunity entry sections, which trigger the payout of prize balls and the win/lose determination process, such as the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. This makes it possible to extract the history of game balls entering bonus opportunity entry sections, while calculating the frequency of game balls entering each bonus opportunity entry section relative to the total number of game balls dispensed.

(19) The configuration may include items other than those in each of the above embodiments that are recorded as history information. For example, the configuration may be such that at least one of the following is stored as history information: the lower tray 56a being full, the timing at which the full state began, and the timing at which the full state was released; the configuration may be such that at least one of the following is stored as history information: the tank 75 being in a ball-free state, the timing at which the ball-free state began, and the timing at which the ball-free state was released; and the configuration may be such that at least one of the following is stored as history information: the dispensing device 76 being in an abnormal state, the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 began, and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(20) In the first embodiment and the like, the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal, which is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, this is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 may recognize that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal by sending a type identification command from the main CPU 63. In this case, it is not necessary to preset in the management IC 66 the correspondence between each buffer 122a to 122p and the type of signal input to those buffers 122a to 122p.

(21) The number of game balls that enter a specific ball entry section while the front door frame 14 is open may be stored as history information, and the number of balls that is determined using the history information may be output to a reading device. This makes it possible to determine the number of game balls that enter a specific ball entry section while the front door frame 14 is open, and to determine whether or not there is any cheating. In addition, the number of game balls that enter a specific ball entry section while the front door frame 14 is open may be calculated when a specified calculation trigger occurs, and an abnormality notification may be issued if the calculated number of balls is abnormal. This makes it possible to deal with cheating that involves opening the front door frame 14 illegally and allowing game balls to enter a specific ball entry section.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when the management IC 66 is operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the first embodiment and the like, the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reversed from that in the first embodiment and the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process to change the output state of each signal will match the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for each buffer 122a to 122o.

(24) When using the reading terminal 102 to output information stored in the main ROM 64 to the outside, the configuration may be such that one of the programs and data can be selectively output to the outside, or such that only a specific program can be output to the outside. In this case, it is possible to selectively read the information to be analyzed by the reading device. Note that a possible configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside is such that the main CPU 63 selects information to be output to the outside from the selection information received from the reading device via the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside.

(25) The other information to be outputted externally through the read terminal 102 for outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 externally is not limited to history information and various parameters. For example, when an abnormality occurs, history information of the abnormality occurrence may be stored, and the stored history information may be outputted externally through the read terminal 102.

(26) Detection sensors 42a-48a are provided for each of the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is determined by adding up the numbers of game balls detected by the detection sensors 42a-48a. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, a passage area may be provided through which all game balls discharged from the game area PA pass one by one, and a discharge detection sensor may be provided to detect game balls passing through the passage area. In this case, the detection results of the discharge detection sensor can be used to determine the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. Also, in this configuration, as in each of the above embodiments, by providing detection sensors 42a-47a for detecting the number of game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry section to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(27) Instead of a configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio/light emitting control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60, the display control device 82 may be configured to control the audio/light emitting control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. Also, instead of a configuration in which the audio/light emitting control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, both control devices may be provided as a single control device, the functions of one of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the audio/light emitting control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the audio/light emitting control device 81 to the display control device 82 may be arbitrary.

(28) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, for example, the results of the lottery process for the roles executed when starting a game by operating the start lever may be stored as history information, and the actual probability of winning each role may be calculated using that history information. When a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, this may be stored as history information, and the actual probability of transitioning to the special gaming state may be calculated using that history information. Alternatively, the ratio of the number of games played in the special gaming state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, and notifications corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters may be given by the gaming machine itself.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configurations of the first embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the twelfth embodiment may be combined, or the characteristic configurations of the second embodiment, the fourth embodiment, and the eighth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configurations of the sixteenth embodiment and the seventeenth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configurations of the eighteenth embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configurations of the first to seventeenth embodiments may be applied to a configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to seventeenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, and the configurations of the other forms may be applied in any combination.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, the effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A predetermined ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
A specific storage execution means (a function of executing ball entry detection processing in the main CPU 63) for storing corresponding information in a specific storage means (main RAM 65) when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) for executing a process for awarding a bonus to a player based on information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means being stored in the specific storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means (a history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a main RAM 65 in the tenth embodiment), and predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the number of gaming balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means to be identified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment).

According to feature A1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a special benefit is given to the player. This allows the player to play while hoping that the game ball will enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and the predetermined information that allows the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine is stored in the specific storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, characterized in that the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of a process for granting a bonus to a player.

According to feature A2, the specified information does not trigger the execution of a process for granting a bonus to a player, making it possible to store and retain the specified information in an information format aimed at appropriately managing the manner in which game balls enter the specified entry means.

Feature A3. The game machine is provided with specific ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
The gaming machine described in feature A1 or A2, wherein the predetermined memory execution means executes storage of corresponding information in the predetermined memory means when a gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means, and stores specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the number of gaming balls that have entered the specific ball entry means to be identified by a control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine in the predetermined memory means.

According to feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the ball entry patterns of game balls into the predetermined ball entry means but also the ball entry patterns of game balls into the specific ball entry means. In addition, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of ball entry frequencies between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Feature A4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A3, characterized in that all ball entry means for discharging game balls that have entered the game area, including the predetermined ball entry means, are ball entry means that are the subject of storing information corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering the game area in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature A4, all ball entry means that eject game balls from the game area are subject to management using information stored in a specified storage means, making it possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any ball entry means using information stored in the specified storage means. Also, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls that enter a specified ball entry means to the number of game balls that are ejected from the game area using information stored in the specified storage means.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A4, characterized in that the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature A5, the specified information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the specified ball entry means, and by using the specified information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of game balls into the specified ball entry means.

Feature A6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A5, characterized in that the predetermined information is count information of the number of gaming balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature A6, the specified information is counting information on the number of game balls that have entered the specified ball entry means, making it possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter the specified ball entry means while minimizing the information volume of the specified information.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A6, characterized in that the predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information in the predetermined storage means that enables identification of whether or not a gaming ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined circumstance (a function for executing the processes of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment).

Feature A7 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and manage the manner in which a game ball enters a specific entry means.

Feature A8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A7, characterized in that it is equipped with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature A8, it is possible to read information stored in a specified storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to analyze the manner in which gaming balls enter a specified ball entry means.

Feature A9. Equipped with a program output means (function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102);
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output means utilizes the information output unit to output the information stored in the specified storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature A9, it is possible to output information stored in a specified storage means to the outside by utilizing an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output information stored in a specified storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A9, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step S902 in the main CPU 63) for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and for outputting information corresponding to the identification result.

According to feature A10, in a configuration in which information stored in a specified storage means is output to the outside using an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output to the outside is the control program or the information stored in the specified storage means, and outputs the identified information to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature A11. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A11, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific memory execution means has a predetermined memory execution means, which makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing an extreme increase in the processing load of the first control means.

Feature A12. The gaming machine described in Feature A11, characterized in that the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means.

Feature A13. The game machine is provided with specific ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
The predetermined storage execution means executes storage of information corresponding to a game ball entering the specific entry means in the predetermined storage means when the game ball enters the specific entry means, thereby storing specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the number of game balls entering the specific entry means or the frequency of the game balls entering the specific entry means to be specified by a control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine in the predetermined storage means;
The first control means is
A first transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
A second transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the ball entry patterns of game balls into the predetermined ball entry means but also the ball entry patterns of game balls into the specific ball entry means. In addition, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of ball entry frequencies between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

In addition, when a gaming ball enters the specified ball entry means, first information is sent to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means, second information is sent to the second control means using the second signal path. This allows the type of information to be transmitted to correspond to the signal path, making it possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing between each type of information in the second control means.

Feature A14. The gaming machine described in Feature A13, characterized in that the first control means includes a third transmission means (a function of outputting one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function of outputting one of the open/close execution mode signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment) that transmits identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists to the second control means via a third path.

According to feature A14, it is possible to distinguish whether a predetermined situation exists and to manage the entry patterns of game balls into the predetermined entry means and the entry patterns of game balls into the specific entry means. In addition, because the identification information that enables identification of whether a predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing the identification information from other information such as the first information and the second information in the second control means.

Feature A15. The gaming machine described in Feature A13 or A14, characterized in that the first control means includes an identification information transmission means (a function for executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information to the second control means indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature A15, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined goal entry means and that the second information corresponds to a specific goal entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, there is no need to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine described in Feature A15, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature A16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the first control means transmits identification information to the second control means, so that in a situation where a game ball may enter a predetermined ball entry means and a specific ball entry means, it becomes possible for the second control means to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature A17. The gaming machine described in Feature A15 or A16, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature A17, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, making it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature A18. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A15 to A17, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, is provided with a means (function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing correspondence information in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the goal entry means is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify the goal entry means that corresponds to the information to be transmitted to the second control means each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means is provided with a third transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function of outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment) that transmits third information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists to the second control means via a third path,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A15 to A18, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation is present even without receiving the identification information.

According to feature A19, it is possible to distinguish whether or not a predetermined situation exists and manage the manner in which game balls enter the predetermined entry means and the manner in which game balls enter the specific entry means. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A13 to A19, characterized in that the second control means is provided with a number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) capable of receiving information from the first control means, the number of receiving units being greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means.

According to feature A20, the second control means is provided with a greater number of receiving units than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that even if the number of types of information increases or decreases depending on the model of the gaming machine, it is possible to accommodate this without changing the configuration related to the receiving units. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. A first external output means (a function for executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) for outputting a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that enables the user to recognize that the predetermined ball entry means corresponds to the first external output means to a device outside the gaming machine;
A second external output means (a function for executing an external output process in the control CPU 112) outputs a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that enables recognition of the specific ball entry means to be associated with the specific ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A21, it is possible to read information stored in a specified storage means from the gaming machine, and to use the read information to identify the manner in which a gaming ball enters a specified entry means and the manner in which a gaming ball enters a specific entry means. In addition, when the external output is performed, information that is a combination of the specified information and information that allows recognition that the information corresponds to the specified entry means is output to the outside, and information that is a combination of the specific information and information that allows recognition that the information corresponds to the specific entry means is output to the outside. This makes it possible to identify each entry mode using the information read from the specified storage means.

Feature A22. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, characterized in that it is equipped with an information calculation means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112 in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1408, S1413, and S1417 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2005 in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment) that uses the predetermined information to calculate state information corresponding to the state of balls entering the gaming area during a predetermined period.

According to feature A22, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior by itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that can specify whether or not the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined situation (a function for executing the processes of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment),
The gaming machine described in feature A22 is characterized in that the information calculation means is equipped with a means for calculating the state information by extracting or excluding the specified information corresponding to the entry of a gaming ball into the specified ball entry means in the specified situation (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1602 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1802 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2005 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63).

Feature A23 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and calculate state information corresponding to the ball's entry state.

Feature A24. A gaming machine according to Feature A22 or A23, characterized in that it is provided with a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the process of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step S1605 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the specified information stored in the specified storage means is erased, which makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of an event in which the specified information exceeds the storage capacity of the specified storage means.

Feature A25. A gaming machine according to feature A22 or A23, characterized in that even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature A25, even if the mode information is calculated, the specified information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in a specified storage means, so that when the mode information is read out and the game ball's entry mode is analyzed, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that was the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A26. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A22 to A25, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started.

According to feature A26, the status information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, making it possible to manage the status information on a business day basis.

Feature A27. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A22 to A26, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific memory execution means.

According to feature A27, since the behavior information is calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly when operating power is supplied to the control means, it becomes possible to manage the behavior information in detail within a business day.

Feature A28: The information calculation means calculates the state information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A22 to A27, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when a game is not being played, and when a game is started when the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to feature A28, since the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of calculation of the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, when a game is not being played, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is stopped, and when a game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is resumed from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude situations where a game is not being played from the calculation of the mode information, and to appropriately derive the mode information when a game is being played.

Feature A29. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A22 to A28, characterized in that it is provided with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature A29, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state in which the gaming ball entered the game.

Feature A30. The gaming machine described in Feature A29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature A30, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read out and the game ball's entry mode is analyzed, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A31. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature A29 or A30, characterized in that the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature A31, in a configuration in which a second control means having an external output means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to output mode information to a device external to the gaming machine based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature A32: The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A22 to A31, characterized in that it is equipped with a result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management CPU 112, and in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management CPU 112) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131).

Feature A32 allows the gaming machine to accumulate status information. This makes it possible to read out multiple status information at once when managing the ball entry status.

Feature A33. The result storage and execution means includes:
A means for determining whether the aspect information is information to be stored (a function for executing the process of step S1603 in the management side CPU 112);
a means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is the storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112);
The gaming machine described in feature A32, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A33, when the behavior information of the calculated result corresponds to the information to be stored, the behavior information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavior information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. The gaming machine according to Feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in association with the mode information in the calculation result storage means.

According to feature A34, information that allows the time when the behavior information was calculated is attached to the behavior information. This makes it possible to analyze each behavior information while knowing the time when each behavior information was calculated.

Feature A35. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features A22 to A34, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature A35, in a configuration in which a second control means having an information calculation means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to have the second control means calculate the mode information based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature A36. A gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A35, characterized in that it is provided with a notification control means (function for executing the processing of steps S2605, S2607, and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature A36, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the content corresponding to the mode information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or the like to understand the management results of the game ball's entry mode without having to read the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. The control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine described in feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature A37 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature A38. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means is provided with the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature A38, in a configuration in which a second control means having a predetermined storage means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it is possible to consolidate in the first control means the function of calculating the status information and the function of executing a notification corresponding to the calculation result.

Feature A39. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A36 to A38, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the state information is information in a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the state information is information in a second range.

According to feature A39, the behavior information is not reported as is, but rather the content corresponding to the range in which the behavior information is included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and reduces the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature A40. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A39, characterized in that it is provided with a means for externally outputting corresponding information when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means (a function for executing the processing of step S218 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature A40, in a configuration in which corresponding information is output to the outside when a gaming ball enters a specified entry means, the specified information is stored in a specified storage means. This makes it possible to easily grasp the number and frequency of gaming balls entering the specified entry means by using the corresponding information, while accurately grasping the number and frequency of gaming balls entering the specified entry means by using the specified information stored in the specified storage means.

Feature A41. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A40, characterized in that the predetermined memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature A41 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features A1 to A41. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game;
an information calculation means for calculating status information corresponding to game results during a predetermined period using the predetermined information (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the control CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the control CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1602 in the control CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1802 in the control CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2005 in the control CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2603 in the master CPU 63);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature B1, when a specified event occurs, the corresponding information is stored in a specified storage means, and the specified information is stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a specified event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence mode of a specified event. Furthermore, by storing and holding the specified information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the specified information.

In addition, the gaming machine uses the specified information stored in the specified storage means to calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specified period. This makes it possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game results during a specified period, for example, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

Feature B2: The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that enables identification of whether the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation or not in the predetermined storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment),
The gaming machine described in Feature B1 is characterized in that the information calculation means is provided with a means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the specified information corresponding to the occurrence of the specified event in the specified situation (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the control CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the control CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1602 in the control CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1802 in the control CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2005 in the control CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63).

Feature B2 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specific period of time.

Feature B3. A gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that it is provided with a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the process of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step S1605 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature B3, when the mode information is calculated, the specified information stored in the specified storage means is erased, which makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of an event in which the specified information exceeds the storage capacity of the specified storage means.

Feature B4. A gaming machine according to Feature B1 or B2, characterized in that even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature B4, even if the mode information is calculated, the specified information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in a specified storage means, so that when reading out the mode information and analyzing the results of playing during a specified period, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that was the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature B5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B4, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature B5, the behavior information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, making it possible to manage the behavior information on a business day basis.

Feature B6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B5, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means (MPU 62).

According to feature B6, since the behavior information is calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly when operating power is supplied to the control means, it becomes possible to manage the behavior information in detail within a business day.

Feature B7: The information calculation means calculates the status information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when a game is not being played, and when a game is started when the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to feature B7, since the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of calculation of the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, when a game is not being played, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is stopped, and when a game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is resumed from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude situations where a game is not being played from the calculation of the mode information, and to appropriately derive the mode information when a game is being played.

Feature B8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B7, characterized in that it is equipped with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature B8, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state in which the gaming ball entered the game.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature B9, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read out and the mode of the game ball's entry is analyzed, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature B10. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature B8 or B9, wherein the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature B10, in a configuration in which a second control means having an external output means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to output mode information to a device external to the gaming machine based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature B11: The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that it is equipped with a result storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131).

Feature B11 allows the gaming machine to accumulate behavior information. This makes it possible to read out multiple behavior information at once when managing the behavior of game results over a specified period of time.

Feature B12. The gaming machine described in Feature B11, characterized in that the result storage execution means includes a means for storing the status information in the calculation result storage means when the status information is information to be stored (a function for executing the processing of step S1604 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature B12, when the behavioral information of the calculated result corresponds to the information to be stored, the behavioral information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavioral information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. The gaming machine described in Feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in the calculation result storage means in association with the mode information.

According to feature B13, information that allows the time when the behavior information was calculated is attached to the behavior information. This makes it possible to analyze each behavior information while knowing the time when each behavior information was calculated.

Feature B14: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B13, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature B14, in a configuration in which a second control means having an information calculation means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to have the second control means calculate the mode information based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature B15. A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, characterized in that it is provided with a notification control means (function for executing the processing of steps S2605, S2607, and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature B15, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the content corresponding to the mode information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or other person in charge to understand the results of gaming management for a specified period of time without having to read the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature B16: The control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature B16 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature B17: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature B15 or B16, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature B17, in a configuration in which a second control means having a predetermined storage means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it is possible to consolidate in the first control means the function of calculating the status information and the function of executing a notification corresponding to the calculation result.

Feature B18. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B15 to B17, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the state information is information in a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the state information is information in a second range.

According to feature B18, the behavior information is not reported as is, but rather the content corresponding to the range in which the behavior information is included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and reduces the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. A predetermined ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning hole 31, special winning device 32, first operating hole 33, second operating hole 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
a predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured in a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
an information calculation means for calculating state information corresponding to the ball-entry state of the game ball in the game area during a predetermined period by using the predetermined information (a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the control CPU 112 in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1408, S1413, and S1417 in the control CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S1602 in the control CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S1802 in the control CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2005 in the control CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature B19, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, a storage process for the corresponding information is executed on the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior by itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

Feature B20. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B19, characterized in that the predetermined memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature B20 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features B1 to B20. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game;
an information calculation means for calculating, each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, by using the predetermined information, aspect information corresponding to a game result during a predetermined period (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the control CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the control CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1602 in the control CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1802 in the control CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2005 in the control CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63);
a result storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) for sequentially storing the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (a calculation result memory 131);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature C1, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine uses the specified information stored in the specified storage means to calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specified period. This makes it possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game results during a specified period, for example, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

In addition, it is possible to accumulate behavior information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out multiple behavior information at once when managing the behavior of game results over a specified period of time.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, characterized in that the result storage execution means includes a means for storing the status information in the calculation result storage means when the status information is information to be stored (a function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature C2, when the behavior information of the calculated result corresponds to the information to be stored, the behavior information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavior information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized in that the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in association with the mode information in the calculation result storage means.

According to feature C3, information that allows the time when the behavior information was calculated is attached to the behavior information. This makes it possible to analyze each behavior information while knowing the time when each behavior information was calculated.

Feature C4: The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that enables identification of whether the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the information calculation means is provided with a means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the specified information corresponding to the occurrence of the specified event in the specified situation (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the control CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the control CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1602 in the control CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1802 in the control CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2005 in the control CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63).

Feature C4 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and to calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specific period of time.

Feature C5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C4, characterized in that it is provided with a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the process of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step S1605 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature C5, when the mode information is calculated, the specified information stored in the specified storage means is erased, which makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of an event in which the specified information exceeds the storage capacity of the specified storage means.

Feature C6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C5, characterized in that even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature C6, even if the mode information is calculated, the specified information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in a specified storage means, so that when reading out the mode information and analyzing the results of playing during a specified period, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that was the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C6, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature C7, the behavior information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, making it possible to manage the behavior information on a business day basis.

Feature C8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C7, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means (MPU 62).

According to feature C8, since the behavior information is calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly when operating power is supplied to the control means, it becomes possible to manage the behavior information in detail within a business day.

Feature C9: The information calculation means calculates the state information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when a game is not being played, and when a game is started when the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to feature C9, since the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of calculation of the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, when a game is not being played, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is stopped, and when a game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period of time is resumed from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude situations where a game is not being played from the calculation of the mode information, and to appropriately derive the mode information when a game is being played.

Feature C10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C9, characterized in that it is equipped with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature C10, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state in which the gaming ball entered the game.

Feature C11. The gaming machine described in Feature C10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature C11, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read out and the game ball's entry mode is analyzed, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature C12. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature C10 or C11, characterized in that the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature C12, in a configuration in which a second control means having an external output means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to output mode information to a device external to the gaming machine based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature C13. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C12, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

According to feature C13, in a configuration in which a second control means having an information calculation means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it becomes possible to have the second control means calculate the mode information based on an instruction from the first control means.

Feature C14. A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, characterized in that it is provided with a notification control means (function for executing the processing of steps S2605, S2607, and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature C14, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the content corresponding to the mode information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or other person in charge to understand the results of gaming management for a specified period of time without having to read the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature C15: The control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine described in feature C14, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature C15 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature C16. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific memory execution means;
A second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature C14 or C15, wherein the first control means is provided with the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature C16, in a configuration in which a second control means having a predetermined storage means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, it is possible to consolidate in the first control means the function of calculating the state information and the function of executing a notification corresponding to the calculation result.

Feature C17. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C14 to C16, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the state information is information in a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the state information is information in a second range.

According to feature C17, the behavior information is not reported as is, but rather the content corresponding to the range in which the behavior information is included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and reduces the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature C18. A predetermined ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning hole 31, special winning device 32, first operating hole 33, second operating hole 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
a predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured in a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
an information calculation means for calculating state information corresponding to the ball-entry state of the game ball in the game area during a predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs (a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the control CPU 112 in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the control CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S1602 in the control CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S1802 in the control CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S2005 in the control CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment);
a result storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) for sequentially storing the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (a calculation result memory 131);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature C18, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, a storage process for the corresponding information is executed on the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior by itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

In addition, it is possible to accumulate behavior information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out multiple behavior information at once when managing the behavior of game results over a specified period of time.

Feature C19. A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C18, characterized in that the predetermined memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature C19 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features C1 to C19. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A first storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game;
a second storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured in a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the specified storage means when a specific event occurs as a result of a game;
a first external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the control CPU 112) for outputting the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine in such a manner that it is possible to recognize that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event;
A second external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the control CPU 112) outputs the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature D1, it is possible to read information stored in a specified storage means from the gaming machine, and to use the read information to identify the occurrence mode of a specified event and the occurrence mode of a specific event. Furthermore, when the external output is performed, the specified information is output to the outside in a manner that makes it possible to recognize that the specified information corresponds to a specified event, and the specific information is output to the outside in a manner that makes it possible to recognize that the specific information corresponds to a specific event. This makes it possible to identify the occurrence mode of each event using the information read from the specified storage means, even if the second control means does not process the information.

Feature D2. A gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is provided with a means for externally outputting corresponding information when the specified event occurs (a function for executing the processing of step S218 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature D2, in a configuration in which corresponding information is output to the outside when a specified event occurs, the specified information is stored in a specified storage means. This makes it possible to easily grasp the number of occurrences and frequency of a specified event by using the corresponding information, while accurately grasping the number of occurrences and frequency of a specified event by using the specified information stored in the specified storage means.

Feature D3. The gaming machine described in Feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the predetermined information is count information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is count information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to feature D3, the specified information is count information of the number of times a specified event has occurred, and the specific information is count information of the number of times a specific event has occurred, making it possible to manage the occurrence patterns of the specified event and the occurrence patterns of the specific event while minimizing the information volume of the specified information and the specific information.

Feature D4: Equipped with a program output means (function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102);
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the first external output means and the second external output means utilize the information output unit to output information stored in the specified storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature D4, it is possible to externally output information stored in a specified storage means by utilizing an information output unit for externally outputting a control program. This makes it possible to externally output information stored in a specified storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature D5. The gaming machine described in Feature D4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a selection means (a function for executing the process of step S902 in the main CPU 63) that identifies which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is to be output from the information output unit, and causes information corresponding to the identification result to be output.

According to feature D5, in a configuration in which information stored in a specified storage means is output to the outside using an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output to the outside is the control program or the information stored in the specified storage means, and outputs the identified information to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature D6. The gaming machine described in Feature D5, characterized in that the selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit.

According to feature D6, the information to be output from the information output unit is identified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for selecting the information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature D7. A gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) that prestores the control program has the information output section, the first external output means, and the second external output means.

Feature D7 makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths to the information output unit within the chip. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal paths to the information output unit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features D1 to D7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A program output means (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102);
An information output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management CPU 112) for outputting special information using the information output unit;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature E1, it is possible to output special information to the outside by utilizing an information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a selection means (a function for executing the process of step S902 in the main CPU 63) that identifies whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, and outputs information corresponding to the identification result.

According to feature E2, in a configuration in which special information is output to the outside using an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output to the outside is the control program or the special information, and outputs the identified information to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Feature E2, characterized in that the selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit.

According to feature E3, the information to be output from the information output unit is identified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for selecting the information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature E4. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) that prestores the control program has the information output unit and the information output means.

Feature E4 makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths to the information output unit within the chip. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal paths to the information output unit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features E1 to E4. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. Equipped with a first control means (main CPU 63) and a second control means (management CPU 112),
The first control means is
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the master CPU 63, and a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) for awarding a bonus to a player when a predetermined event occurs;
An information transmission means (a function of executing an output process for management in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs;
Equipped with
The second control means, when receiving the predetermined event information, stores the corresponding information in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main RAM 65 in the tenth embodiment), thereby storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured in a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the occurrence number or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event to be specified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment).

According to feature F1, a bonus is awarded to a player when a predetermined event occurs. This allows the player to play in the hope that the predetermined event will occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means, and predetermined information that allows the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event to be identified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to store and retain information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, since the second control means, which is provided separately from the first control means having the bonus granting means, has a predetermined memory execution means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described without excessively increasing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, characterized in that the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature F2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means.

Feature F3. The predetermined storage execution means, when a specific event occurs, executes a storage process of information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined storage means, so that specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the number of occurrences or frequency of the specific event to be specified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means;
The first control means is
A first transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when the predetermined event occurs;
A second transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when the specific event occurs;
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature F3, not only the specified information corresponding to the specified event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the occurrence mode of the specified event but also the occurrence mode of the specific event. In addition, by using both the specified information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of occurrence frequency between the specified event and the specific event.

In addition, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. This allows the type of information to be transmitted to correspond to the signal path, making it possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing between each type of information in the second control means.

Feature F4. The gaming machine described in Feature F3, characterized in that the first control means includes a third transmission means (a function for outputting one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function for outputting one of the open/close execution mode signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment) that transmits identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists to the second control means via a third path.

According to feature F4, it is possible to distinguish whether or not a predetermined situation exists and to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event. In addition, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not a predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing the identification information from other information such as the first information and the second information in the second control means.

Feature F5. The gaming machine described in Feature F3 or F4, characterized in that the first control means includes an identification information transmission means (a function for executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means.

According to feature F5, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, there is no need to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F6. The gaming machine described in Feature F5, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature F6, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the first control means transmits identification information to the second control means, so that in a situation where a predetermined event and a specific event may occur, it becomes possible for the second control means to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature F7. The gaming machine described in Feature F5 or F6, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature F7, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, making it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature F8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features F5 to F7, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, includes a means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing correspondence information in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event.

According to feature F8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the second control means every time the first information or second information is transmitted from the first control means. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and second information.

Feature F9. The first control means is provided with a third transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function of outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment) that transmits third information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists to the second control means via a third path;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F5 to F8, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation exists even without receiving the identification information.

According to feature F9, it is possible to distinguish whether or not a predetermined situation exists and to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that makes it possible to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. The gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F9, characterized in that the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature F10 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features F1 to F10. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group A, feature group B, feature group C, feature group D, feature group E, and feature group F can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be properly managed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A first control means (main CPU 63),
A second control means (control CPU 112) that receives information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means is
A first transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a first event occurs;
A second transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) for transmitting second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a second event occurs;
An identification information transmission means (a function of executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and that the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature G1, when a first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a second event occurs, the second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. This allows the type of information to be transmitted to correspond to the signal path, making it possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing between each type of information in the second control means.

In addition, because identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, there is no need to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature G2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the first control means transmits identification information to the second control means, so that in a situation where a game ball may enter a predetermined ball entry means and a specific ball entry means, it becomes possible for the second control means to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature G3. The gaming machine described in Feature G1 or G2, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature G3, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, making it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature G4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G3, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, includes a means for storing in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) correspondence information that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event (a function for executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112).

According to feature G4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify an event corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the second control means every time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and the second information.

Feature G5. The first control means is provided with a third transmission means for transmitting third information, which enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path (a function for outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function for outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation is present even without receiving the identification information.

According to feature G5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not a specified situation exists. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that makes it possible to identify whether or not a specified situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature G6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G5, characterized in that the number of signal paths capable of transmitting information from the first control means to the second control means is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means.

According to feature G6, by providing a number of signal paths greater than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, it is possible to accommodate an increase or decrease in the number of types of information depending on the model of the gaming machine without changing the configuration related to the signal paths. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G6, characterized in that the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature G7 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features G1 to G7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group G can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to have an optimal communication configuration, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3204 to S3205 of the master CPU 63 in the 13th embodiment) that stores predetermined information (numerical information measured in each of the counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e in the 13th embodiment) in the predetermined storage means (the normal counter area 171, the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the high frequency support mode counter area 173 in the 13th embodiment) when a predetermined event occurs as a result of playing;
An information deriving means (a function for executing the process of step S3504 of the master CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for deriving aspect information corresponding to the game result during a predetermined period by using the predetermined information;
A limiting means for limiting the progress of the game when the aspect information is derived by the information derivation means (a function for executing the processes of steps S3404 to S3407 of the master CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3809 of the master CPU 63 in the fourteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature H1, when a specified event occurs, the corresponding information is stored in a specified storage means, and the specified information is stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a specified event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence mode of a specified event. Furthermore, by storing and holding the specified information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the specified information.

In addition, by using the specified information stored in the specified storage means, the gaming machine derives behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specified period. This makes it possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game results during a specified period, for example.

In addition, when the mode information is derived, the progress of the game is restricted. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation different from the situation in which normal play is performed. This eliminates the need to run normal game progress and the derivation of mode information in parallel, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature H2. The gaming machine described in Feature H1, wherein the limiting means limits the execution of at least some of the processes for progressing the game.

According to feature H2, when mode information is derived, the execution of at least some of the processes for progressing the game is restricted, making it possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of processes per unit time when mode information is derived.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the information deriving means derives the mode information after the progress of the game is restricted by the restricting means.

According to feature H3, by deriving the behavior information after the progress of the game is restricted, it becomes possible to derive the behavior information in a situation where no new predetermined events occur in association with the progress of the game.

Feature H4. A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
Equipped with
the predetermined storage execution means, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means as the predetermined event, executes storage of information corresponding thereto in the predetermined storage means, thereby storing the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means;
The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the limiting means limits the launching of the gaming balls by the launching means.

According to feature H4, the mode information is derived after the release of the game ball is restricted, so that it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the entry of the game ball into the specified ball entry means, which is the trigger for changing the mode information, is restricted.

Feature H5. The information deriving means derives the mode information after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the limiting means limited the launch of the game ball by the launching means,
The gaming machine described in feature H4, wherein the specified period is set to a period longer than the longest period expected to be required for a gaming ball launched from the launching means to enter the specified ball entry means.

According to feature H5, when the mode information is derived, the mode information is derived after a period of time that is longer than the longest period of time expected to be required from when the launch of the game ball is restricted until the game ball launched from the launch means enters the predetermined ball entry means has elapsed. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the game ball does not reliably enter the predetermined ball entry means, which would be the trigger for changing the mode information.

Feature H6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H5, characterized in that the limiting means limits the progress of a game based on the occurrence of a trigger for deriving the mode information, and does not limit the progress of a game even if a trigger for deriving the mode information occurs while a specific operation is being performed on the gaming machine.

According to feature H6, when a specific action is being performed on the gaming machine, even if a trigger for deriving mode information occurs, the progress of the game is not restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a specific action from being hindered by the occurrence of a trigger for deriving mode information.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the limiting means limits the progress of the game after the specific action ends if an opportunity to derive the mode information occurs while the specific action is being performed on the gaming machine.

According to feature H7, if a trigger for deriving mode information occurs while a specific action is being performed on the gaming machine, the progress of the game is restricted after the specific action ends, making it possible to derive mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the occurrence of a trigger for deriving mode information, without impeding the execution of the specific action.

Feature H8. A lottery process execution means (a function for executing the process of step S3003 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes a lottery process when the lottery condition is met;
A game control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2808 to S2810 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for controlling a game execution means (special chart display unit 37a) to perform a game operation for a predetermined duration and to be in a state corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery processing;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature H6 or H7, wherein the situation in which the specific action is being performed includes a situation in which the game round action is being performed by the game round execution means.

According to feature H8, even if a trigger for deriving mode information occurs while a game is being played, the game progress is not restricted. This makes it possible to derive mode information in a situation where the game progress is restricted, without interrupting the game play operation.

Feature H9. Equipped with a variable ball entry means (special phone winning device 32) that can be opened so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the game,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H6 to H8, characterized in that the situation in which the specific action is being performed includes a situation in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state.

According to feature H9, when the variable ball entry means is in an open state, the progress of the game is not restricted even if an opportunity to derive the mode information occurs. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, while not interrupting the open state of the variable ball entry means.

Feature H10. An information storage means (main RAM 65) in which information necessary for controlling the progress of the game in the control means (main CPU 63) is written;
An initialization execution means for executing initialization of the information storage means when an initialization trigger occurs (a function for executing the process of step S3709 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
When information setting is performed so that the progress of the game is restricted by the restricting means, a means for preventing the initialization execution means from initializing the information storage means (a function for executing the process of step S3704 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, comprising:

According to feature H10, when information is set so that the limiting means limits the progress of a game, initialization of the information storage means in response to the occurrence of an initialization trigger is prevented. This makes it possible to prevent initialization of the information storage means from being executed in response to a situation in which the progress of a game is limited in which the mode information is derived, even if an operation that erroneously generates an initialization trigger is performed in an attempt to release the limited situation.

Feature H11. A separate execution means for executing initialization of the information storage means when a separate trigger different from the initialization trigger occurs (a function for executing the processes of steps S3706 to S3708 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
The gaming machine described in feature H10, characterized in that initialization of the information storage means is executed by the separate execution means even when the information setting is performed so that the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means.

According to feature H11, even if information is set so that the limiting means limits the progress of the game, the information storage means is initialized if another trigger occurs. This makes it possible to leave room for the initialization of the information storage means to be executed even if the progress of the game is limited in the situation in which the mode information is derived.

Feature H12. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H11, characterized in that the state in which the game progress is restricted by the restricting means is lifted when the restriction period has elapsed.

According to feature H12, the state in which the game progress is restricted in the situation in which the mode information is derived is lifted when the restriction period has elapsed, making it possible to prevent an event from occurring in which the game progress is left in a restricted state.

Feature H13. Equipped with a performance control means (sound/light side CPU 163, display control device 82) that controls the performance execution means (pattern display device 41) so that the performance is executed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H12, wherein the presentation control means continues execution of the presentation even if the limiting means imposes a limit on the progress of the game.

According to feature H13, even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where the mode information is derived, the performance execution means continues to execute the performance. This makes it possible to prevent the performance from ending immediately even if an opportunity to derive the mode information occurs while the player is playing the game and the progress of the game is restricted, and makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

Feature H14: The presentation control means includes a series of presentation control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound/light side CPU 163 in the thirteenth embodiment, the display control device 82) that controls the presentation execution means so that a series of presentations (presentations for game rounds) is executed over a predetermined presentation period when a predetermined start trigger occurs;
The gaming machine described in feature H13 is characterized in that, when the restriction means imposes a restriction on the progress of the game while the series of performances is being executed, the series of performance control means does not execute control to end the series of performances even if the specified performance period has elapsed.

According to feature H14, when a series of presentations is being executed by the presentation execution means and an opportunity to derive mode information occurs and game progress is restricted, control to end the series of presentations is not executed even if the specified presentation period that would normally be the opportunity to end the series of presentations has elapsed. This makes it possible to make the series of presentations continue in a situation where game progress is restricted, and makes it possible to make the player believe that the presentation is continuing even when game progress is restricted in a situation where mode information is derived.

Feature H15. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the limiting means;
A second control means (a sound/light side CPU 163, a display control device 82) having the performance control means;
Equipped with
the performance control means controls the performance execution means so that a new performance is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means;
The gaming machine described in feature H14, wherein the series of performance control means cancels a situation in which control to end the series of performances is not executed even after the specified performance period has elapsed due to the restriction imposed by the restriction means on the progress of the game while the series of performances is being executed, when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to feature H15, the state in which a series of presentations is continued in a situation in which game progress is restricted in order to derive mode information is released when start trigger information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means in order to start a new presentation. This eliminates the need to transmit dedicated information from the first control means to the second control means in order to release such a state in which a series of presentations is continued.

Feature H16: A configuration in which the effect execution means performs a variable display of a pattern as the series of effects, and when the series of effects ends, the pattern is held in a waiting area and the waiting display is performed, and then the pattern is stopped and displayed;
The gaming machine described in feature H14 or H15, wherein the series of presentation control means continues the standby display even after the specified presentation period has elapsed if the restriction means imposes a restriction on the progress of the game while the series of presentations is being executed.

According to feature H16, when a series of presentations is continued in a situation where game progress is restricted in order to derive mode information, the standby display, which is the stage before the image is displayed as still when the series of presentations is ended, is continued. This makes it possible to continue a series of presentations in a situation where game progress is restricted, while allowing the player to recognize the result of the image being stopped. Furthermore, when the restriction on game progress is lifted and the series of presentations is ended, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the still display at the timing when the restriction on game progress is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of presentations when the restriction on game progress is lifted.

Feature H17. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H13 to H16, in which the presentation control means allows the presentation to continue when the limiting means is restricting the progress of the game, but also provides a notification that the restriction is being imposed.

According to feature H17, when a series of effects continues in a situation where game progress is restricted in order to derive mode information, a corresponding notification is also executed, thereby preventing the player from becoming confused by the fact that the series of effects is continuing for longer than expected.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features H1 to H17. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A performance control means (sound/light side CPU 163, display control device 82) that controls a performance execution means (pattern display device 41) so that a performance is executed;
A limiting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S3404 to S3407 of the master CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for limiting the progress of the game based on the occurrence of a limiting opportunity;
Equipped with
The effect control means is configured to continue execution of the effect even if the limiting means imposes a limit on the progress of the game.

According to feature I1, the game progress is restricted based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger, which allows the gaming machine to be appropriately managed. In this case, even if the game progress is restricted, the performance execution means continues to execute the performance. This makes it possible to prevent the performance from ending immediately even if a restriction trigger occurs while the player is playing a game and the game progress is restricted, and makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming confused when the game progress is restricted.

Feature I2. The presentation control means includes a series of presentation control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound/light side CPU 163 in the thirteenth embodiment, a display control device 82) that controls the presentation execution means so that a series of presentations (presentations for game rounds) is executed over a predetermined presentation period when a predetermined start trigger occurs,
The gaming machine described in feature I1 is characterized in that when the restriction means imposes a restriction on the progress of the game while the series of performances is being executed, the series of performance control means does not execute control to end the series of performances even if the specified performance period has elapsed.

According to feature I2, if a restriction trigger occurs and the progress of the game is restricted while a series of effects is being executed by the effect execution means, control to end the series of effects is not executed even if the specified performance period that would normally be the trigger for ending the series of effects has elapsed. This makes it possible to make the series of effects continue in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, and makes it possible for the player to believe that the execution of the effects is continuing even when the progress of the game is restricted.

Feature I3. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the limiting means;
A second control means (a sound/light side CPU 163, a display control device 82) having the performance control means;
Equipped with
the performance control means controls the performance execution means so that a new performance is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means;
The gaming machine described in feature I2 is characterized in that the series of performance control means cancels a situation in which control to end the series of performances is not executed even if the specified performance period has elapsed due to the restriction imposed by the restriction means on the progress of the game while the series of performances is being executed, when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to feature I3, the state in which a series of effects continues when game progress is restricted is released when start trigger information is sent from the first control means to the second control means to start a new effect. This eliminates the need to send dedicated information from the first control means to the second control means to release such a state in which a series of effects continues.

Feature I4. The configuration in which the effect execution means performs a variable display of a pattern as the series of effects, and when the series of effects ends, the pattern is held in a waiting area and the waiting display is performed, and then the pattern is stopped and displayed;
The gaming machine described in feature I2 or I3 is characterized in that, when the restriction means imposes a restriction on the progress of the game while the series of performances is being executed, the series of performance control means continues the standby display even after the specified performance period has elapsed.

According to feature I4, when a series of presentations is continued in a situation where game progress is restricted, the standby display, which is the stage before the image is displayed as still when the series of presentations is ended, is continued. This makes it possible to continue a series of presentations in a situation where game progress is restricted, while allowing the player to recognize the result of the image being stopped. Furthermore, when the restriction on game progress is lifted and the series of presentations is ended, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the still display at the timing when the restriction on game progress is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of presentations when the restriction on game progress is lifted.

Feature I5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I4, in which the presentation control means allows the presentation to continue when the limiting means is restricting the progress of the game, but also provides a notification that the restriction is being imposed.

According to feature I5, if a series of effects continues in a situation where game progress is restricted, a corresponding notification is also executed, which makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming confused by the fact that the series of effects is continuing for longer than expected.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features I1 to I5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group J>
Feature J1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing the process of step S5001 of the master MPU 342 in the 16th embodiment) for storing the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means (the advantageous game number counter 344b) by storing the corresponding information when a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game;
An information deriving means (a function for executing the process of step S5103 of the master MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for deriving aspect information corresponding to the game result during a predetermined period by using the predetermined information;
A restriction means (a function for executing the processes of steps S5107 to S5113 of the master MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for restricting the progress of a game based on the fact that the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is information corresponding to regulations;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature J1, when a specified event occurs, the corresponding information is stored in a specified storage means, and the specified information is stored in the specified storage means. Then, using the specified information, behavior information corresponding to the game results in a specified period is derived, and if the derived behavior information corresponds to regulation information, restrictions are imposed on the progress of the game. This makes it possible to impose restrictions on the progress of the game depending on the occurrence mode of the specified event, and makes it possible to deal with cases where the occurrence mode of the specified event does not match the mode envisaged during the design stage of the gaming machine. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the gaming machine in an optimal manner.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein the constraint means imposes a constraint that enables the behavior information to be prevented from becoming the regulated information based on the behavior information being the regulated information.

According to feature J2, even if the mode information becomes regulated information, a restriction is imposed to prevent the mode information from becoming regulated information. This makes it possible to ensure that even if the mode information becomes regulated information, the mode information remains within the range of information anticipated during the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J3. A state transition means for transitioning the game state to a predetermined game state (a function for executing the processes of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
A predetermined termination means for terminating the predetermined game state when a predetermined termination trigger occurs (a function for executing the process of step S5009 of the master MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, wherein the restriction means terminates the specified gaming state based on the fact that the mode information is information compliant with the regulation, even if the specified termination trigger has not occurred.

According to feature J3, if the mode information is regulated information, the specified game state will end even if the specified termination trigger does not occur. This makes it possible to forcibly end the specified game state depending on the occurrence mode of the specified event, and makes it possible to restrict the execution mode of the game state when the occurrence mode of the specified event does not match the mode assumed during the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J4. The gaming machine described in Feature J3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Feature J4 makes it possible to restrict the degree of advantage when the occurrence mode of a specified event does not match the mode assumed during the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J5. A gaming machine according to feature J3 or J4, characterized in that the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature J5, if the occurrence mode of a predetermined event occurring in a predetermined game state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, the predetermined game state is forcibly terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined game state from deviating from the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J6: The predetermined period of time elapses when the number of games played reaches a predetermined reference number of times,
The gaming machine described in feature J5, wherein the predetermined reference number of times is a number greater than the number of times that the predetermined gaming state can be continued when the predetermined gaming state is newly started.

Feature J6 makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a specified game state is forcibly terminated in relation to the occurrence of a specified event from occurring in each specified game state.

Feature J7. A gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, characterized in that the conditions for the occurrence of the predetermined termination trigger in the predetermined gaming state are not notified.

According to feature J7, by not notifying the player of the conditions for a predetermined termination trigger to occur in a predetermined game state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the predetermined game state is forcibly terminated in relation to the occurrence of a predetermined event.

Feature J8. A state transition means for transitioning the game state to a predetermined game state (a function for executing the processes of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
A predetermined termination means for terminating the predetermined game state when a predetermined termination trigger occurs (a function for executing the process of step S5009 of the master MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J7, characterized in that the restriction means restricts the occurrence of a transition to the specified gaming state based on the state information being information compliant with the regulation.

According to feature J8, if the mode information is regulated information, the transition to a specified gaming state is regulated. This makes it possible to forcibly prevent the transition to a specified gaming state depending on the occurrence mode of a specified event, and makes it possible to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state when the occurrence mode of the specified event does not match the mode assumed during the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J9. The gaming machine described in Feature J8, wherein the restriction means varies the period during which the transition to the specified gaming state is restricted from occurring thereafter in accordance with the mode information.

According to feature J9, the period during which transition to a specified game state is restricted varies depending on the mode information, making it possible to prevent the restriction on transition to a specified game state from being set too low or too high regardless of the mode information.

Feature J10. The state transition means includes a transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4903 to S4905 of the master MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for executing a transition determination process for determining whether or not to transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger;
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with an alternative benefit granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4912 to S4914 of the main MPU 342 in the 17th embodiment) that grants an alternative benefit instead of executing the transition determination process when the specified trigger occurs in a situation where the transition to the specified gaming state is restricted by the restriction means.

According to feature J10, if a predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where transition to a predetermined game state is forcibly prevented in relation to the mode information, a transition decision process for deciding whether or not to transition to the predetermined game state is not executed, but an alternative benefit is awarded. This makes it possible to prevent the player from thinking that a predetermined trigger was a waste when it occurs in a situation where transition to a predetermined game state is forcibly prevented.

Feature J11. The gaming machine described in Feature J10, wherein the alternative benefit provision means makes the content of the alternative benefit more advantageous or makes the content of the alternative benefit more likely to be advantageous the more the predetermined trigger occurs in a situation in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restriction means.

Feature J11 makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation for the occurrence of a predetermined trigger even in a situation where transition to a predetermined game state is forcibly prevented.

Feature J12. A gaming machine as described in feature J10 or J11, characterized in that it is provided with a means for notifying the player that the alternative benefit has been granted.

According to feature J12, by notifying the player that an alternative benefit has been granted, it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation to continue playing even in a situation where transition to a specified gaming state is forcibly prevented.

Feature J13. A gaming machine according to any one of features J10 to J12, characterized in that when the alternative benefit is granted, transition to the specified gaming state becomes more likely to occur after the situation in which the restriction means prevents transition to the specified gaming state from occurring is lifted.

Feature J13 makes it possible to associate the granting of a substitute benefit with a transition to a predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible to make the player expect a transition to the predetermined gaming state even if a predetermined trigger occurs in a situation in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented.

Feature J14. A gaming machine according to any one of features J8 to J13, characterized in that the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Feature J14 makes it possible to restrict the degree of advantage when the occurrence mode of a specified event does not match the mode assumed during the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J15. A gaming machine according to any one of features J8 to J14, characterized in that the specified event is an event that occurs in the specified gaming state.

According to feature J15, if the occurrence mode of a predetermined event that occurs in a predetermined gaming state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from deviating from the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features J1 to J15. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. An opening/closing body (front door 312) that can be opened and closed;
A predetermined device (main control device 340) provided in a predetermined area that is exposed when the opening/closing body is opened;
A lighting means (lighting devices 349a, 349b) capable of illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device when in an illuminated state;
A lighting control means (a function of executing a lighting process in the main MPU 342) for adjusting a control state of the lighting means according to a position of the opening/closing body;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature K1, when checking for abnormalities in a specific device, the opening and closing body is opened, and a lighting means is provided for illuminating at least a part of the specific device, making it easier to check. In this case, the control state of the lighting means is adjusted according to the position of the opening and closing body. This makes it possible to illuminate the lighting means in a preferred manner according to the position of the opening and closing body. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the gaming machine.

Feature K2. The gaming machine described in Feature K1, characterized in that the lighting control means controls the lighting means so that the lighting state is non-illuminated when the opening/closing body is closed, and is illuminated when the opening/closing body is opened.

According to feature K2, when the opening/closing body is closed, the lighting means is in a non-illuminated state. This makes it possible to prevent the lighting means from being meaninglessly illuminated in a situation where the specified device is not being checked. In addition, when the opening/closing body is opened, the lighting means is automatically illuminated. This makes it easier to check the specified device, since there is no need to perform a separate operation to turn the lighting means on.

Feature K3. The gaming machine described in Feature K1 or K2, characterized in that the lighting means is provided in the specified area.

According to feature K3, by providing a lighting means in a specified area, it becomes easier to illuminate a specified device by the lighting means in response to the opening operation of the opening/closing body.

Feature K4: The opening and closing body is displaceable within a predetermined displacement range from a closed position to a maximum open position,
The gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that the lighting control means controls the lighting means to be in the lighting state when the opening/closing body is present within a lighting-compatible range that is a part of the specified displacement range, and controls the lighting means to be in the non-lighting state when the opening/closing body is operated to be opened but is not present within the lighting-compatible range.

According to feature K4, the lighting means is not turned on regardless of which open position the opening/closing body is placed in, but is selectively turned on in some open positions. This makes it possible to turn on the lighting means only in favorable conditions for checking a specific device, and turn off the lighting means in conditions where turning on the lighting means would make it more difficult to check the specific device.

Feature K5. The illumination range does not include the maximum open position;
The gaming machine described in feature K4, wherein the lighting control means controls the lighting means to be in the non-lighting state when the opening/closing body is in the maximum open position.

According to feature K5, the lighting means is in a non-illuminating state when the opening/closing body is in the maximum open position. This makes it possible to prevent the lighting means from making it difficult to check the specified device because the lighting means is in a non-illuminating state in a situation where the lighting in the game hall is sufficiently bright for the specified device.

Feature K6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K5, characterized in that the specified device is a control device having a control board (main control board 341) and a transparent box (board box 345) that houses the control board.

According to feature K6, the control device is illuminated by the lighting means in response to the opening operation of the opening/closing body, making it easier to check the control board and board box of the control device.

Feature K7: The gaming machine is provided with a box body (casing 311) that opens toward the front,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the front opening of the box body is closed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that the specified area exists in the internal space of the box body.

Feature K7 makes it possible to illuminate a specific device provided inside the box when the opening/closing body is opened.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features K1 to K7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a game management process in the master MPU 342 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the nineteenth embodiment) for storing information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs as a result of a game, by executing the storage of the information in the predetermined storage means (the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 in the nineteenth embodiment);
information calculation means for calculating aspect information corresponding to game results during a predetermined period using the predetermined information (a function for executing the processes of steps S5503 and S5508 in the master MPU 342 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S5804 and S5807 in the management CPU 112 in the nineteenth embodiment);
Equipped with
As the predetermined storage means, at least a first storage means (a first accumulation buffer 363 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a first history memory 371 in the nineteenth embodiment) and a second storage means (a second accumulation buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a second history memory 372 in the nineteenth embodiment) are provided,
The predetermined storage execution means includes:
a first predetermined storage execution means for causing the storage of information corresponding to the predetermined event occurring during a first period as the predetermined period to be executed in the first storage means, thereby causing the predetermined information to be stored in the first storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S5404, S5409, and S5414 in the main MPU 342 in the 18th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S5704 in the management CPU 112 in the 19th embodiment);
a second predetermined storage execution means for causing the second storage means to store information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event during a second period as the predetermined period, thereby causing the predetermined information to be stored in the second storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S5406, S5411, and S5416 in the main MPU 342 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S5707 in the management CPU 112 in the nineteenth embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that one of the first periods and one of the second periods partially overlap.

According to feature L1, when a specified event occurs, the corresponding information is stored in a specified storage means, and the specified information is stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a specified event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence mode of a specified event. Furthermore, by storing and holding the specified information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the specified information.

In addition, the gaming machine uses the specified information stored in the specified storage means to calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specified period. This makes it possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game results during a specified period, for example, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

The predetermined storage means includes a first storage means and a second storage means, and the first storage means is used to perform management during a first period as a predetermined period, and the second storage means is used to perform management during a second period as a predetermined period, and one first period and one second period overlap in part. This makes it possible to derive behavior information corresponding to the management results during the first period in the middle of one second period, and to derive behavior information corresponding to the management results during the second period in the middle of one first period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving behavior information while ensuring the first and second periods as periods during which management is performed. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving behavior information while ensuring the first and second periods as periods during which management is performed, without excessively increasing the storage capacity of each of the first and second storage means.

Feature L2. The gaming machine described in Feature L1, characterized in that the first period and the second period have the same end conditions.

According to feature L2, even in a configuration in which management is performed using both the first storage means and the second storage means, it is possible to derive behavior information corresponding to a certain period of time.

Feature L3: The first predetermined storage execution means starts a new first period following one of the first periods when the one of the first periods ends;
the second predetermined storage execution means starts a new second period following one of the second periods when the one of the second periods ends,
A gaming machine described in feature L1 or L2, characterized in that the difference between the first period and the second period is constant.

Feature L3 makes it possible to derive behavior information corresponding to each of the first and second periods while ensuring a certain degree of misalignment.

Feature L4: The first predetermined storage execution means starts a new first period following one of the first periods when the first period ends, and initializes the first storage means or sets the order of storage areas to be stored in the first storage means to an initial order when the first period ends and the state information in the first period is calculated by the information calculation means;
The gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that the second predetermined memory execution means starts a new second period immediately after one of the second periods when the one of the second periods ends, and when the one of the second periods ends and the status information for the second period is calculated by the information calculation means, initializes the second memory means or sets the order of the memory areas to be stored in the second memory means to the initial order.

According to feature L4, the first storage means is sufficient in capacity to store the specified information corresponding to the first period, and the second storage means is sufficient in capacity to store the specified information corresponding to the second period. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the capacity of the first storage means and the second storage means.

Feature L5. A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that it is provided with a means (in the 18th embodiment, a function of executing management processing in the main MPU 342) for notifying the content corresponding to the status information in the first period calculated by the information calculation means when the first period has elapsed, and for notifying the content corresponding to the status information in the second period calculated by the information calculation means when the second period has elapsed.

According to feature L5, by notifying the content corresponding to the behavior information as the first period and the second period progress, it is possible to notify the content corresponding to the behavior information in a situation that is relatively close to the current situation.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied to the features L1 to L5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group H, feature group I, feature group J, feature group K, and feature group L can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be properly managed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: gaming machines equipped with a picture display device that variably displays multiple pictures, in which the variable display of the multiple pictures is started by operating a start operation means, the variable display of the multiple pictures is stopped by operating a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a bonus is given to the player according to the picture after the stop.

10... Pachinko machine, 24a... Outlet, 31... General winning port, 32... Special winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 41... Pattern display device, 61... Main control board, 62... MPU, 63... Main CPU, 65... Main RAM, 82... Display control device, 92... Payout CPU, 102... Reading terminal, 112... Management CPU, 116... Correspondence memory, 131... Calculation result memory, 151... Notification light-emitting section, 163... Sound and light CPU, 1 71...Normal counter area, 171a-171e...Counters, 172...Counter area for open/close execution mode, 172a-172e...Counters, 173...Counter area for high frequency support mode, 173a-173e...Counters, 311...Housing, 312...Front door, 340...Main control device, 341...Main control board, 342...Main MPU, 344b...Advantageous game number counter, 345...Board box, 349a, 349b...Lighting device.

Claims (1)

A performance control means for controlling the performance execution means so that a performance is executed;
A limiting means for limiting the progress of a game based on the occurrence of a limiting trigger;
Equipped with
The effect control means is configured to continue execution of the effect even if the limiting means imposes a limit on the progress of the game.

Images